Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Shop
Manual
DUMP TRUCK
SERIAL NUMBERS
Unsafe use of this machine may cause serious injury or death. Operators and maintenance personnel must read and understand this manual before operating or maintaining this machine.
This manual should be kept in or near the machine for reference, and periodically reviewed by all
personnel who will come into contact with it.
This material is proprietary to Komatsu America Corp (KAC), and is not to be reproduced, used, or disclosed except in accordance with written authorization from KAC.
It is the policy of the Company to improve products whenever it is possible and practical to do so. The
Company reserves the right to make changes or add improvements at any time without incurring any obligation to install such changes on products sold previously.
Because of continuous research and development, periodic revisions may be made to this publication.
Customers should contact their local Komatsu distributor for information on the latest revision.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
NOTES
FOREWORD
This Shop Manual is written for use by the service technician and is designed to help the technician become fully
knowledgeable of the truck and all its systems in order to keep it running and in production. All maintenance personnel should read and understand the materials in this manual before performing maintenance and/or operational
checks on the truck. All safety notices, warnings and cautions should be understood and followed when accomplishing repairs on the truck.
The first section covers component descriptions, truck specifications and safe work practices, as well as other general information. The major portion of the manual pertains to disassembly, service and reassembly. Each major serviceable area is dealt with individually. For example: The disassembly, service and reassembly of the radiator
group is discussed as a unit. The same is true of the engine and engine accessories, and so on through the entire
mechanical detail of the truck. Disassembly should be carried only as far as necessary to accomplish needed
repairs.
The illustrations used in this manual are, at times, typical of the component shown and may not necessarily depict
a specific model.
This manual shows dimensioning of U.S. standard and metric (SI) units throughout and all references to "Right",
"Left", "Front", or "Rear" are made with respect to the operator's normal seated position, unless specifically stated
otherwise.
Standard torque requirements are shown in torque charts in the general information section and individual torques
are provided in the text in bold face type, such as 100 ft.lbs. (135 N.m) torque. All torque specifications have
10% tolerance unless otherwise specified.
A Product Identification plate is normally located on the truck frame in front of the right side front wheel and designates the Truck Model Number, Product Identification Number (vehicle serial number), and Maximum G.V.W.
(Gross Vehicle Weight) rating.
The KOMATSU Truck Model designation consists of three numbers and one letter (i.e. 930E). The three numbers
represent the basic truck model. The letter "M" designates a Mechanical drive and the letter "E" designates an
Electrical propulsion system.
The Product Identification Number (vehicle serial number) contains information which will identify the original manufacturing bill of material for this unit. This complete number will be necessary for proper ordering of many service
parts and/or warranty consideration.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is what determines the load on the drive train, frame, tires, and other components. The vehicle design and application guidelines are sensitive to the total maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) and this means the total weight: the Empty Vehicle Weight + the fuel & lubricants + the payload.
To determine allowable payload: Service all lubricants for proper level and fill fuel tank of empty truck (which
includes all accessories, body liners, tailgates, etc.) and then weigh truck.Record this value and subtract from the
GVW rating. The result is the allowable payload.
NOTE: Accumulations of mud, frozen material, etc. become a part of the GVW and reduces allowable payload. To
maximize payload and to keep from exceeding the GVW rating, these accumulations should be removed as often
as practical.
Exceeding the allowable payload will reduce expected life of truck components.
A00017 03/01
Introduction
A-1
A-2
Introduction
03/01 A00017
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B
ENGINE SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
ELECTRIC SYSTEM (24 VDC. NON-PROPULSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D
ELECTRIC PROPULSION AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
DRIVE AXLE, SPINDLES AND WHEELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G
HYDRAIR II SUSPENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H
BRAKE CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L
A00017 03/01
Introduction
A-3
A-4
Introduction
03/01 A00017
SECTION A
GENERAL INFORMATION
INDEX
A01001 02/94
Index
A1-1
NOTES
A1-2
Index
02/94 A01001
Operator's Cab
Alternator (GE-GTA42)
The diesel engine drives an in-line alternator at
engine speed. The alternator produces AC current
which is rectified to DC within the main control cabinet. The rectified DC power is converted back to AC
by groups of devices called "inverters", also within
the main control cabinet. Each inverter consists of six
"phase modules" under the control of a "gate drive
unit" (GDU). The GDU controls the operation of each
phase module.
Each phase module contains an air-cooled solidstate switch referred to as a "gate turn-off thyristor"
(GTO). The GTO cycles on and off at varying frequencies to create an AC power signal from the DC
supply.
The AC power signal produced by each inverter is a
variable-voltage, variable-frequency signal (VVVF).
Frequency and voltage are changed to suit the operating conditions.
Blower
Both the inverters and the wheel motors produce
heat while in operation and must be cooled. Cooling
air is provided by a dual impeller in-line blower
mounted on the alternator.
Suspension
HYDRAIRII suspension cylinders located at each
wheel provide a smooth and comfortable ride for the
operator and dampens shock loads to the chassis
during loading and operation.
A02064
Power Steering
The truck is equipped with a full time power steering
system which provides positive steering control with
minimum operator effort. The system includes nitrogen-charged accumulators which automatically provide emergency power if the steering hydraulic
pressure is reduced below an established minimum.
Dynamic Retarding
The dynamic retarding is used to slow the truck during normal operation or control speed coming down a
grade. The dynamic retarding ability of the electric
system is controlled by the operator through the activation of the retarder pedal (or by operating a lever
on the steering wheel) in the operators cab and by
setting the RSC (Retarder Speed Control). Dynamic
Retarding is automatically activated, if the truck
speed goes to a preset overspeed setting.
Brake System
Service brakes at each wheel are oil-cooled multiple
disc brakes applied by an all-hydraulic actuation system. Depressing the brake pedal actuates both front
and rear brakes, after first applying the retarder. All
wheel brakes will be applied automatically, if system
pressure decreases below a preset minimum.
The parking brake is a dry disc type, mounted
inboard on each rear wheel motor, and is springapplied and hydraulically-released with wheel speed
application protection (will not apply with truck moving).
A2-1
A02064
SPECIFICATIONS
These specifications are for the standard Komatsu
930E truck. Customer options may change this listing.
ENGINE
SERVICE CAPACITIES
Komatsu SSDA16V160
No. of Cylinders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Operating Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-Stroke
Low Idle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 rpm
High Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 rpm
Full Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 rpm
Rated Brake HP . . . 2700 HP (2014 kW) @ 1900 RPM
Flywheel HP . . . . . . 2550 HP (1902 kW) @ 1900 RPM
Weight* (Dry). . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,182 pounds (9608 kg)
* Weight does not include Radiator, Sub-frame, or Alternator
DYNAMIC RETARDING
Electric Dynamic Retarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard
Maximum Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5400 HP (4026 kW)
Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3300 HP (2460 kW)
Continuously rated high-density blown grids with retard at engine idle
and retard in reverse propulsion.
A02064
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
Hoist & Brake Cooling Pump:. . . . . . . . . Tandem Gear
Rated @ . . . . . . . . 246 GPM (931 l/min.) @ 1900 RPM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .and 2500 psi (17 237 kPa)
Steering/Brake Pump: . Pressure Compensated Piston
Rated @ . . . . . . . . . 65 GPM (246 l/min.) @ 1900 RPM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .and 2750 psi (18 961 kPa)
Relief Pressure-Hoist . . . . . . . . . . 2500 psi (17.2 MPa)
Relief Pressure-Steering/Brake . . 4000 psi (27.6 MPa)
Hoist Cylinders (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-Stage Hydraulic
Tank (Vertical/Cylindrical). . . . . . . . . . Non-Pressurized
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . 250 US Gal. (947 Liters)
Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-line replaceable elements
Suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Single, Full Flow, 100 Mesh
Hoist & Steering Filters. . . . . . . . . .Beta 12 Rating =200
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual In-Line, High Pressure
SERVICE BRAKES
All Hydraulic Actuation . . . . . . . . . with Traction System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Slip / Slide Control
Front & Rear Oil-Cooled Multiple Discs- . . .each wheel
Total Friction Area / Brake . . . . 15,038 in (97 019 cm)
Maximum Apply Pressure . . . . . 2500 psi (17 238 kPa)
STEERING
Turning Circle (SAE) . . . . . . . . . . . 97 ft. 7 in. (30.4 m)
Twin hydraulic cylinders with accumulator assist to provide constant rate steering.
Emergency power steering automatically provided by
accumulators.
A2-3
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
Capacity,
Heaped @ 2:1 (SAE) . . . . . . . . . 276 yd3 (211 m3)
Struck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 yd3 (171 m3)
Width (Inside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ft. 9 in. (8.15 m)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 ft. 7 in. (3.2 m)
Loading Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ft. (7.01 m)
Dumping Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
TIRES
*Not to exceed 1,100,000 lbs. (498 957 kg) including options, fuel,
and payload. Weights in excess of this amount require factory
approval.
A2-4
A02064
SECTION A3
GENERAL SAFETY AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
INDEX
GENERAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-3
Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-3
Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-3
Clothing And Personal Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-3
Unauthorized Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-3
Leaving The Operators Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-4
Mounting And Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-4
Fire Prevention For Fuel And Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-4
Precautions When Handling At High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-5
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-5
Prevention Of Injury By Work Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-5
Fire Extinguisher And First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-5
Precautions When Using ROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-6
Precautions For Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-6
PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Safety Is Thinking Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Safety At The Worksite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Fire Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Preparing For Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Ventilation For Enclosed Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
In Operators Cab - Before Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-8
Mirrors, Windows, And Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-8
OPERATING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-8
When Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-8
Truck Operation - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-8
Check When Traveling In Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-9
Traveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-9
Traveling On Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-10
Ensure Good Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-10
Operate Carefully On Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-10
Avoid Damage To Dump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-10
Driving Near High Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-10
When Dumping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3-11
Working On Loose Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3-11
When Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3-11
Parking The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3-11
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3-11
WORKING NEAR BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-12
Starting With Booster Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-12
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-13
BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-13
Warning Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-13
Proper Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-13
A03017 11/02
A3-1
A3-2
11/02 A03017
GENERAL SAFETY
Safety records of most organizations will show that the greatest percentage of accidents are caused by unsafe acts
of persons. The remainder are caused by unsafe mechanical or physical conditions. Report all unsafe conditions to
the proper authority.
The following safety rules are provided as a guide for the operator. However, local conditions and regulations may
add many more to this list.
Read and follow all safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death.
Safety Rules
Only trained and authorized personnel can operate and maintain the machine.
Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when operating or performing maintenance on the
machine.
When working with another operator or a person on work site traffic duty, be sure all personnel understand all
hand signals that are to be used.
Safety Features
Ensure all guards and covers are in their proper position. Have any damaged guards and covers repaired. (See
Walk-Around Inspection, Operating Instructions - Section 3)
Learn the proper use of safety features such as safety locks, safety pins, and seat belts, and use these safety
features properly.
Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in good operating condition.
Improper use of safety features could result in serious bodily injury or death.
Avoid loose clothing, jewelry, and loose long hair. They can catch on
controls or in moving parts and cause serious injury or death.
Additionally, never wear oily clothes as they are flammable.
Wear a hard hat, safety glasses, safety shoes, mask and gloves when
operating or maintaining a machine. Always wear safety goggles, hard
hat and heavy gloves if your job involves scattering metal chips or minute
materials--particularly when driving pins with a hammer or when cleaning
air cleaner elements with compressed air. Also, ensure that the work area
is free from other personnel during such tasks.
Unauthorized Modification
Any modification made to this vehicle without authorization from Komatsu America Corp. can possibly create
hazards.
Before making any modification, consult the authorized regional Komatsu America Corp. distributor. Komatsu
will not be responsible for any injury or damage caused by any unauthorized modification.
A03017 11/02
A3-3
When preparing to leave the operator's seat, do not touch any control lever that is not locked. To prevent
accidental operations from occurring, always perform the following:
Move the shift control lever to NEUTRAL and apply the parking brake.
Lower the dump body, set the dump lever to the FLOAT position.
Stop the engine. When exiting the machine, always lock compartments, and take the keys with you. If the
machine should suddenly move or move in an unexpected way, this may result in serious bodily injury or
death.
Never jump on or off the machine. Never climb on or off a machine while it is moving.
When climbing on or off a machine, face the machine and use the hand-hold and steps.
Always maintain three-point contact with the hand-holds and steps to ensure that you support yourself.
When bringing tools into the operator's compartment, always pass them by hand or pull them up by rope.
If there is any oil, grease, or mud on the hand-holds or steps, wipe them clean immediately. Always keep these
components clean. Repair any damage and tighten any loose bolts.
Use the handrails and steps marked by arrows in the diagram below when getting on or off the machine.
Fuel, oil, and antifreeze can be ignited by a flame. Fuel is extremely flammable and can be hazardous.
Keep oil and fuel in a designated location and do not allow unauthorized persons to enter.
A3-4
11/02 A03017
Immediately after machine operation, engine coolant, engine oil, and hydraulic oil are at high temperatures and
are pressurized. If the cap is removed, the fluids drained, the filters are replaced, etc., there is danger of
serious burns. Allow the heat and pressure to dissipate before performing such tasks and follow proper
procedures as outlined in the service manual.
Operate the machine or perform tasks with the wind to your back, whenever possible.
Never enter or put your hand or arm or any other part of your body between movable parts such as the dump
body, chassis or cylinders. If the work equipment is operated, clearances will change and may lead to serious
bodily injury or death.
Ensure fire extinguishers are accessible and proper usage techniques are known.
Keep the phone numbers of persons you should contact in case of an emergency on
hand.
A03017 11/02
A3-5
The Rollover Protection Structure (ROPS) must be properly installed for machine operation.
The ROPS is intended to protect the operator if the machine should roll over. It is designed not only to support
the load of the machine, but also to absorb the energy of the impact.
ROPS structures installed on equipment manufactured and designed by Komatsu America Corp. fulfills all of
the regulations and standards for all countries. If it is modified or repaired without authorization from Komatsu,
or is damaged when the machine rolls over, the strength of the structure will be compromised and will not be
able to fulfill its intended purpose. Optimum strength of the structure can only be achieved if it is repaired or
modified as specified by Komatsu.
When modifying or repairing the ROPS, always consult your nearest Komatsu distributor.
Even with the ROPS installed, the operator must always use the seat belt when operating the machine.
When installing and using optional equipment, read the instruction manual for the attachment and the
information related to attachments in this manual.
Do not use attachments that are not authorized by Komatsu America Corp., or the authorized regional Komatsu
distributor. Use of unauthorized attachments could create a safety problem and adversely affect the proper
operation and useful life of the machine.
Any injuries, accidents, and product failures resulting from the use of unauthorized attachments will not be the
responsibility of Komatsu America Corp., or the authorized regional Komatsu distributor.
A3-6
11/02 A03017
When walking to and from a truck, maintain a safe distance from all machines even when the operator is
visible.
Before starting the engine, thoroughly check the area for any unusual conditions that could be dangerous.
Examine the road surface at the job site and determine the best and safest method of operation.
Choose an area where the ground is as horizontal and firm as possible before performing the operation.
If you need to operate on or near a public road, protect pedestrians and cars by designating a person for work
site traffic duty or by installing fences around the work site.
The operator must personally check the work position, the roads to be used, and existence of obstacles before
starting operations.
Always determine the travel roads at the work site and maintain them so that it is always safe for the machines
to travel.
If travel through wet areas is necessary, check the depth and flow of water before crossing the shallow parts.
Never drive through water which exceeds the permissible water depth.
Fire Prevention
Thoroughly remove wood chips, leaves, paper and other flammable items
accumulated in the engine compartment, as they could cause a fire.
Check fuel, lubrication, and hydraulic systems for leaks. Repair any leaks.
Wipe up any excess oil, fuel or other flammable fluids, and dispose of properly.
Always mount and dismount while facing the truck. Never attempt to mount or dismount the truck while it is in
motion. Always use handrails and ladders when mounting or dismounting the truck.
Check the deck areas for debris, loose hardware, and tools. Check for people and objects that might be in the
way.
Become familiar with and use all protective equipment devices on the truck and ensure that these items (antiskid material, grab bars, seat belts, etc.) are securely in place.
A03017 11/02
A3-7
Do not leave tools or spare parts lying around or allow trash to accumulate in the cab of the truck. Keep all
unauthorized reading material out of the truck cab.
Keep the cab floor, controls, steps, and handrails free of oil, grease, snow, and excess dirt.
Check the seat belt, buckle and hardware for damage or wear. Replace any worn or damaged parts. Always
use the seat belts when operating a machine.
Read and understand the contents of this manual. Read Section 3 pertaining to safety and operating
instructions with special attention. Become thoroughly acquainted with all gauges, instruments and controls
before attempting operation of the truck.
Read and understand the WARNING and CAUTION decals in the operator's cab.
Ensure the steering wheel, horn, controls and pedals are free of any oil, grease or mud.
Check operation of the windshield wiper, condition of wiper blades, and check the washer fluid reservoir level.
Be familiar with all steering and brake system controls, warning devices, road speeds and loading capabilities,
before operating the truck.
Remove any dirt from the surface of the windshield, cab windows, mirrors and lights. Good visibility may
prevent an accident.
Adjust the rear view mirror to a position where the operator can see best from the operator's seat. If any glass
or light should break, replace it with a new part.
Ensure headlights, work lights and taillights are in proper working order. Ensure that the machine is equipped
with the proper work lamps needed for the operating conditions.
Never start the engine if a warning tag has been attached to the controls.
Start and operate the machine only while seated in the operators seat.
Do not allow any unauthorized persons in the operator's compartment or any other place on the machine.
Only authorized persons are allowed to ride in the truck. Riders must be in the cab and belted in the passenger
seat.
Do not move the truck in or out of a building without a signal person present.
Know and obey the hand signal communications between operator and spotter. When other machines and
personnel are present, the operator should move in and out of buildings, loading areas and through traffic,
under the direction of a signal person. Courtesy at all times is a safety precaution!
Immediately report any adverse conditions on haul road, pit or dump area that may cause an operating hazard.
A3-8
11/02 A03017
Check for flat tires periodically during a shift. If the truck has been run on a flat, it must not be parked in a
building until the tire cools. If the tire must be changed, do not stand in front of the rim and locking ring when
inflating a tire mounted on the machine. Observers should not be permitted in the area and should be kept
away from the side of such tires.
The tire and rim assembly may explode if subjected to excessive heat. Personnel should move to a remote
or protected location if sensing excessively hot brakes, smell of burning rubber or evidence of fire near
tire and wheel area.
If the truck must be approached, such as to fight a fire, those personnel should do so only while facing the
tread area of the tire (front or back), unless protected by use of large heavy equipment as a shield. Stay at
least 50 ft. (15 m) from the tread of the tire.
In the event of fire in the tire and wheel area (including brake fires), stay away from the truck for at least 8
hours or until the tire and wheel are cool.
Keep serviceable fire fighting equipment on hand. Report used extinguishers for replacement or refilling.
Always have parking brake applied when the truck is parked and unattended. DO NOT leave the truck
unattended while the engine is running.
Park the truck a safe distance away from other vehicles as determined by the supervisor.
Stay alert at all times! In the event of an emergency, be prepared to react quickly and avoid accidents. If an
emergency arises, know where to get prompt assistance.
Sound the horn to warn people in the area. For machines equipped with a
back-up alarm, ensure the alarm works properly.
When necessary, designate a person to watch the area for the truck
operator. This is particularly necessary when traveling in reverse.
When operating in areas that may be hazardous or have poor visibility, designate a person to direct work site
traffic.
Do not allow any one to enter the line of travel of the machine. This rule must be strictly observed even with
machines equipped with a back-up alarm or rear view mirror.
Traveling
When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speeds. When changing direction, avoid turning suddenly.
Lower the dump body and set the dump lever to the FLOAT position when traveling.
If the engine should stop when the machine is in motion, the emergency steering system will be activated.
Apply the brakes immediately and stop the machine as quickly and safely as possible (off of the haul road, if
possible).
A03017 11/02
A3-9
Traveling On Slopes
Do not change direction on slopes. To ensure safety, drive to level ground before turning.
Do not travel up and down on grass, fallen leaves, or wet steel plates. These materials may make the machine
slip on even the slightest slope. Avoid traveling sideways, and always keep travel speed low.
When traveling downhill, use the retarder to reduce speed. Do not turn the steering wheel suddenly. Do not use
the foot brake except in an emergency.
If the engine should stop on a slope, apply the service brakes fully and stop the machine. Apply the parking
brake after the machine has stopped.
When working in dark places, install work lamps and head lamps. Set up extra lighting in the work area if
necessary.
Discontinue operations if visibility is poor, such as in mist, snow, or rain. Wait for the weather to
improve to allow the operation to be performed safely.
When working on snowy or icy roads, there is danger that the machine may slip to the side on even the
slightest slope. Always travel slowly and avoid sudden starting, turning, or stopping in these conditions.
Be extremely careful when clearing snow. The road shoulder and other objects are buried in the snow and
cannot be seen. When traveling on snow-covered roads, always install tire chains.
When working in tunnels, on bridges, under electric cables, or when entering a parking place or any other place
where there are height limits, always use extreme caution. The dump body must be completely lowered before
driving the machine.
Driving near high-voltage cables can cause electric shock. Always maintain the safe distances between the
machine and the electric cable as listed below.
Voltage
6.6 kV
3m
10 ft.
33.0 kV
4m
14 ft.
66.0 kV
5m
17 ft.
154.0 kV
8m
27 ft.
275.0 kV
10 m
33 ft.
The following actions are effective in preventing accidents while working near high voltages:
If the work equipment should touch an electric cable, the operator should not leave the cab.
When performing operations near high voltage cables, do not allow anyone to approach the machine.
Check with the electrical maintenance department about the voltage of the cables before starting operations.
A3-10
11/02 A03017
When Dumping
Before starting the dumping operation, check that there is no person or objects behind the machine.
Stop the machine in the desired location. Check again for persons or objects behind the machine. Give the
determined signal, then slowly operate the dump body. If necessary, use blocks for the wheels or position a
flagman.
When dumping on slopes, machine stability is poor and there is danger of tip over. Always perform such
operations using extreme care.
Avoid operating the machine near cliffs, overhangs, and deep ditches. If these areas collapse, the machine
could fall or tip over and result in serious injury or death. Remember that ground surfaces in these areas may
be weakened after heavy rain or blasting.
Freshly laid soil and the soil near ditches is loose. It can collapse under the weight or vibration of the machine.
Avoid these areas whenever possible.
When Loading
Check that the surrounding area is safe, stop the machine in the correct loading position, then load the body
uniformly.
Choose a horizontal road surface to park the machine. If the machine has to be parked on a slope, always put
blocks under all the wheels to prevent the machine from moving.
When parking on public roads, provide fences and signs, such as flags or lights, on the machine to warn
pedestrians and other vehicles. Be sure that the machine, flags, or lights do not obstruct the traffic.
Before leaving the machine, lower the dump body fully, activate the parking brake, stop the engine, and lock
everything. Always take the key with you.
TOWING
When Towing, Fix Wire To Hook
Improper towing methods may lead to serious personal injury and/or damage.
Use a towing device with ample strength for the weight of this machine.
When connecting a machine that is to be towed, do not allow anyone to go between the tow machine and the
machine that is being towed.
Set the coupling of the machine being towed in a straight line with the towing portion of the tow machine, and
secure it in position.
(For towing method, see the Operation and Maintenance Manual, Section 3, Operating Instructions - Towing.)
A03017 11/02
A3-11
Battery electrolyte contains sulfuric acid and can quickly burn the skin and eat holes in clothing. If you spill acid
on yourself, immediately flush the area with water.
Battery acid could cause blindness if splashed into the eyes. If acid gets into the eyes, flush them immediately
with large quantities of water and see a doctor at once.
If you accidentally drink acid, drink a large quantity of water, milk, beaten eggs or vegetable oil. Call a doctor or
poison prevention center immediately.
Batteries generate hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is very explosive, and is easily ignited with a small spark of
flame.
Before working with batteries, stop the engine and turn the key switch to the OFF position.
Avoid short-circuiting the battery terminals through accidental contact with metallic objects, such as tools,
across the terminals.
When removing or installing, check which is the positive (+) terminal and negative (-) terminal.
Tighten the battery terminals securely. Loose terminals can generate sparks and lead to an explosion.
Always wear safety glasses or goggles when starting the machine with booster cables.
When starting from another machine, do not allow the two machines to touch.
Be sure to connect the positive (+) cable first when installing booster cables. Disconnect the ground or negative
(-) cable first during removal.
If any tool touches between the positive (+) terminal and the chassis, it will cause sparks. Always use caution
when using tools near the battery.
When connecting the ground cable to the frame of the machine to be started, connect it as far as possible from
the battery.
A3-12
11/02 A03017
If others start the engine or operate the controls while you are performing
maintenance, you could suffer serious injury or death.
Always attach the warning tag to the control lever in the operator's cab to
alert others that you are working on the machine. Attach additional warning
tags around the machine, if necessary.
Proper Tools
Use only tools suited to the task. Using damaged, low quality, faulty, or
makeshift tools could cause personal injury.
Before performing inspections or maintenance, stop the machine on firm flat ground, lower the dump body,
stop the engine and apply the parking brake.
If the engine must be run during service, such as when cleaning the radiator, always move the shift control
lever to the NEUTRAL (N) position and apply the parking brake. Always perform this work with two people.
One person must sit in the operator's seat to stop the engine if necessary. Never move any controls not related
to the task at hand during these situations.
When servicing the machine, use care not to touch any moving parts. Never wear loose clothing.
When performing service with the dump body raised, always place the dump lever in the HOLD position, and
apply the lock (if equipped). Install the body-up safety pins or cable securely.
A03017 11/02
A3-13
DURING MAINTENANCE
Personnel
Only authorized personnel can service and repair the machine. Extra precaution should be used when
grinding, welding, and using a sledge-hammer.
Attachments
Place attachments that have been removed from the machine in a safe place and
manner to prevent them from falling.
Always lower all movable work equipment to the ground or to their lowest position
before performing service or repairs under the machine.
Spilled oil or grease, scattered tools, etc. can cause you to slip or trip. Always
keep your machine clean and tidy.
If water gets into the electrical system, there is danger that the machine may
may move unexpectedly and/or damage to components may occur. Do not
use water or steam to clean any sensors, connectors, or the inside of the
operator's compartment.
Use extreme care when washing the electrical control cabinet. Do not allow
water to enter the control cabinet around the doors or vents. Do not allow
any water to enter the cooling air inlet duct above the electrical control cabinet. If water enters the control
cabinet (through any opening or crevice) major damage to the electrical components is possible.
Never spray water into the rear wheel electric motor covers. Damage to the wheel motor armatures may occur.
Do not spray water into the retard grids. Excess water in the retard grids can cause a ground fault, which will
prevent propulsion.
Spilled fuel and oil may cause slipping. Always clean up spills, immediately.
Always tighten the cap of the fuel and oil fillers securely.
A3-14
11/02 A03017
If it is necessary to add coolant to the radiator, stop the engine, and allow the
engine and radiator to cool down before adding the coolant.
Use Of Lighting
When checking fuel, oil, coolant, or battery electrolyte, always use
lighting with anti-explosion specifications. If such lighting equipment is
not used, there is danger or explosion.
Do not bend high-pressure hoses or hit them with hard objects. Do not use any bent or cracked piping, tubes or
hoses. They may burst during use.
Always repair any loose or broken hoses. If fuel or oil leaks, it may result in a fire.
Do not forget that work equipment circuits are always under pressure.
Do not add oil, drain oil, or perform maintenance or inspections before completely releasing the internal
pressure.
Small, high pressure pin-hole leaks are extremely dangerous. The jet of high-pressure oil can pierce the skin
and eyes. Always wear safety glasses and thick gloves. Use a piece of cardboard or a sheet of wood to check
for oil leakage.
If you are hit by a jet of high-pressure oil, consult a doctor immediately for medical attention.
A03017 11/02
A3-15
Immediately after stopping operation, engine coolant and operating oils are
at high temperature and under high pressure. In these conditions, if the cap
is removed, the oil or water drained, or the filters are replaced, it may result
in burns or other injury. Wait for the temperature to cool and pressure to
subside, before performing the inspection and/or maintenance in as
outlined in the service manual.
Stay away from all rotating parts such as the radiator fan and fan belts.
Serious bodily injury may result from direct or indirect contact with rotating
parts and flying objects.
Waste Materials
Always put oil drained from your machine in appropriate containers. Never
drain oil directly onto the ground.
A3-16
11/02 A03017
TIRES
Handling Tires
If tires are not used under the specified conditions, they may overheat and burst, or be cut and burst by sharp
stones on rough road surfaces. This may lead to serious injury or damage.
To maintain tire safety, always adhere to the following conditions:
Inflate the tires to the specified pressure. Abnormal heat is generated particularly when the inflation pressure is
too low.
The tire inflation pressure and permissible speeds are general values. The actual values may differ depending on
the type of tire and the condition under which they are used. For details, please consult the tire manufacturer.
When tires become hot, a flammable gas is produced, and may ignite. It is particularly dangerous if the tires
become overheated while the tires are pressurized. If the gas generated inside the tire ignites, the internal pressure will suddenly rise, and the tire will explode, resulting in danger to personnel in the area. Explosions differ from
punctures or tire bursts because the destructive force is extremely large. Therefore, the following operations are
strictly prohibited when the tire is pressurized:
Welding the rim
Welding near the wheel or tire.
Smoking or creating open flames
If the proper procedure for performing maintenance or replacement of the wheel or tire is not used, the wheel or tire
may burst and cause serious injury or damage. When performing such maintenance, consult your authorized
regional Komatsu distributor, or the tire manufacturer.
As a basic rule, store the tires in a warehouse in which unauthorized persons cannot enter. If the tires are
stored outside, always erect a fence around the tires and put up No Entry and other warning signs that even
young children can understand.
Stand the tire on level ground, and block it securely so that it cannot roll or fall over.
If the tire should fall over, flee the area quickly. The tires for construction equipment are extremely heavy.
Trying to hold the tire must not be attempted and may lead to serious injury.
A03017 11/02
A3-17
Use this space to add any additional job site rules not covered in any of the previous discussions.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
A3-18
11/02 A03017
Any operating fluid, such as hydraulic oil or brake fluid escaping under pressure, can have sufficient force
to enter a person's body by penetrating the skin. Serious injury and possibly death may result if proper
medical treatment by a physician familiar with this injury is not received immediately.
11. Relieve pressure in lines or hoses before making any disconnects.
12. After adjustments or repairs, replace all shields, screens and clamps.
13. Tire Care:
Do not stand in front of a rim and locking ring when inflating a tire mounted on the machine. Observers
should not be permitted in the area and should be kept away from the sides of such tires.
Do not weld or apply heat on the rim assembly with the tire mounted on the rim. Resulting gases inside the
tire may ignite, causing explosion of tire and rim.
14. Only a qualified operator or experienced maintenance personnel who are also qualified in operation should
move the truck under its own power in the repair facility or during road testing after repairs are complete.
A03017 11/02
A3-19
Do not use any of the power cables for hand holds or foot steps.
Before opening any cabinets or touching a grid element or a power cable, the engine must be shutdown
and the red drive system warning lights must not be illuminated.
Normal Engine Shutdown Procedure
1. Stop the truck out of the way of other traffic on a level surface (dry, if possible) and free of overhead power
lines or other obstructions (in case dump body should need to be raised).
a. Reduce engine speed to idle. Allow the engine to cool gradually by running at low idle for approx. 5 minutes.
b. Place the directional selector switch in NEUTRAL.
c. Apply the parking brake switch. Be sure the parking brake applied indicator light in the overhead display
panel is illuminated.
2. Place rest switch in ON position to put AC drive system in rest mode of operation. Be sure the rest indicator light in the overhead panel is illuminated.
3. With engine cooled down, turn keyswitch counterclockwise to OFF position for normal shutdown of engine.
If the engine does not shutdown with keyswitch, use engine shutdown switch on operator cab center console,
and hold this switch down until engine stops.
4. With keyswitch OFF, and engine stopped, wait at least 90 seconds. Insure the steering circuit is completely
bled down by turning the steering wheel back and forth several times. No front wheel movement will occur
when hydraulic pressure is relieved. If the vehicle continues to steer after shutdown, notify maintenance personnel.
5. Verify that all the link voltage lights are off (one on back wall of operator cab, and two on deck control cabinets). Notify maintenance personnel if any light remains illuminated longer than five minutes after engine
shutdown.
6. Close and lock all windows, remove key from keyswitch, and lock the cab to prevent possible unauthorized
truck operation. Dismount the truck properly. Put wheel chocks in place.
A3-20
11/02 A03017
A03017 11/02
7. Do not weld on the rear of the control cabinet! The metal panels on the back of the cabinet are part of capacitors and cannot be heated.
8. Do not weld on the retard grid exhaust louvers - they are made of stainless steel. Some
power cable panels throughout the truck are
also made of aluminum or stainless steel. They
must be repaired with the same material or the
power cables may be damaged.
9. Power cables must be cleated in wood or other
non-ferrous materials. Do not repair cable
cleats by encircling the power cables with metal
clamps or hardware. Always inspect power
cable insulation prior to servicing the cables and
prior to returning the truck to service. Discard
cables with broken insulation.
10. Power cables and wiring harnesses should be
protected from weld spatter and heat.
Always fasten the welding machine ground (-)
lead to the piece being welded; the grounding
clamp must be attached as near as possible
to the weld area.
Always avoid laying welding cables over or
near the vehicle electrical harnesses. Welding
voltage could be induced into the electrical harness and cause damage to components.
Before doing any welding on the truck, always
disconnect the battery charging alternator lead
wire and isolate electronic control components.
In addition, always disconnect the positive and
negative battery cables of the vehicle. Failure
to do so may seriously damage the battery and
electrical equipment.
Never allow welding current to pass through
ball bearings, roller bearings, suspensions, or
hydraulic cylinders.
11. If the red lights on the exterior of the control
cabinet and/or the back wall of the operator's
cab continue to be illuminated after following
the above procedure, a fault has occurred.
Leave all cabinet doors in place; do not touch
the retard grid elements; do not disconnect any
power cables, or use them as hand or foot
holds.
Notify your Komatsu service representative,
immediately. Only qualified personnel, specifically trained for servicing the AC drive system,
should perform this service.
12. If the red lights on the blower control panel are
illuminated after following the above procedure,
A3-21
a fault has occurred. Reinstall the control cabinet panel. Do not perform maintenance on the blower control
panel, blower motor power cables.
Notify your Komatsu service representative, immediately. Only qualified personnel, specifically trained for
servicing the AC drive system, should perform this service.
13. Replace all covers and doors and place the GF cutout switch and battery disconnect switches in their original
positions. Reconnect all harnesses prior to starting the truck.
Leave the drive system in the rest mode until the truck is to be moved.
A3-22
11/02 A03017
TRUCK OPERATION
PREPARING FOR OPERATION
The safest trucks are those which have been properly prepared for operation. At the beginning of each
shift, a careful check of the truck should be made by
the operator before attempting to start the engine.
A03017 11/02
A3-23
START HERE
11/02 A03017
A03017 11/02
A3-25
A3-26
11/02 A03017
A03017 11/02
A3-27
A3-28
11/02 A03017
A03017 11/02
A3-29
PASSING
1. Do not pass another truck on a hill or blind
curve!
2. Before passing, make sure the road ahead is
clear. If a disabled truck is blocking your lane,
slow down and pass with extreme caution.
LOADING
1. Pull into the loading area with caution. Remain
at a safe distance while truck ahead is being
loaded.
2. Do not drive over unprotected power cables.
3. When approaching or leaving a loading area,
watch out for other vehicles and for personnel
working in the area.
4. When pulling in under a loader or shovel, follow
"spotter" or "shovel operator" signals. The truck
operator may speed up loading operations by
observing the location and loading cycle of the
truck being loaded ahead, then follow a similar
pattern.
5. During loading, the operator must stay in the
truck cab with engine running. Place the selector switch in NEUTRAL and apply the brake
lock.
6. When loaded, pull away from shovel as quickly
as possible but with extreme caution.
DUMPING
Raising The Dump Body
1. Pull into dump area with extreme caution. Make
sure area is clear of persons and obstructions,
including overhead utility lines. Obey signals
directed by the spotter, if present.
Avoid unstable areas. Stay a safe distance
from edge of dump area. Position truck on a
solid, level surface before dumping.
A3-30
11/02 A03017
A03017 11/02
A3-31
TOWING
Prior to towing a truck, many factors must be carefully considered. Serious personal injury and/or significant property damage may result if important
safety practices, procedures and preparation for
moving heavy equipment are not observed. Do not
tow the truck any faster than 5 mph (8 kph).
A3-32
11/02 A03017
3. With engine cooled down, turn keyswitch counterclockwise to OFF position for normal shutdown of engine.
A03017 11/02
A3-33
A3-34
11/02 A03017
The plates and decals must be kept clean and legible. If any decal or plate becomes unable to be read
or damaged, it should be replaced with a new one.
A warning decal surrounds the key switch located to
the right of the steering column on the instrument
panel. The warning stresses the importance of reading the operator's manual before operation.
A04039
A4-1
The wheel brake lock switch is for holding the truck while parked at the shovel
during loading, or while dumping. It
applies the rear service brakes only. If
the brake treadle valve does not operate, apply this brake to stop the truck. Do Not use
this brake as a parking brake when leaving the truck.
With engine shut down, the hydraulic system will
eventually bleed down, releasing the service brakes.
Attached to the exterior of both battery compartments is a danger plate. This plate stresses the need
to keep from making any sparks near the battery.
When another battery or 24VDC power source is
used for auxiliary power, all switches must be OFF
prior to making any connections. When connecting
auxiliary power cables, positively maintain correct
polarity; connect the positive (+) posts together and
then connect the negative (-) lead of the auxiliary
power cable to a good frame ground. Do not connect to the negative posts of the truck battery or
near the battery box. This hookup completes the
circuit but minimizes danger of sparks near the batteries.
These decals are placed above the battery disconnect switches on the right side of the front bumper to
indicate OFF and ON positions of the switches.
A4-2
A04039
A04039
A4-3
Warning decals are applied to both brake accumulators located inside the brake system cabinet behind
the operator cab. These decals remind servicing
technicians to be sure to close the accumulator drain
valves after they have been opened to bleed brake
pressure. It further warns not to over-tighten the drain
valves to prevent damage to the valve seat(s).
Any operating fluid, such as hydraulic oil, escaping under pressure can have sufficient force to
enter a person's body by penetrating the skin.
Serious injury and possibly death may result if
proper medical treatment by a physician familiar
with this injury is not received immediately.
A4-4
A04039
This caution decal is placed near the battery disconnect switches on the right side of the front bumper to
alert servicing technicians that before doing any
welding on the truck, always disconnect the battery
charging alternator lead wire and isolate electronic
control components before making welding repairs.
This caution decal is also placed around the retarding grid cabinet.
In addition, always disconnect the positive and negative battery cables of the vehicle. Failure to do so
may seriously damage the battery and electrical
equipment.
Always fasten the welding machine ground (-) lead to
the piece being welded; grounding clamp must be
attached as near as possible to the weld area.
Never allow welding current to pass through ball
bearings, roller bearings, suspensions, or hydraulic
cylinders. Always avoid laying welding cables over or
near the vehicle electrical harnesses. Welding voltage could be induced into the electrical harness and
possibly cause damage to components.
A04039
A4-5
This caution decal is placed on the back of the control cabinet to alert service technicians that this area
contains capacitors and must not be disturbed in any
manner.
A4-6
This decal is placed on the ground level engine shutdown switch which is mounted on the left side of the
front bumper structure. It specifies that this switch is
for emergency shutdown only.
A04039
A04039
A4-7
The lubrication chart is mounted on the right hand side of the radiator grille structure. Refer to Section P, Lubrication and Service, in this manual for more complete lubrication instructions.
A4-8
A04039
Grade 5
Capscrew
Thread
Size
kg.m
1/4-20
1/4-28
5/16-18
KOMATSU engineering department does NOT recommend the use of special friction-reducing lubricants
such as, Copper Coat, Never Seize, and other similar products on the threads of standard fasteners
where standard torque values are applied.
The use of special friction-reducing lubricants will significantly alter the clamping force being applied to fasteners during the tightening process.
If special friction-reducing lubricants are used with the
Standard Torque values listed below in Table I (and in
Komatsu shop manuals), excessive stress and possible breakage of the fasteners may result.
Where Torque Tables specify Lubricated Threads for
the Standard Torque values listed, these standard
torque values are to be used with simple lithium
base chassis grease (multi-purpose EP NLGI) or a
rust- preventive grease (see list, page 1-10) on the
threads and seats, unless specified otherwise.
NOTE: Always be sure threads of fasteners and
tapped holes are free of burrs and other imperfections before assembling.
Standard torque values are not to be used when
Turn-of-the-Nut tightening procedures are recommended.
TORQUE GRADE 5
ft. lbs.
TORQUE GRADE 8
N.m
Capscrew
Thread
Size
Grade 8
TORQUE GRADE 5
TORQUE GRADE 8
N.m
ft. lbs.
kg.m
ft. lbs.
kg.m
N.m
ft. lbs.
kg.m
N.m
0.97
9.5
10
1.38
13.6
1.11
10.8
11
1.52
14.9
3/4-16
235
32.5
319
335
46.3
454
7/8-9
350
48.4
475
500
69.2
15
2.07
20.3
21
2.90
28
678
7/8-14
375
51.9
508
530
73.3
719
5/16-24
16
2.21
22
22
3.04
3/8-16
25
3.46
34
35
4.84
30
1.0-8
525
72.6
712
750
103.7
1017
47
1.0-12
560
77.4
759
790
109.3
3/8-24
30
4.15
41
40
1071
5.5
54
1.0-14
570
78.8
773
800
110.6
7/16-14
40
5.5
54
1085
58
8.0
79
1 1/8-7
650
89.9
881
1050
145
7/16-20
45
6.2
61
1424
62
8.57
84
1 1/8-12
700
96.8
949
1140
158
1546
1/2-13
65
88
90
12.4
122
1 1/4-7
910
125.9
1234
1480
205
2007
1/2-20
70
9.7
95
95
13.1
129
1 1/4-12
975
134.8
1322
1580
219
2142
9/16-12
90
12.4
122
125
17.3
169
1 3/8-6
1200
166
1627
1940
268
2630
9/16-18
95
13.1
129
135
18.7
183
1 3/8-12
1310
181
1776
2120
293
2874
5/8-11
125
17.3
169
175
24.2
237
1 1/2-6
1580
219
2142
2560
354
3471
5/8-18
135
18.7
183
190
26.2
258
1 1/2-12
1700
235
2305
2770
383
3756
3/4-10
220
30.4
298
310
42.8
420
A05001 12/99
A5-1
TORQUE
N.m
TORQUE
ft.lbs.
TORQUE
kg.m
1.22
M6 x1
12
M8 x 1.25
30
22
3.06
M10 x 1.5
55
40
5.61
CAPSCREW
SIZE*
TORQUE
ft. lbs.
TORQUE
N.m
TORQUE
kg.m
M12 x 1.75
95
70
9.69
0.250 - 20
12
16
1.7
M14 x 2
155
114
15.81
0.312 - 18
24
33
3.3
M16 x 2
240
177
24.48
0.375 - 16
42
57
5.8
M20 x 2.25
465
343
47.43
0.438 -14
70
95
9.7
M24 x 3
800
590
81.6
0.500 -13
105
142
14.5
M30 x 3.5
1600
1180
163.2
0.562 - 12
150
203
20.7
M36 x 4
2750
2028
280.5
0.625 - 11
205
278
28.3
0.750 - 10
360
488
49.7
0.875 - 9
575
780
79.4
This table represents standard values only. Do not use these values to replace torque values which are specified in assembly
instructions.
1.000 - 8
860
1166
119
1.000 - 12
915
1240
126
1.125 - 7
1230
1670
170
1.125 - 12
1330
1800
184
1.250 - 7
1715
2325
237
1.250 - 12
1840
2495
254
1.375 - 6
2270
3080
313
1.375 - 12
2475
3355
342
1.500 - 6
2980
4040
411
1.500 - 12
3225
4375
445
A5-2
12/99 A05001
TABLE IV.
TORQUE CHART FOR JIC 37 SWIVEL NUTS
WITH OR WITHOUT O-RING SEALS
TABLE VI.
TORQUE CHART FOR
O-RING BOSS FITTINGS
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
0.125
0.312 24
4 1
0.125
0.312 24
4 2
0.188
0.375 24
8 3
0.188
0.375 24
5 2
0.250
0.438 20
12 3
0.250
0.438 20
8 3
0.312
0.500 20
15 3
0.312
0.500 20
10 3
0.375
0.562 18
18 5
0.375
0.562 18
13 3
0.500
0.750 16
30 5
0.500
0.750 16
24 5
10
0.625
0.875 14
40 5
10
0.625
0.875 14
32 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
55 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
48 5
14
0.875
1.188 12
65 5
14
0.875
1.188 12
54 5
16
1.000
1.312 12
80 5
16
1.000
1.312 12
72 5
20
1.250
1.625 12
100 10
20
1.250
1.625 12
80 5
24
1.500
1.875 12
120 10
24
1.500
1.875 12
80 5
32
2.000
2.500 12
230 20
32
2.000
2.500 12
96 10
TABLE V.
TORQUE CHART FOR
PIPE THREAD FITTINGS
TABLE VII.
TORQUE CHART FOR
O-RING FACE SEAL FITTINGS
SIZE
CODE
PIPE
THREAD
SIZE
WITH
SEALANT
FT. LBS.
WITHOUT
SEALANT
FT. LBS.
0.125 27
15 3
20 5
0.250 18
20 5
25 5
0.375 18
25 5
35 5
0.500 14
35 5
45 5
12
0.750 14
45 5
55 5
16
1.000 11.50
55 5
65 5
20
1.250 11.50
70 5
80 5
24
1.500 11.50
80 5
95 10
32
2.000 11.50
95 10
120 10
A05001 12/99
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
0.250
0.438 20
11 1
0.375
0.562 18
18 2
0.500
0.750 16
35 4
10
0.625
0.875 14
51 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
71 7
16
1.000
1.312 12
98 6
20
1.250
1.625 12
132 7
24
1.500
1.875 12
165 15
A5-3
(N.m)
1.36
2.71
4.07
5.42
6.78
8.14
9.49
10.85
12.20
10
13.56
14.91
16.27
17.63
18.98
20.34
21.69
23.05
24.40
25.76
20
27.12
28.47
29.83
31.18
32.54
33.90
35.25
36.61
37.96
39.32
30
40.67
42.03
43.39
44.74
46.10
47.45
48.81
50.17
51.52
52.87
40
54.23
55.59
56.94
58.30
59.66
60.01
62.37
63.72
65.08
66.44
50
67.79
69.15
70.50
71.86
73.21
74.57
75.93
77.28
78.64
80.00
60
81.35
82.70
84.06
85.42
86.77
88.13
89.48
90.84
92.20
93.55
70
94.91
96.26
97.62
98.97
100.33
101.69
103.04
104.40
105.75
107.11
80
108.47
109.82
111.18
112.53
113.89
115.24
116.60
117.96
119.31
120.67
90
122.03
123.38
124.74
126.09
127.45
128.80
130.16
131.51
132.87
134.23
(kg.m)
0.138
0.277
0.415
0.553
0.692
0.830
0.968
1.106
1.245
10
1.38
1.52
1.66
1.80
1.94
2.07
2.21
2.35
2.49
2.63
20
2.77
2.90
3.04
3.18
3.32
3.46
3.60
3.73
3.87
4.01
30
4.15
4.29
4.43
4.56
4.70
4.84
4.98
5.12
5.26
5.39
40
5.53
5.67
5.81
5.95
6.09
6.22
6.36
6.50
6.64
6.78
50
6.92
7.05
7.19
7.33
7.47
7.61
7.74
7.88
8.02
8.16
60
8.30
8.44
8.57
8.71
8.85
8.99
9.13
9.27
9.40
9.54
70
9.68
9.82
9.96
10.10
10.23
10.37
10.51
10.65
10.79
10.93
80
11.06
11.20
11.34
11.48
11.62
11.76
11.89
12.03
12.17
12.30
90
12.45
12.59
12.72
12.86
13.00
13.14
13.28
13.42
13.55
13.69
(kPa)
6.895
13.79
20.68
27.58
34.47
41.37
48.26
55.16
62.05
10
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.53
103.42
110.32
117.21
124.1
131.0
20
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
179.3
186.2
193.1
200.0
30
206.8
213.7
220.6
227.5
234.4
241.3
248.2
255.1
262.0
268.9
40
275.8
282.7
289.6
296.5
303.4
310.3
317.2
324.1
331.0
337.9
50
344.7
351.6
358.5
365.4
372.3
379.2
386.1
393.0
399.9
406.8
60
413.7
420.6
427.5
434.4
441.3
448.2
455.1
462.0
468.9
475.8
70
482.6
489.5
496.4
503.3
510.2
517.1
524.0
530.9
537.8
544.7
80
551.6
558.5
565.4
572.3
579.2
586.1
593.0
599.9
606.8
613.7
90
620.5
627.4
634.3
641.2
648.1
655.0
661.9
668.8
675.7
682.6
A5-4
12/99 A05001
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
(MPa)
0.069
0.14
0.21
0.28
0.34
0.41
0.48
0.55
0.62
100
0.69
0.76
0.83
0.90
0.97
1.03
1.10
1.17
1.24
1.31
200
1.38
1.45
1.52
1.59
1.65
1.72
1.79
1.86
1.93
2.00
300
2.07
2.14
2.21
2.28
2.34
2.41
2.48
2.55
2.62
2.69
400
2.76
2.83
2.90
2.96
3.03
3.10
3.17
3.24
3.31
3.38
500
3.45
3.52
3.59
3.65
3.72
3.79
3.86
3.93
4.00
4.07
600
4.14
4.21
4.27
4.34
4.41
4.48
4.55
4.62
4.69
4.76
700
4.83
4.90
4.96
5.03
5.10
5.17
5.24
5.31
5.38
5.45
800
5.52
5.58
5.65
5.72
5.79
5.86
5.93
6.00
6.07
6.14
900
6.21
6.27
6.34
6.41
6.48
6.55
6.62
6.69
6.76
6.83
3. Multiply by 10:
970 psi = 6688 kPa.
1. Select Table X.
2. Go to PSI row 90, column 7; read 668.8
97 psi = 668.8 kPa.
A05001 12/99
A5-5
TABLE XIII
COMMON CONVERSION MULTIPLIERS
TO
Multiply
By
inch in.
millimeter (mm)
25.40
millimeter (mm)
inch in.
0.0394
inch in.
centimeter (cm)
2.54
centimeter (cm)
inch in.
0.3937
foot ft.
meter (m)
0.3048
meter (m)
foot ft.
3.2808
yard yd.
meter (m)
0.914
meter (m)
yard yd.
1.0936
1.61
kilometer (km)
mile mi.
0.6210
To Convert From
mile mi.
kilometer (km)
2
To Convert From
sq. centimeters
(cm2)
6.45
929
Multiply
By
TO
in.2
0.1550
0.001
16.39
0.061
liters (l)
0.016
liters (l)
61.02
0.028
35.314
liters (l)
28.3
liters (l)
0.0353
ounce oz.
kilogram (kg)
0.028
grams (g)
ounce oz.
0.0353
milliliter (ml)
29.573
milliliter (ml)
0.0338
pound (mass)
kilogram (kg)
0.454
kilogram (kg)
pound (mass)
2.2046
0.2248
2)
Newton (N)
4.448
Newton (N)
Newton.meters (N.m)
0.113
Newton.meters (N.m)
Newton.meters (N.m)
1.356
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
0.138
Newton.meters (N.m)
9.807
kilogram.meters
(kg.m)
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
0.102
Newton.meters (N.m)
0.7376
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
7.2329
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
Newton.meters (N.m)
9.807
psi (pressure)
0.1450
Kilopascals (kPa)
psi (pressure)
kilopascals (kPa)
6.895
psi (pressure)
megapascals (MPa)
0.007
psi (pressure)
kilograms/cm2 (kg/cm2)
0.0704
ton (short)
kilogram (kg)
907.2
ton (short)
metric ton
0.0907
quart qt.
liters (l)
0.946
gallon gal.
liters (l)
3.785
HP (horsepower)
Watts
745.7
HP (horsepower)
kilowatts (kw)
0.745
A5-6
sq. in.
megapascals (MPa)
psi (pressure)
145.038
psi (pressure)
14.2231
kilograms/cm (kg/cm )
kilopascals (kPa)
98.068
kilogram (kg)
ton (short)
0.0011
metric ton
ton (short)
1.1023
liters (l)
quart qt.
1.0567
kilograms/cm (kg/cm )
liters (l)
gallon gal.
0.2642
Watts
HP (horsepower)
0.00134
kilowatts (kw)
HP (horsepower)
1.3410
12/99 A05001
SECTION A7
STORAGE AND IDLE MACHINE PREPARATION
INDEX
A07003
Storage Procedures
A7-1
NOTES
A7-2
Storage Procedure
A07003
A07003
Storage Procedures
A7-3
Any operating fluid, such as hydraulic oil, escaping under pressure can have sufficient force to
enter a person's body by pentrating the skin.
Serious injury and possible death may result if
proper medical treatment by a physician familiar
with this injury is not received immediately.
A7-4
Storage Procedure
A07003
In addition to removing the storage materials, the following actions should be taken.
1. Inspect the entire vehicle carefully for rust and
corrosion, correct as necessary.
2. Service the engine according to the engine
manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
3. Clean the radiator; refer to the engine manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Manual.
4. The cooling system should be completely
drained, chemically flushed, and refilled with a
conditioned water/antifreeze solution suitable
for the lowest temperature anticipated. Refer to
Fluid Specifications in Section P, Lubrication
and Service, for the proper anti-freeze and conditioner concentrations. After refilling the system, always operate the engine until the
thermostats open to circulate the solution
through the cooling system.
A07003
10. Install fully charged batteries in unit. Clean connectors and connect battery cables. Compartment must be free of corrosion. Secure
batteries with hold downs.
11. Check all electrical cables for weathering,
cracks and/or damage. Replace any defective
cables.
Storage Procedures
A7-5
A7-6
Storage Procedure
A07003
Do not mix rim parts of different rim manufacturers. Rim parts may resemble those of a different
manufacturer, but the required tolerances may be
wrong. Use of mismatched rim parts is hazardous.
b. If tires are dismounted, all wheel components must be cleaned, inspected, all rust
and corrosion removed and parts repainted
as applicable before remounting the tires.
Follow the safety rules when mounting and
inflating tires.
c. Mount and inflate tires as shown in Operation and Maintenance Manual or service
manual.
4. Inspect vehicle service brakes carefully.
A07003
Storage Procedures
A7-7
a. Insure that exhaust is clear and clean, no foreign materials. If water entry is suspected,
disconnect air tubes at the turbochargers to
check for water damage before attempting
startup.
b. Check all fuel lines for deterioration or damage. Replace lines as necessary.
To prevent injuries, always release spring tension before replacing the fan belt.
f. Check and tighten engine fan drive belts,
install new belt set if necessary.
g. Check and tighten engine mounts.
A7-8
Storage Procedure
A07003
d. Check exposed portions of all hydraulic cylinder rams for rust, pitting and corrosion. If
plating is deteriorated, the cylinder should be
removed and overhauled or replaced; pitted
or scored plating will cause leakage at the
cylinder seals.
8. Check front wheel hub, final drive and wheel
axle lubricant. If contamination is suspected, oil
should be drained completely and the component serviced with clean prescribed lubricant. If
major contamination is present, disassembly
and overhaul will be in order.
9. Check parking brake. Since it is spring applied,
the brake pads may be stuck tightly to the disc;
it may be necessary to remove and overhaul
the parking brake assembly.
10. Lubricate all grease fittings with prescribed
lubricants which are not part of the automatic
lubrication system. Pay particular attention to
the steering linkage connections. All pivot
points must be free of any binding.
A07003
Storage Procedures
A7-9
ENGINE OPERATION
1. Insure all personnel are clear of equipment
before starting engine. Always sound the horn
as a warning before actuating any operational
controls.
Insure that all tools and loose equipment have
been removed prior to engine start-up. Sound
horn prior to engine start. Make sure emergency
shut down is reset. Cables must be free moving
in their housings.
When all reconditioning operations have been completed, a static check of engine operation along with
operation of systems as well as verification of braking
and steering must be done before the vehicle is
moved.
A7-10
Storage Procedure
A07003
Any machine which is unsafe and/or not in top operating condition should not be assigned to an operator
for production use.
1. Become thoroughly familiar with steering and
emergency controls. Test the steering in
extreme right and left directions. If the steering
system is not operating properly, shut engine
down immediately. Determine the steering system problem and have repairs made before
resuming operation.
A07003
Storage Procedures
A7-11
ENGINE STORAGE
To prevent possible personal injury, wear adequate eye protection and do not exceed 40 psi
(276 kPa) compressed air pressure.
Therefore, it is recommended that the engine be processed for storage as soon as possible after removal
from operation.
A7-12
Storage Procedure
A07003
If engines in vehicle are stored where condensation of water in the fuel tank may be a problem,
add pure, waterless isopropyl alcohol (isopropanol) to the fuel at a ratio of one pint to 125 gallons(473 L) of fuel, or 0.010% by volume. Where
biological contamination of fuel may be a problem, add a biocide such as Biobor JF, or equivalent to the fuel. When using a biocide, follow the
manufacturer's
concentration
recommendations, and observe all cautions and warnings.
9. Drain and disassemble the fuel filter and
strainer. Discard the used elements and gaskets. Fill the cavity between the element and
shell with No. 1 diesel fuel or pure kerosene,
and reinstall on the engine. If spin-on fuel filters
and strainers are used, discard the used cartridges, fill the new ones with No. 1 diesel fuel
or pure kerosene, and reinstall on the engine.
10. Operate the engine for five (5) minutes to circulate the clean fuel oil throughout the fuel system.
11. Service the air cleaner.
12. Turbocharger bearings are pressure lubricated
through the external oil line leading from the
engine cylinder block while the engine is operating. However, the turbocharger air inlet and turbine outlet connections should be sealed off
with moisture resistant tape.
13. Apply a rust preventive compound to all
exposed non-painted surfaces.
14. Drain the engine cooling system.
Drain the preservative oil from the engine crankcase.
Reinstall and tighten the drain plug.
A07003
Storage Procedures
A7-13
A7-14
Storage Procedure
A07003
Never apply any spray, coating, or other protective materials to areas not specifically recommended.
It is also important to note that these instructions
cannot possibly anticipate every type of storage condition and, therefore, cannot prevent all equipment
deterioration problems caused by inadequate storage. However, these instructions should be considered as a minimum procedure to achieve the best
possible equipment life and the lowest operating cost
when the equipment is returned to service.
NOTE: Local conditions and/or experience may
require additional procedures and/or additional storage precautions.
A07003
Storage Procedures
A7-15
A7-16
Storage Procedure
A07003
Periodic Inspections
It is important that periodic inspections (every three
months) of stored equipment be performed to insure
the continued serviceability of all protective measures initially taken when the storage period began.
Items which should be checked at each inspection
interval are listed as follows:
1. Remove the weatherproof tape from the compartment doors and preform a Megger test as
described in the Vehicle Test Instructions.
Record the test results and compare them with
the recorded megger readings taken when storage first began, and those taken throughout the
storage period. Remove all test equipment and
close up the compartment. Reseal the compartment doors with new weatherproof tape. If
megger readings indicate a deterioration of
insulation quality, to below 2.0 megohms then
consideration should be given to providing
more protection.
2. Check all other weatherproofing tape. Replace
any that has become loose or is missing completely.
3. Check all heat sources. Replace or repair any
units which have become inoperative.
4. Check all machine surfaces which were coated
with flushing compound when storage began. If
compound appears to be deteriorating, it must
be cleaned off and renewed.
Placing Equipment Into Service After Storage
When taking equipment out of storage, perform the
following procedures:
A07003
4. Fill with recommended oil. Refer to the Motorized Wheel Service Manual for the type and
amount oil to be used. This oil should be
drained and new oil should be added after 500
hours of operation.
Storage Procedures
A7-17
A7-18
Storage Procedure
A07003
SECTION B
STRUCTURES
INDEX
B01016
Index
B1-1
NOTES
B1-2
Index
B01016
SECTION B2
STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
INDEX
B02015
Structural Components
B2-1
NOTES
B2-2
Structural Components
B02015
STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
The 930E deck components are removable in sections as shown in Figure 2-1. The following removal
and installation instructions detail the steps to be
taken before the decks and hood can be removed.
Additional steps may be required before the deck or
other major structure is removed, depending on
optional equipment installed on the truck at the factory or after delivery.
Prior to removal or repair procedures, it may be necessary to remove the body to provide clearance for
lifting equipment to be used. If body removal is not
required, the body should be raised and the safety
cables installed at the rear of the truck.
Read and observe the following instructions
before attempting any repairs!
Preparation
1. Reduce the engine speed to idle. Place the
selector switch in NEUTRAL and apply the
parking brake. Be certain the parking brake
applied indicator lamp in the overhead panel is
illuminated.
2. Place the drive system in the rest mode by turning the rest switch on the instrument panel ON.
Be certain the rest warning lamp is illuminated.
3. Shut down the engine using the keyswitch. If,
for some reason the engine does not shut
down, use the shutdown switch on the center
console.
4. Verify the link voltage lights are off. If they
remain on longer than 5 minutes after shutdown, notify the electrical department.
5. Verify the steering accumulators have bled
down by attempting to steer.
6. Bleed down the brake accumulators using the
manual bleed valves on the brake manifold.
7. Open the battery disconnect switches.
B02015
Structural Components
B2-3
2. Capscrews and
Lockwashers
Removal
1. Remove hardware attaching diagonal ladder (4,
Figure 2-1) to front bumper.
2. Attach lifting device to the ladder and lift structure off truck.
B2-4
Structural Components
B02015
DECKS
The right and left deck mounting pad locations are
nearly identical. The decks are mounted directly to the
frame support structures using hardened flatwashers.
Be certain to use hardened flatwashers during reassembly.
B02015
5. Headlights
6. Retard Grid Mounting Location
7. Electrical Connector
Structural Components
B2-5
Installation
Repeat above procedures in reverse order for installation of the deck and components. Tighten all
attaching hardware to standard torque specifications
as listed in Section A, Standard Torque Chart and
Tables.
before
mating
surfaces
Installation
Repeat above procedures in reverse order for installation of the deck and components. Tighten all
attaching hardware to standard torque specifications
as listed in Section A, Standard Torque Chart and
Tables.
LEFT DECK
Removal
NOTE: The left deck mounting arrangement is nearly
identical to the right deck. Refer to Section N, Truck
Cab, for cab removal and installation instructions.
1. Shut down engine following all the procedures
listed on page 2-1 of this Section of the manual.
2. Be certain the brake system accumulators have
been bled to release pressure.
3. Tag and disconnect all hydraulic lines and electrical cables which will interfere with deck
removal. Cap all lines to prevent entrance of
foreign material.
mating
surfaces
before
CENTER DECK
Center deck removal only requires removal of any
attached hoses cables etc. before removing the
mounting hardware and lifting the deck structure off.
If equipped with air conditioning and air conditioning system components are to be removed,
refer to Section N, Operator Comfort, for special
instructions on discharging the air conditioning
system prior to disconnecting any air conditioning lines.
B2-6
Structural Components
B02015
SECTION B3
DUMP BODY
INDEX
B03017 08/03
Dump Body
B3-1
NOTES
B3-2
Dump Body
08/03 B03017
DUMP BODY
2. Remove mud flaps and rock ejectors from both
sides of the body. Remove electrical cables,
lubrication hoses etc. attached to the body.
Removal
3. Attach chains around upper end of hoist cylinders to support them after the mounting pins
are removed.
3. Hoist Cylinder
4. Pin Retainer
B03017 08/03
2. Guide Rope
Dump Body
B3-3
Installation
B3-4
6. Shim
7. Frame Pivot
8. Pivot Bushing
9. Body Pivot Bushing
Dump Body
08/03 B03017
BODY PADS
It is not necessary to remove the dump body to
replace body pads. Pads should be inspected
during scheduled maintenance inspections and
replaced if worn excessively.
1. Raise the unloaded dump body to a height sufficient to allow access to all pads.
B03017 08/03
3. Frame
4. Body Pad
Dump Body
5. Shim
6. Mounting Pad
B3-5
BODY GUIDE
Any time personnel are required to perform maintenance on the vehicle with the dump body in the
raised position, the body-up retention cable
MUST be installed.
1. To hold the dump body in the up position, raise
the body to it's maximum height. Refer to Figure
3-6.
3. Cable Assembly
4. Axle Housing Ear
Structure
BODY UP SWITCH
Refer to Section "D", Electrical System (24VDC) for
adjustment procedure of the body up switch.
B3-6
Dump Body
08/03 B03017
ROCK EJECTORS
Rock Ejectors are placed between the rear dual
wheels to keep rocks or other material from lodging
between the tires. Failure to maintain the Rock Ejectors could allow debris to build up between the dual
wheels and cause damage to the tires.
Inspection
1. The ejectors must be positioned on the center
line between the rear tires within 0.25 in. (6.0
mm).
B03017 08/03
Dump Body
B3-7
2. Wheel Housing
B3-8
3. Stop Block
4. Mounting Bracket
Dump Body
08/03 B03017
SECTION B4
FUEL TANK
INDEX
B04015 07/03
Fuel Tank
B4-1
NOTES
B4-2
Fuel Tank
07/03 B04015
FUEL TANK
B04015 07/03
Fuel Tank
17. Flatwasher
18. Rubber Dampener
19. Ground Wire
20. Wire Harness
21. Capscrews & Lockwashers
22. Capscrews & Lockwashers
23. Refueling Cap
24. Fuel Receiver
B4-3
Repair
Removal
1. Raise the truck body and install the body-up
cable.
If a tank is to be weld repaired, special precautions are necessary to prevent fire or explosion.
Consult local authorities for safety regulations
before proceeding.
Cleaning
The fuel tank is provided with a drain and a cleaning
port in the side that allows steam or solvent to be utilized in cleaning tanks that have accumulated foreign
material.
It is not necessary to remove the tank from the truck
for cleaning of sediment, however rust and scale on
the walls and baffles may require complete tank
removal. This allows cleaning solutions to be in contact with all interior surfaces by rotating the tank in
various positions, etc.
Prior to a cleaning procedure of this type, all vents,
fuel gauge, and hose connections should be
removed and temporarily sealed. After all scale, rust,
and foreign material has been removed, the temporary plugs can be removed.
A small amount of light oil should be sprayed into the
tank to prevent rust if the tank is to remain out of service. All openings should be sealed for rust prevention.
B4-4
Fuel Tank
07/03 B04015
Low fuel switch (13, Figure 4-1) controls the low fuel
level indicator on the overhead warning indicator light
panel in the operator cab. The switch is calibrated to
turn on the low fuel indicator when the usable fuel
remaining in the tank is approximately 25 gallons (95
liters).
Removal
1. Drain the fuel below the level of the gauge
sender.
2. Disconnect the wire from the terminal.
3. Loosen the small screws holding the fuel gauge
sender unit and carefully remove.
Installation
1. Clean mating surfaces, and install a new gasket.
2. Reinstall the sender unit in the tank. Use care
and ensure that the float is oriented properly
and works freely in the vertical plane during
installation.
3. Reinstall the four socket head capscrews and
tighten to standard torque. Reconnect the wire
to the terminal.
4. Refill the tank and check for leaks.
B04015 07/03
Fuel Tank
B4-5
1. Screen
2. Cover
3. Clamp
4. Body
5. Valve Spring
6. O-Ring
7. End Fitting
8. Stem
9. O-Ring
10. Ball Cage
11. Solid Ball
12. Float Ball
B4-6
Fuel Tank
07/03 B04015
3. Frame Rails
4. Fuel Tank
5. Filler Cap
6. Receiver Assembly
7. Refueling Box
8. Capscrew
9. Tapped Bar
NOTE: This illustration represents a typical installation. Installation may vary depending on truck model.
B04015 07/03
Fuel Tank
B4-7
NOTES
B4-8
Fuel Tank
07/03 B04015
SECTION C
ENGINE
INDEX
POWERTRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C4-1
C01014
Index
C1-1
NOTES
C1-2
Index
C01014
SECTION C2
POWER MODULE
INDEX
C02021
Power Module
C2-1
NOTES
C2-2
Power Module
C02021
POWER MODULE
The radiator, engine and alternator assemblies are
mounted on a roller equipped subframe which is contained within the truck's main frame and is referred to
as a power module. This arrangement permits
removal and installation of these components with a
minimum amount of disconnect and by utilizing the
unique roll in/roll out feature.
Although the instructions in this section are primarily
based upon the Rollout method for major component removal, the radiator and fan may be removed
as separate items. Instructions for radiator and fan
removal are contained later in this section. Optional
equipment may be installed on the truck, requiring
additional removal and installation steps not listed.
The procedures outlined in this section of the manual
are general instructions for power module removal
and installation. It may be necessary to perform
some procedures in a different order or use different
methods for component removal and installation,
depending on the lifting equipment available at the
mine site. Prior to removal or repair procedures, it
may be necessary to remove the body to provide
clearance for lifting equipment to be used. If body
removal is not required, the body should be raised
and the safety cables installed at the rear of the
truck.
Read and observe the following instructions before
attempting any repairs!
C02021
Power Module
C2-3
C2-4
Power Module
C02021
C02021
Power Module
7. Reducer Elbow
8. T-Bolt Clamp
9. Duct Support Rod
10. Right Front Intake Duct
11. Right Rear Intake Duct
C2-5
11. Close cab heater shutoff water valves, disconnect water lines and drain water from the heater
core. Secure water lines away from engine
compartment to prevent interference with power
module removal.
12. Drain engine coolant into clean containers for
re-use after engine installation. Coolant capacity is approximately 195 gal (738 l).
13. Disconnect and remove piping (6, Figure 2-5)
from engine water pump and radiator routed to
the brake system cooling heat exchanger (7).
14. Remove upper radiator support rod (11) at each
side of radiator.
15. Remove capscrews and washers at vertical and
diagonal ladder mounting pads. Lift ladders
from truck and move to storage area.
16. Refer to Section N, Operator Comfort, for procedures required to properly remove the refrigerant. After the system has been discharged,
disconnect refrigerant hoses routed to cab at
the compressor and receiver/drier (10).
NOTE: System contains HFC-134A refrigerant.
C2-6
Federal regulations prohibit venting air conditioning system refrigerants into the atmosphere.
An approved recovery/recycle station must be
used to remove the refrigerant from the air conditioning system.
Power Module
C02021
C02021
2. Remove capscrews and caps securing subframe mounting bushings to the subframe support bracket (3) at rear of subframe.
3. Check engine and alternator to make sure all
cables, wires, hoses, tubing and linkages have
been disconnected.
Power Module
C2-7
3. Capscrews
4. Locate a jack under the rear of the power module. Raise the rear portion of engine subframe
and install subframe rollers (Refer to Figure 26). Lower the rear portion of the subframe carefully until the rollers rest on the main frame
guide rail.
NOTE: Subframe rollers are supplied in the truck tool
group and can be installed in the storage position
after use, as shown in Figure 2-6.
5. Position hoist to front subframe lifting points (9,
Figure 2-5). Raise the engine subframe until the
engine is on a level plane. Remove the safety
chain.
4. Engine
5. Power Module Subframe
C2-8
Power Module
C02021
C02021
Power Module
C2-9
C2-10
Power Module
C02021
SECTION C3
COOLING SYSTEM
INDEX
C03023 03/01
Cooling System
C3-1
NOTES
C3-2
Cooling System
03/01 C03023
COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR
Removal - Radiator
1. Drain coolant from radiator and engine. Be prepared to catch approximately 200 gallons (757
liters) of coolant. If the coolant is to be reused, it
must be stored in clean containers.
2. If radiator is being removed without the removal
of the complete power module, remove grille
and hood according to removal instructions in
Section B, Structural Components.
Federal regulations prohibit venting air conditioning system refrigerants into the atmosphere.
An approved recovery/recycle station must be
used to remove the refrigerant from the air conditioning system.
3. Refer to instructions in Section N, Operator
Comfort, and discharge the refrigerant from the
system with a recovery/recycle station. The system is charged with HFC-134A refrigerant.
a. Remove refrigerant hose clamps and
remove the receiver/drier (7, Figure 3-1)
mounted on rear, left side of the radiator
shroud. Disconnect wiring from low pressure
switch.
b. Remove clamp and disconnect inlet and outlet hoses (4 & 5, Figure 3-2) at the condenser. Remove mounting capscrews (3)
and remove condenser.
c. Cap all hoses to prevent contamination.
Remove any remaining clamps attaching
hoses and wiring to radiator shroud and
reposition to allow removal of the radiator
and shroud assembly.
5
C03023 03/01
7. Heat Exchanger
8. Receiver Drier
9. Mount Capscrews
Cooling System
4. Inlet Hose
5. Outlet Hose
C3-3
C3-4
Cooling System
03/01 C03023
RADIATOR REPAIR
Internal Inspection
If desired, an internal inspection can be performed on
the radiator before complete disassembly. The
inspection entails removing tubes in the radiator core
and cutting them open. This type of inspection can
indicate overall radiator condition, as well as coolant
and additive breakdown.
To perform this inspection, remove about four random tubes from the air inlet side of the radiator.
Remove tubes from both the top and bottom cores,
and near each end of the radiator. Refer to Disassembly and Assembly in this section for proper
instructions for tube removal and installation. Analyze any contaminant residue inside the tube to
determine the cause. Flush the system before returning to service. Contact your nearest L&M Radiator
facility for further instruction or visit the L&M website
for further information at www.mesabi.com.
4. Battery Box
5. Outlet Elbow
External Cleaning
Many radiator shops use a hot alkaline soap, caustic
soda, or chemical additives in their boil-out tanks
which can attack solders. These tanks are generally
not recommended. Before such tanks are used for
cleaning, ensure that the cleaning solutions are
not harmful to solder, otherwise damage to the
radiator will result. Be sure to completely rinse the
cleaned tube/core in clean water after removing from
the boil-out tank.
As an alternative to boil-out tanks, radiators can be
cleaned externally with a high pressure washer and
soap. In most cases, it may be best to blow out any
dry dirt with a high pressure air gun prior to washing
the core with the high pressure washer.
Pressure washers should not exceed 1200 psi.
Unlike conventional cores, you can and should get
right up next to the core with the spray nozzle. Starting from the air exit side, place the high pressure
washer nozzle next to the fins. Concentrate on a
small area, slowly working from the top down. Make
sure to spray straight into the core, not at an angle.
Continue washing until the exit water is free of dirt.
Repeat from the opposite side.
C03023 03/01
Cooling System
C3-5
Disassembly
C3-6
Cooling System
03/01 C03023
4. Remove all the tubes at the top, before removing the bottom tubes.
5. After all of the tubes are removed, pliers can be
used to remove the seals from the tanks. Discard all seals. New seals must be used for
assembly.
Assembly
NOTE: For easier installation, soak the seals in hot
water before installing.
1. Install the new tube seals onto the bottom tank
and the bottom side of the center tank. Do not
install seals for the top core at this time. Seals
for the top of the tubes do not have locking
grooves, bottom tube seals do. Ensure the correct seals are installed in the proper position.
Properly installed;
slightly convex
Improperly installed;
concave
C03023 03/01
2. Use a 1/2 in. (13 mm) diameter brush to lubricate the seals with lube/release agent
(XA2308).
Cooling System
C3-7
Pressure Testing
Radiators should be pressure tested at 15 psi for 30
minutes. Various methods of pressure testing include
the following:
Pressurize the radiator and submerge into a test
tank. Watch for leaks.
Lay the front side of the radiator on the floor. Cap
off ports, and fill the radiator with hot water.
Pressurize the radiator and check for leaks.
Cap off radiator ports. Install an air pressure
gauge and pressurize to 15 psi. Remove the air
source and monitor the pressure gauge.
Pressurize the radiator with air, and spray sealed
joints with soapy water.
C3-8
Cooling System
03/01 C03023
Installation - Radiator
1. Attach a hoist to the radiator assembly and lift
into position on the subframe.
hoses.
C03023 03/01
Cooling System
C3-9
COOLANT SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
If abnormal coolant temperatures are experienced,
perform the following visual inspections and tests:
C3-10
Cooling System
03/01 C03023
SECTION C4
POWERTRAIN
INDEX
C04027
Power Train
C4-1
NOTES
C4-2
Power Train
C04027
POWER TRAIN
ALTERNATOR
Removal - Alternator
The following instructions cover the removal of the
main alternator from the engine after the power
module has been removed from the truck. (Refer to
Figure 4-2.)
4. Subframe
5. Gap
C04027
Power Train
C4-3
C4-4
Power Train
C04027
ENGINE/ALTERNATOR MATING
Measuring Procedure
1. Thoroughly clean the alternator housing mounting surface, rotor drive adapter mounting surface and flywheel housing adapter mounting
surfaces.
General Instructions
T.I.R
0.25 mm
0.18 mm
0.25 mm
C04027
Power Train
A - Dimension A
B - Drive Shims
C - Dimension C
D - Housing Shims
C4-5
3. Steel Bar
4. Capscrew
5. Determining Shims:
Compare Measurement C (Step 3.c.) with
Measurement A (Step 4.f.).
a. If C is greater than A, subtract: (C - A) = B
B = ______________Shim pack thickness
to be installed at location B, Figure 4-4.
Rotor-to-Drive Ring
Location B
Shim Part Number
Shim Thickness
TM3467
0.004 inch
TM3469
0.007 inch
C4-6
Power Train
Shim Thickness
TM3466
0.004 inch
TM3468
0.007 inch
C04027
9. Rotate the crankshaft one full revolution and listen for any unusual noise caused by moving
components contacting stationary parts.
C04027
5. Capscrew
6. Engine Drive Ring
7. Alternator Rotor
B - Drive Shims
D - Housing Shims
Power Train
C4-7
ENGINE
Service
Removal
Refer to instructions in previous sections for removal
instructions for the power module, alternator, and
radiator assembly.
C4-8
1. Cradle Structure
3. Engine Subframe
4. Engine
Power Train
C04027
SECTION C5
AIR CLEANERS
INDEX
C05013 05/98
C5-1
NOTES
C5-2
05/98 C05013
AIR CLEANERS
AIR CLEANERS
Operation
Air required by the diesel engine passes through the
air cleaner assemblies mounted on each side of the
radiator. These air cleaners discharge heavy particles of dust and dirt by centrifugal action and then
remove finer particles by passing air through filter
cartridges.
The engine demand for air creates a vacuum in the
air cleaners and causes outside air to be drawn in
through air inlets on the air cleaners. Dirty air entering here is drawn through a series of tubes that are
designed to produce a cyclonic action. As the air
passes through the outer portion of the tubes, a circular motion is set up causing dust and dirt particles
to be thrown from the air stream into dust collectors
(1, Figure 5-1). At the same time, the air stream turns
and is directed up through the center of the tubes into
the filter chamber. Here the air passes through the
main filter element and safety filter element and out
the clean air outlet to the engine's air intake system.
The function of the safety filter is to increase overall
reliability and engine protection.
The truck engine must be shut down before servicing the air cleaner assemblies or opening the
engine air intake system.
Never start the engine with the filter elements
removed. Engine operation with elements
removed can cause serious engine damage.
C05013 05/98
C5-3
4. Check safety (secondary) filter element indicator nut (7). If solid red area is showing, safety filter replacement is required. If center is green,
safety element does not require service.
C5-4
05/98 C05013
After inspection, determine the condition of the element and choose either the washing or compressed
air method for cleaning the filter element. If the element is clogged with carbon, soot, oil and/or dust, the
complete washing procedure will produce the best
results.
9. Close and latch the dust collectors on the bottom of the air cleaner assembly.
C05013 05/98
C5-5
Precleaner Section
The tubes in the precleaner section of the air cleaner
assembly should be cleaned at least once annually
and at each engine overhaul. More frequent cleaning
may be necessary depending upon operating conditions and local environment should tubes become
clogged with oil, sludge or dirt.
To inspect tubes in precleaner section, remove main
filter element. Do not remove the safety element.
Loosen clamps and remove dust collector cup. Use a
light to inspect the tubes, all tubes should be clear
and the light should be visible.
Clean the tubes as follows if clogging is evident.
C5-6
05/98 C05013
C05013 05/98
C5-7
NOTES
C5-8
05/98 C05013
SECTION C7
FAN CLUTCH
INDEX
FAN CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REMOVAL & INSTALLATION TOOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FAN CLUTCH - DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CLEANING AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ASSEMBLY - FAN CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TEST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-1
NOTES
C7-2
Fan Clutch
C07001
FAN CLUTCH
REMOVAL & INSTALLATION TOOLING
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-3
C7-4
Fan Clutch
C07001
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-5
C7-6
Fan Clutch
C07001
3. Pitot Tube
4.Wear Sleeve
5. Retainer/Seal Assembly
6. Shaft Assembly
8. Washer
9. Bolt
10. Oil Seal
11. Bearing Retainer
13. O-Ring Seal
14. Main Bearing
C07001
Fan Clutch
38. Bolt
39. Wear Sleeve
40. Retainer/Seal Assembly
41. Sleeve Bearing
(rear, short)
42. Fan Mounting Hub
Assembly
44. Sleeve Bearing
(front, long)
45. End Cap
C7-7
FIGURE 7-4.
FIGURE 7-2.
1. Support the fan clutch on a bench with fan
mounting hub (42) facing upward. Support the
assembly beneath the pulley. Remove bolts
(38) and washers (37).
FIGURE 7-5.
FIGURE 7-3.
2. Install lifting eyes, and attach a hoist and chains
to front bearing retainer (35). Use a small
screwdriver to separate the front bearing
retainer from pulley adapter (21), and set it
aside on a bench.
C7-8
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-8.
FIGURE 7-6.
FIGURE 7-9.
FIGURE 7-7.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-9
FIGURE 7-10.
FIGURE 7-12.
9. Turn bearing retainer (35) over on the press
bed. Press front bearing (33) out of the bearing
retainer using tooling (D).
FIGURE 7-13.
FIGURE 7-11.
10. Support beneath the fan mounting hub with end
cap (45) down, but approximately 2 in. (50 mm)
above the press bed. Using a solid steel bar or
equivalent, press the end cap from the fan
mounting hub.
C7-10
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-14.
12. Inspect sleeve bearing (44) and sleeve bearing
(41). Compare the color of each bearing to the
chart below. The lighter the appearance of the
bearing, the more worn it is. If either bearing
needs replacing, proceed to the next step. If the
bearings are in good condition, skip the next
step.
FIGURE 7-16.
14. Remove the stack of facing plates (30) and steel
clutch plates (31) from inside the pulley.
FIGURE 7-17.
FIGURE 7-15.
13. Position tooling (C) against sleeve bearing (41).
Press the front sleeve bearing downward to
press it out of the fan mounting hub. Rear
sleeve bearing (44) will be pressed out simultaneously.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-11
FIGURE 7-20.
FIGURE 7-18.
16. Attach wire lifting hooks to piston (23). Use the
lifting hooks to pull the piston from pulley
adapter (21).
FIGURE 7-19.
FIGURE 7-21.
17. Remove seal rings (22 & 24) from the piston.
19. Install lifting eyebolts to the shaft and bearing
retainer assembly. Use a suitable lifting device
to lift the assembly from the pulley. Remove Oring seal (13).
NOTE: It may be necessary to use a soft rubber
mallet to separate the shaft and bearing retainer from
the pulley.
C7-12
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-22.
20. Position the shaft as shown. Insert a phillipshead screwdriver into pitot tubes (3) to loosen
and remove them from the shaft. Rotate the
pitot tube until the sealant holding it tight is broken loose. Then, grip the pitot tube with a pair of
pliers, and gently tap on the pliers to remove the
pitot tubes from the hole in the shaft.
FIGURE 7-24.
FIGURE 7-23.
C07001
FIGURE 7-25.
Fan Clutch
C7-13
FIGURE 7-28.
FIGURE 7-26.
24. Support the bearing retainer as close as possible to the bearing bore. Use care not to damage
the retainer/seal assembly. Press the shaft out
of bearing (14) using tooling (E).
FIGURE 7-29.
FIGURE 7-27.
25. Remove oil seal (10) from bearing retainer (11).
C7-14
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-30.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-15
1. Check the shaft assembly for wear or damage. Refer to Figure 7-31 for dimensions.
NOTE: Some shafts were manufactured as two-piece assemblies. Do Not attempt to separate the shaft assembly.
2. Inspect and clean pitot tube holes in the shaft. Use a standard reamer, straight flute 0.3770 in. diameter.
Remove pipe plugs in the shaft for cleaning and reinstall using Loctite Primer N and #242.
C7-16
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-32.
3. Check pulley and adapter dimensions.
FIGURE 7-34.
FIGURE 7-33.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-17
FIGURE 7-36.
C7-18
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-37.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-19
FIGURE 7-39.
FIGURE 7-38.
C7-20
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-40.
FIGURE 7-42.
4. Turn the hub over on the bed of the press.
Again using tooling (B), press rear sleeve bearing (41) into the fan mounting hub until the tool
contacts the shoulder of the hub.
FIGURE 7-41.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-21
FIGURE 7-44.
FIGURE 7-43.
5. Press front retainer/seal assembly (40) onto the
fan mounting hub (42) using tooling (D). The
inner race of the retainer should be recessed
0.040 in. (1.0 mm) below the shoulder.
Check carefully to insure the retainer/seal
assembly is installed straight, and not bent or
damaged in any way which will cause interference between it and the bearing retainer after
assembly.
Front
wear
sleeve
(39)
is
NOT
interchangeable with rear (notched) wear
sleeve (4). The ID of the front wear sleeve is
color coded red.
Note the direction of the lead pattern on the
sleeve. The wear sleeve must be installed
with the pattern leading in the correct
direction in order to prevent leakage from
occurring.
Use extreme care when handling the wear
sleeve. The slightest nicks or scratches may
cause leakage.
FIGURE 7-45.
C7-22
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-46.
FIGURE 7-48.
FIGURE 7-47.
FIGURE 7-49.
8. Apply Loctite Primer N and #609 to the mating
surfaces of front bearing (33) and front bearing
retainer (35). Place the bearing into position on
the retainer with the notch for the bearing pin
facing downward.
Press the front bearing into the bearing retainer
using tooling (E) or equivalent. Press ONLY on
the outer race of the bearing until it seats at the
bottom of the bore.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-23
FIGURE 7-50.
11. Coat the bearing I.D.and the fan mounting hub
bearing journal with Loctite Primer N and #609
(or equivalent). Place the front bearing retainer
sub-assembly into position on the fan mounting
hub. (Ensure the notch in the bearing is aligned
with the bearing dowel pin.) Do not allow the
seal lip to come in contact with the Loctite.
Press the bearing onto the hub using tooling (D)
until it contacts the wear sleeve.
FIGURE 7-51.
12. Install clutch hub (29) on the fan mounting hub
assembly (42) with the open end down. (No
special timing is necessary.)
FIGURE 7-52.
13. Install external snap ring (28) to hold the clutch
hub in place.
C7-24
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-53.
FIGURE 7-55.
FIGURE 7-54.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-25
FIGURE 7-57.
FIGURE 7-56.
C7-26
FIGURE 7-58.
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-59.
19. Some fan clutches were assembled with an external snapring that is used as a spacer between the bearing
and the oil seal. Newer models were assembled using a notched spacer. If an external snapring was used,
place the snapring (12) on top of the bearing (oil seal side). If a notched spacer was used, the spacer will be
installed in a later step. Proceed to the following step.
FIGURE 7-60.
FIGURE 7-61.
20. Coat the O.D. of rear oil seal (10) with Loctite
Primer N and #242 (or equivalent). Use tooling
(E) or the equivalent to install the oil seal in the
rear bearing retainer, flush with the rear face.
Do not lubricate the seal. The seal is made of
teflon and must be installed dry.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-27
FIGURE 7-62.
FIGURE 7-63.
Carefully, lower the rear bearing retainer subassembly in place on the shaft. Do not allow the
seal lip to come in contact with the Loctite.
Ensure the notch in the bearing and the dowel
pin are aligned. If external snapring (16) was
installed in the bearing retainer, ensure the
opening is aligned with the dowel pin.
Press the bearing onto the shaft until it reaches
the shoulder of the wear sleeve. Wipe any
excess Loctite from the assembly.
Ensure the seal lip is dry. The seal must
remain dry for proper sealing.
Spin the bearing retainer approximately 25
times to burnish the teflon seal on the wear
sleeve. Check for abnormal sounds or other
indications of contact between the retainer/seal
assembly and the bearing retainer. If interference is found, remove the bearing retainer and
eliminate the point of interference.
FIGURE 7-64.
24. Be sure the pitot tube holes in the shaft are
clean and free of burrs and staking material, to
allow the pitot tubes to fit into the holes and seat
completely to the bottom. Apply a thin coating of
Loctite Primer N and #609 (or equivalent) on
the straight end of one pitot tube (3). Coat the
C7-28
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-66.
26. Install small seal ring (24) in the inside groove,
and large seal ring (22) in the outside groove of
piston (23). Lubricate the seal ring grooves with
an oil-soluble lubricant such as engine assembly grease before installation. Refer to the Figure 7-66 for proper orientation.
FIGURE 7-65.
FIGURE 7-67.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-29
FIGURE 7-69.
30. Install spring washer (25), shim (26), and
spirolock ring (27). It will be necessary to press
downward to compress the spring washer, while
forcing the spirolock to properly seat in the
groove. The shim must then be centered on the
spring washer to prevent it from interfering with
the movement of the piston.
FIGURE 7-68.
FIGURE 7-70.
31. Place the front bearing retainer sub-assembly
on the bench with the clutch hub up.
Install one steel clutch plate (31) in place in the
bearing retainer. Now dip a facing plate (30) in
new engine oil, allow the excess to drain off,
and place the plate on top of the steel plate.
Repeat this step until all 16 plates have been
installed.
C7-30
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-71.
FIGURE 7-73.
33. Install at least four bolts (38) with lockwashers
(37) and snug. Insert the bolts 90 apart.
FIGURE 7-72.
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-31
FIGURE 7-76.
FIGURE 7-74.
FIGURE 7-77.
FIGURE 7-75.
35. Lubricate the hook type sealrings (17) on the
shaft assembly. Carefully lower the shaft subassembly into the pulley bore and onto the pulley until the retainer rests on the pulley. Use
caution when lowering. Damage to the sleeve
bearings may result if the shaft is cocked during
installation.
C7-32
Fan Clutch
C07001
FIGURE 7-78.
38. Turn the assembly over on the bench. Install the remaining bolts (38) and lockwashers (37), and torque all to
36-43 ft. lbs. (49-58 Nm).
C07001
Fan Clutch
C7-33
TEST PROCEDURE
1. The fan clutch should be fully locked up with 40 psi oil pressure supplied at the control pressure port.
2. Operate the fan clutch with 180 F (82 C) oil supplied to the oil in port for 2 hours. Manually engage and disengage the clutch during the test to operate seals in both modes. Restrict the fan mounting hub rotation while
the clutch is disengaged, but ensure the fan mounting hub is allowed to rotate freely while the clutch is
engaged.
The fan clutch rotation causes the pitot tubes to pump lubrication oil from inside the fan clutch,
maintaining low internal oil pressure. If lubricating oil is supplied to the fan clutch before it is rotating in
the proper direction, internal pressures will become excessive, causing the oil seals to leak.
C7-34
Fan Clutch
C07001
SECTION D
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (24VDC NON-PROPULSION)
INDEX
NOTE: Electrical system wiring hookup and electrical schematics are located in Section R of this Manual.
DANGEROUS VOLTAGE LEVELS ARE PRESENT WHEN THE TRUCK IS RUNNING AND CONTINUE
TO EXIST AFTER SHUTDOWN IF THE REQUIRED SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES ARE NOT FOLLOWED. Before attempting repairs or working near propulsion system components, the following
precautions and truck shutdown procedure must be followed:
DO NOT step on or use any power cable as a handhold when the engine is running.
Never open any electrical cabinet covers or touch the retarding grid elements. Additional procedures are required before it is safe to do so. Refer to Section E for additional propulsion
system safety checks to be performed by a technician trained to service the system.
ALL removal, repairs and installation of propulsion system electrical components, cables etc.
must be performed by an electrical maintenance technician properly trained to service the
system.
In the event of a propulsion system malfunction, a qualified technician should inspect the
truck and verify the propulsion system does not have dangerous voltage levels present
before repairs are started.
Prior to welding on the truck, maintenance personnel should attempt to notify the Komatsu
Factory Representative. The welding ground electrode should be attached as close as possible to the area to be welded. Never weld on the rear of the electrical control cabinet or the
retard grid exhaust air louvers.
After the truck is parked in position for the repairs, the truck must be shut down properly to ensure the
safety of those working in the areas of the deck, electrical cabinet, traction motors, and retarding grids. The
following procedures will ensure the electrical system is properly discharged before repairs are started.
D01033
Index
D1-1
D1-2
Index
D01033
SECTION D2
24VDC ELECTRIC SUPPLY SYSTEM
INDEX
D02025
D2-1
NOTES
D2-2
D02025
Do Not smoke or allow flame around a dead battery or during the recharging operation. The
expelled gas from a dead cell is extremely explosive.
Excessive consumption of water indicates leakage or
overcharging. Normal water usage for a unit operating eight hours per day is about one to two ounces
per cell per month. For heavy duty operation (24
hour) normal consumption should run about one to
two ounces per cell per week. Any appreciable
increase over these figures should be considered a
danger signal.
Troubleshooting
Lead-acid storage batteries contain sulfuric acid,
which if handled improperly may cause serious
burns on skin or other serious injuries to personnel. Wear protective gloves, aprons and eye protection when handling and servicing lead-acid
storage batteries. See the precautions in Section
A of this manual to insure proper handling of batteries and accidents involving sulfuric acid.
Two most common troubles that occur in the charging system are undercharging and overcharging of
the truck's batteries.
An undercharged battery is incapable of providing
sufficient power to the truck's electrical system.
Some possible causes for an undercharged battery
are:
Sulfated battery plates
BATTERIES
Maintenance and Service
The electrolyte level of each cell should be checked
at the interval specified in Lubrication and Service,
Section P, and water added if necessary. The proper
level to maintain is 3/8 - 1/2 in. (10-13 mm) above the
plates. To insure maximum battery life, use only distilled water or water recommended by the battery
manufacturer. After adding water in freezing weather,
operate the engine for at least 30 minutes to thoroughly mix the electrolyte.
D02025
Overcharging, which causes overheating, is first indicated by excessive use of water. If allowed to continue, cell covers will push up at the positive ends
and in extreme cases the battery container will
become distorted and cracked.
Leakage can be detected by continual wetness of the
battery or excessive corrosion of the terminals, battery carrier and surrounding area. (A slight amount of
corrosion is normal in lead-acid batteries). Inspect
the case, covers and sealing compound for holes,
cracks or other signs of leakage. Check battery hold
down connections to make sure the tension is not
great enough to crack the battery, or loose enough to
allow vibration to open the seams. A leaking battery
should be replaced.
D2-3
Specific Gravity
Corrected to 80 F (27 C)
Freezing
Temperature
Degrees
1.280
-90 F (-70 C)
1.250
-60 F (-54 C)
1.200
-16 F (-27 C)
1.150
+5 F (-15 C)
1.100
+19 F (-7 C)
Idle batteries should not be allowed to stand unattended. If equipment is to stand unused for more
than two weeks, the batteries should be removed
and placed in a cool, dry place where they may be
checked periodically and charged when necessary.
Remember, all lead-acid batteries discharge slowly
when not in use. This self discharge takes place
even though the battery is not connected in a circuit
and is more pronounced in warm weather than in
cold.
D2-4
D02025
Battery Box
The truck batteries are located in an enclosure (1,
Figure 2-1) in the center of the truck behind the front
bumper. For access to the batteries, remove the two
covers by turning the cover handles counterclockwise until released. Lift eyes are attached to the
ends of the enclosure if the entire battery container
must be removed.
Four, type 8D batteries (2) are installed in the battery box and are used for the 24VDC engine cranking circuit and the 12VDC circuits. Two Type 4D
batteries (3) are installed to provide 24VDC for the
truck systems other than engine starting. A system
battery starter disconnect relay isolates these batteries from the engine starter circuit during engine
cranking.
D02025
3. System Batteries
4. Battery Control Box
D2-5
5. Auxiliary Battery
Connectors
6. 12 VDC Circuit
Breaker
7. Isolation Diodes
8. Battery Equalizer
D2-6
D02025
Troubleshooting
Normal battery maintenance procedures should be
followed according to the intervals specified in the
"Lubrication and Service" section of this manual.
Refer to the "Battery" information in this section for
detailed instructions regarding proper battery maintenance and service procedures. Prior to troubleshooting the battery equalizer system, inspect all battery
circuit connections for excessive corrosion, loose
cables, ground connections etc. Use the following
procedure to check the system if a problem occurs:
1. Check the 12VDC circuit breaker.
a. If the circuit breaker has opened, check circuits and repair cause.
D02025
D2-7
NOTES
D2-8
D02025
SECTION D3
24VDC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
INDEX
24 VDC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
PASSENGER SEAT BASE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
TRUCK SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
Tail Light Resistor Diode Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
5 Minute Idle Timer Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
5 Minute Idle Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-5
5 Minute Idle Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-5
5 Minute Idle Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-5
5 Minute Idle Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-5
Inclinometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-5
Brake Warning Buzzer (BWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-5
Alarm Indicating Device (AID) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-5
Coolant Level/Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-5
Temperature and Latch Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-6
Hot Switch Inverter Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-6
Hot Switch Inverter Card (Slot 4) (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-7
Oil Level Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-7
Temperature Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-7
Diode Matrix (Without Sound) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-7
Diode Matrix (With Sound) Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-7
Lamp Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-7
Electrical Interface Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-8
Lubrication System Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-8
Lincoln Lube Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-8
Barometric Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-8
D03024
D3-1
D3-2
D03024
COMPONENTS
D03024
D3-3
D3-4
D03024
The contactor (7) energizes the idle timer and maintains current flow to the engine "run" circuit if the
operator turns the key switch off.
1. With the key switch ON, press the engine shutdown switch firmly to the momentary position
and release (switch will return to the ON position).
Coolant Level/Flasher
Inclinometer
The inclinometer is used by the on-board load weighing system to determine whether the truck is on a
level surface or tilted fore or aft. The information provided by the inclinometer is sent to the weighing system for use in calculating the payload. Refer to
Section M, Payload Meter, for detailed information on
the inclinometer and the on-board weighing system.
D03024
The coolant level and flasher card contains two separate circuits. The flasher circuit at the top of the card
has Q12 transistor biased to be saturated when no
malfunction is present, resulting in there being 24 volt
positive output on pin "H" of the card and on wire
12F. When a indicating circuit is activated, the ground
side of the circuit connected to card pin "K" is
grounded. Q12 will turn off initially and then after a
delay, adjusted by R20, will turn on and off to give the
intermittent 24 volt output.
D3-5
D3-6
D03024
Temperature Card
The temperature card (optional) is used to turn on
the high oil temperature indicator light. The indicator
light tells the operator hydraulic tank oil temperature
has exceeded acceptable levels. Normal temperature setting is 250F (121C). As the temperature
goes up the resistance in the probe decreases providing a ground path for the indicator light and alarm
horn.
D03024
D3-7
The Truck Control Interface Panel (TCI) (6, Figure 33) is the main interface between truck systems and
devices and service personnel. This panel is used in
conjunction with the Diagnostic Information Display
(DID) located in the operator's cab.
D3-8
D03024
D03024
D3-9
2. Circuit Breakers
D3-10
3. Sockets (P7-P12)
4. Diodes (D1-D23)
D03024
Relay Boards
Service
To replace a relay:
D03024
D3-11
2. Remove the two mounting screws (6, Figure 36) and carefully remove the circuit panel card
from the relay board.
D3-12
D03024
4 - relays
4 - relays
4 - relays
4 - relays
D03024
D3-13
spare (K6)
spare (K7)
spare (K8)
NC - Normally Closed
COM - Common
NO - Normally Open
D3-14
D03024
Body Up Switch
Adjustment
Operation
When the body is resting on the frame, actuator arm
(4) causes the electrical contacts in the magnetically
operated switch to close. When the body is raised,
the arm moves away from the switch, opening the
contacts. The electrical signal is sent to the control
system and the body-up relay.
The switch must be properly adjusted at all times.
Improper adjustment or loose mounting bolts may
cause false signals or damage to the switch assembly.
D03024
3. Proximity Switch
4. Actuator Arm
5. Adjustment Screws
D3-15
Operation
When the hoist cylinders approach maximum stroke,
and the body pivots on the pins, actuator arm (3)
moves close enough to the magnetically operated
switch to close the electrical contacts. When the contacts close, an electrical signal is sent to the hoist-up
limit solenoid valve (located in the hydraulic components cabinet) to prevent further oil flow to the hoist
cylinders.
The switch must be properly adjusted at all times.
Improper adjustment or loose mounting bolts may
cause false signals or damage to the switch assembly.
Adjustment
With body raised and hoist cylinders within 6 in. (152
mm) of maximum travel, make the following adjustment.
1. Adjust limit switch to achieve an air gap (dimension "A") of 0.50 to 0.56 in. (12.70 to 14.30 mm)
between sensing area and actuator arm (3).
Retighten capscrews.
FIGURE 3-9. BODY LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
Service
Keep sensing area clean, free of metallic dust and
other debris that may damage or inhibit operation of
the limit switch. If the switch is not functioning or
damaged the unit must be replaced.
D3-16
1. Body
2. Frame
3. Actuator Arm
4. Switch Mounting
Plate
5. Hoist Limit Switch
D03024
DEVICE(S) PROTECTED
CIRCUIT
LOCATION
CB00
50
11B1
CB1
440
CB2
20
240M
CB3
20
241M
CB4
20
240R1
CB5
20
241R1
CB6
15
11SL
CB7
10
68
CB8
10
712H
CB9
10
712A
CB10
10
Spare
CB11
15
Spare
CB12
Spare
CB13
15
Clearance Lights
11CL
CB14
15
Turn Signals
11Z
CB15
15
41T
CB16
15
44C
CB17
15
47B
CB18
15
Stop Lights
44A
CB19
15
Back-up Horn
79A
CB20
439E, 712S, 71
CB21
15
11A
CB22
23D
CB23
15
11DL
CB24
15
11DR
CB25
15
11HL
CB26
15
11HR
CB27
15
Headlight Switch
11D
CB28
15
Payload Meter
39J
CB29
15
Payload Meter
39G
CB30
15
Fog/Ladder Lights
11L
CB31
15
12H
CB32
15
12M
CB33
Not Used
CB34
Not Used
CB35
Not Used
CB36
10
Cigar Lighter
CB37
10
712W
CB38
712D
CB40A
12GE
CB40B
10
Radio/Cassette Player
11B4
CB41A
15
11B6
CB41B
15
11B7
CB42
15
712A
CB39
11B2
Not Used
CB43
10
Start Signal
21S
CB50
20
Communications Radio
SPR42/SPR46
CB51
20
Dispatch Radio
SPR43/SPR47
CB52
Not Used
CB53
Not Used
D03024
D3-17
NOTES
D3-18
D03024
SECTION D10
BATTERY CHARGING ALTERNATOR
INDEX
BATTERY CHARGING ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-3
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-3
Maintenance and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-3
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM (Niehoff) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-5
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-5
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES (On-Truck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-5
Equipment Required: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-5
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-6
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-6
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-6
Regulator Bypass Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-7
ON VEHICLE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-9
ALTERNATOR ELECTRICAL CONDITIONS - Low Voltage - High Voltage - No Voltage . . . . . . D10-9
BATTERY CONDITIONS AND CHARGE VOLTAGE REACTIONS:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-9
CHARGE VOLT AND AMP VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-10
DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-10
ADVANCED SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-11
Static Test - Engine OFF, Key ON, Battery Switch ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-11
Go To Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-11
Go To Regulator (If Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-12
Go To Regulator Connector On The Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-12
ALTERNATOR OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-13
ALTERNATOR DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-13
ALTERNATOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D10-14
D10002
D10-1
D10-2
D10002
BATTERY
During operation, the storage batteries function as an
electrochemical device for converting chemical
energy into the electrical energy required for operating the accessories when the engine is shut down.
Two most common troubles that occur in the charging system are undercharging and overcharging of
the truck's batteries.
An undercharged battery is incapable of providing
sufficient power to the truck's electrical system.
Some possible causes for an undercharged battery
are:
Sulfated battery plates
Loose or corroded battery connections
D10002
D10-3
Freezing
Temperature
Degrees
1.280
-90 F (-70 C)
1.250
-60 F (-54 C)
1.200
-16 F (-27 C)
1.150
+5 F (-15 C)
1.100
+19 F (-7 C)
Idle batteries should not be allowed to stand unattended. If equipment is to stand unused for more
than two weeks, the batteries should be removed
and placed in a cool, dry place where they may be
checked periodically and charged when necessary.
Remember, all lead-acid batteries discharge slowly
when not in use. This self discharge takes place
even though the battery is not connected in a circuit
and is more pronounced in warm weather than in
cold.
D10-4
D10002
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
(On-Truck)
Most 24 volt charging system problems can be diagnosed with the alternator installed on the truck, operating under normal conditions. Many problems can be
attributed to loose or corroded cable connectors. It is
essential that all battery charging circuit cables are in
satisfactory condition and all connections are clean
and securely tightened.
Equipment Required:
D10002
6. Voltage Regulator
7. Fan Guard
8. Cooling Fan Assembly
9. Mounting Lugs
10. Ground Terminals
D10-5
Test Procedure
Preliminary Checks
1. Check the drive belt tension as follows:
a. Apply 20.9 lbs. (9.5 kg) force at center of belt
span.
Test Setup
VOLTS
DIAGNOSIS
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
D10-6
D10002
D10002
D10-7
D10-8
10. Screw
11. Control Unit
12. Screw
13. Rotor
14. Shaft & Core
15. B+ Bolt Assembly
16. Retainer Ring
17. Nut
18. Front Stator
19. Stud
20. Shell
21. Pan Head Screw
22. Field Coil
23. Rear Stator
24. Rotor
25. Rear Bearing
26. Screw
27. Voltage Regulator
D10002
Wrong regulator.
Defective regulator.
Defective alternator.
NO VOLTAGE OUTPUT
No drive belt.
No battery (B+) voltage at alternator's "B+" terminal (except isolator type systems).
No "link" from "R" terminal to energize ("E") terminal on alternator when engine operating.
Defective regulator.
Maintenance type:
Defective alternator.
D10002
D10-9
DEFINITIONS
NOTE: Charge voltage and amp rates vary from
battery type to battery type, based on battery
construction technology and physical size of battery.
Low amps are the necessary amps that a battery will take continuously over a period of time
without damage to the battery when the battery
is in an operating system and is constantly
cycling. Batteries such as the Group-8D may
accept rates up to 15 amps over several hours
without raising their internal temperature more
than a few degrees. Group-31 batteries may
accept rates up to 5 amps over several hours
with minimal temperature rise.
D10-10
D10002
Go To Alternator
D10002
D10-11
F-
B-
METRI-PACK Connector
Hold a steel wrench or screwdriver near alternator
drive pulley; wrench or screwdriver held near drive
pulley will be attracted to pulley by magnetism.
is
D10-12
D10002
ALTERNATOR OVERHAUL
ALTERNATOR DIMENSIONS
1. Mounting Bolt - 1/2 UNC
2. Mounting Bolt - 12/50 Dia; 65 ft.lbs. (88 N.m) torque
3. Ground Bolt, 3/8 - 16; 11 ft.lbs. (15 N.m) torque
Either Side; R.H. side shown
4. Locknut (5/16 - 18 UNF-2B) & Washer (to secure Pulley)
FASTENER DESCRIPTION
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
SAE
METRIC
Pulley Nut
163 Nm
Heat Sink, Cover Plate, Control Box Hold Down & Relay Terminal Screw
20 in. lbs.
2 Nm
20 in. lbs.
2 Nm
Ground Bolt
11 ft. lbs.
15 Nm
18 in. lbs.
2 Nm
18 ft. lbs.
24 Nm
45 ft. lbs.
61 Nm
11 ft. lbs.
15 Nm
Output Nut
20 - 22 ft. lbs.
27 - 30 Nm
60 - 70 in. lbs.
7 - 8 Nm
32 in. lbs.
45 in. lbs.
4 Nm
5 Nm
Fan Nut
50 ft. lbs.
68 Nm
9 in. lbs.
1 Nm
D10002
D10-13
ALTERNATOR SPECIFICATIONS
VOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24VDC
AMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NEGATIVE
REGULATOR STEPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
REGULATOR SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.6 / 28.6
WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 lbs. / 29.3 kg
1. Measurements listed on the curves are for a
stabilized machine at maximum output at temperatures indicated for each curve.
2. A link between "E" and "R" terminal must be
used in order to provide self energizing. If residual magnetism is lost, self energizing will not
occur until magnetism is reestablished. This is
done by disconnecting the link and applying
24V momentarily to the E terminal while the
alternator is operating. After disconnecting the
+24V signal from "E" terminal, connect the link
between the "R" and "E" terminal.
D10-14
D10002
SERVICE PARTS
Ref
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9.a
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20.a
20.b
20.c
21
22
23
24
25
25.a
25.b
25.c
25.d
25.e
25.f
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Part No.
Qty.
Description
BF3715
BF1997
EF3527
BF1966
BF1989
BF1968
BF1988
BF1990
BF1970
BF3712
BF2002
BF1969
BF1972
BF1971
BF3716
BF1995
BF1996
BF3717
BF3718
BF3720
BF1973
BF1974
BF1975
BF3713
BF1992
BF1991
BF3719
BF3721
BF1976
BF1977
BF1980
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
1
1
18
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
12
9
1
1
9
1
1
1
1
18
9
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
LOCKNUT (1)
FLAT WASHER (1)
PULLEY
BUSHING, PULLEY
RING, RETAINER (1)
BEARING, FRONT
RING, RETAINER (1)
SCREW, PAN HEAD - #8 - 32NC X 3/8" (1)
PLATE, COVER
HOUSING, FRONT
NUT - (SPECIAL)
COVER, CONTROL UNIT
TERMINAL, OUTPUT
CONTROL UNIT
BOLT (+) - 5/16" - 18NC X 3/4"
LOCKWASHER - 5/16" (1)
FLAT WASHER (1)
LOCKWASHER (1)
CAPSCREW - 1/2" - 13NC X 1" (1)
KEY WOODRUFF (1)
SHAFT/CORE/ROTOR ASSEMBLY
ROTOR ASSEMBLY
SHAFT/CORE ASSEMBLY
RING, RETAINING
LOCKWASHER (1)
CAPSCREW - 3/8" - 16NC X 5/8" (1)
CAPSCREW - #10 - 32NF X 1/2" (1)
NUT - #8 - 32NC (1)
SHELL/STATOR/FIELD ASSEMBLY
STATOR, FRONT
STUD
SHELL (2)
BUSHING, TENSION
COIL
STATOR, REAR
SCREW, PAN HEAD - #6 - 32NF X 3/8" (1)
NUT - #8 (1)
HOUSING, END
BEARING, REAR
SCREW, LOCK - #10 - 32NC X 5/8" (1)
REGULATOR
O-RING
FAN
FLAT WASHER (HARDENED) (1)
LOCKNUT - 1/4" - 20NF (1)
GUARD, FAN
SCREW, SOCKET HEAD - #10 - 32NF X 7/8" (1)
BF1981
BF1978
BF1979
BF3722
BF3723
BF1982
BF1983
BF3724
BF1962
BF3714
BF1985
BF2003
BF2004
BF1961
BF3725
NOTE: (1) NOT SERVICED SEPARATELY - SUPPLIED ONLY IN BF1986 KIT.NOTE: (2) NOT SOLD
SEPARATELY
D10002
D10-15
ALTERNATOR PARTS
Refer to previous page for Parts List.
D10-16
D10002
ON-VEHICLE TEST
Equipment:
Preliminary Checks:
1. Check Belt Tension. Use Belt Tension Gauge to
measure belt tension: Poly V Belt Adjustment
(20 lbs./strand): 240 lbs. maximum for 12
groove Poly V-belt.
2. Check Battery.Batteries must be in good condition and fully charged. If any battery condition is
marginal, it should be replaced with one known
to be in good condition.
For split battery pack, dual voltage systems,
battery rest voltages should agree within 0.3 V.
When "12V" battery voltage is more than 0.3 V
lower than "24V" battery voltage, check the
"12V" battery circuit to verify adequate charge.
Polarity of battery and alternator must agree;
reverse polarity will damage the alternator. The
alternator is NEGATIVE ground.
3. Check electrical connections in charging circuit.
Make sure all connections are clean, tight, and
free of corrosion. Battery connections are especially important.
4. Check Energize circuit.If alternator is not charging, check for voltage at the alternator energize
terminal. Refer to Figure 10-5 for energize terminal location on the outside of the control box.
Check for battery voltage at the "E" terminal
with engine running.
FIGURE 10-5.
1. Alternator
2. Voltmeter
3. Ammeter
4. Battery
Test Set-up
D10002
D10-17
VOLTS
DIAGNOSIS
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
3. High
EXTREME COLD
INTERMITTENT SERVICE
MAINTENANCE - FREE BATTERIES
FACTORY
SETTING
NORMAL
RANGE
27.5
27.2 - 27.8
28.0
27.7 - 28.3
24
ON-VEHICLE TEST
Bypass Test:
Disconnect plug between alternator and regulator
and momentarily touch "F-" terminal from alternator
plug to ground.
FIGURE 10-7.
1. F+ Stud (some units have F+ Stud & Phase taps)
D10-18
D10002
BENCH TEST
Equipment:
VOLTS
DIAGNOSIS
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
VOLTS
DIAGNOSIS
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
DISCONNECT
DIAGNOSIS
Amps Rise
Amps Fall
Alternator is OK.
See note, replace
regulator only if low
AMPS/low VOLTS
indicated in Test 1
and/or Test 2.
No Change
No Change
Alternator must be
repaired. Go to
Static Tests.
D10002
D10-19
STATIC TESTS
Static tests are performed on the partially disassembled alternator to confirm component failure
indicated by on-vehicle test or bench tests.
Set ohmmeter to x100 scale and make sure ohmmeter is zeroed. Using the regulator connector plug,
connect one ohmmeter lead to terminal "F-", connect
the other lead to terminal "B-" and observe ohmmeter
reading. Reverse leads and observe meter reading.
In one direction the ohmmeter should read less than
600 ohms. In the other direction the ohmmeter
should read very high. If the ohmmeter reads less
than 600 ohms in both directions (short) or very high
in both directions (open) clamping diode is defective
and regulator must be replaced.
Equipment:
Remove control box cover and drive pulley. Disconnect regulator from control unit. Remove cover plate.
Disconnect all phase leads attached to the front
housing ("P1" through "P6" in Figure 10-10).
Regulator Tests
Wire 2 to "Ground"
D10-20
FIGURE 10-8.
1. Ignition (E)
(Harness Lead #4)
2. Relay (R)
3. Terminal Block
4 F- (Harness Lead #1)
D10002
Metri-Pack Connecter
SAE Connecter
FIGURE 10-9.
Table 10-8:
CONTROL BOX CONTINUITY CHECKS
OHMETER
SCALE
TERMINAL
STRIP
CONNECTION
CONTROL
BOX
EXTERNAL
CONNECTION
(Figure 10-5)
READING
x 10K
F-
GND* (B-)
VERY
HIGH
x1
F-
(F-) PIN
ZERO
x1
F+
(F+)
TERMINAL
ZERO
D10002
FIGURE 10-10.
1. Positive Diode Studs
2. S Phase Terminal
D10-21
Stator Tests
NOTE: The front stator related Phase leads are "P1",
"P2", & "P3"; The rear stator phase leads are "P4",
"P5", & "P6"
The Alternator has two separate assemblies that will
be checked individually. Make sure all phase leads
are disconnected from the heat sink (Refer to Figure
10-6).
D10-22
D10002
ALTERNATOR DISASSEMBLY
Regulator Removal
FIGURE 10-12.
FIGURE 10-11.
Pulley Removal
1. Use a 15/16" socket wrench on the pulley nut.
Clamp the pulley in a vise, jaws padded with
brass or aluminum, and loosed pulley nut (Figure 10-13).
2. Remove pulley nut and hardened washer.
3. With a gear puller remove the pulley from the
shaft.
4. Remove woodruff key from shaft.
5. Remove pulley bushing from shaft.
FIGURE 10-13.
D10002
D10-23
FIGURE 10-16.
1. Machine Screws
FIGURE 10-14.
Alternate Method
Rear Rotor Removal
1. Remove six flanged locknuts from core studs or
six self tapping screws (1, Figure 10-15). Scribe
location of stud or screw holes on rotor face
plate.
D10-24
D10002
FIGURE 10-17.
1. Cover
2. Field Leads
(white wires)
D10002
D10-25
Control Unit
(These instructions may be used with control unit
assemblies having SAE or Metri-Pak connector.)
Refer to Figures 10-18 and -19 for the following
steps:
1. Remove the top cover of the control unit
assembly (Five screws).
11. Inspect leads from field coil and rectifier assembly for chaffing, and repair as necessary.
10. Clean old RTV from the top and the face of control unit area of the housing.
D10-26
D10002
FIGURE 10-21.
1. Jack Screws
FIGURE 10-20.
1. Flanged Locknuts or Screws
2a.Use three 10-32 UNF x 2" long machine
screws as Jacks in the three threaded
holes of rotor end plate (Figure 10-21). Pull
rotor off core gradually by working screws
against core in sequence.
Alternate Method
2b.Using an air hammer (air chisel) with a blunt
tipped tool, vibrate the area around the
rotor element to rotor core attaching studs.
The vibrations should loosen the built up
rust in that area. Remove the rotor element. If resistance is still felt, use the
method described in "2a." above, plus the
air hammer.
Field Coil Removal
Do not attempt to repair field coil. Replace the whole
assembly.
1. Mark the position of field coil leads (white wires
with spade terminals) on stator. New fields will
be positioned in same opening in stator assembly, as the old field leads.
D10002
FIGURE 10-22.
1. Bobbin Removal Tool
(BF4820)
D10-27
ASSEMBLY- ALTERNATOR
Field Coil Assembly
1. Lay stator and shell assembly on its side,
phase leads to the left (Figure 10-24).
2. Insert field coil from right hand side of stator
and shell assembly, field leads (white wires with
spade terminals) facing toward phase leads.
FIGURE 10-24.
1. Field Leads
FIGURE 10-23.
D10-28
2. Remove or insert
field coil from this
end.
D10002
4. Seat field coil bobbin ears over stator tabs (Figure 10-25) by inserting field winding and rotating about 20 degrees after insertion with tool
BF4820. Align screw holes in bobbin ears with
screw holes in stator tabs.
Note: Bobbin ears go over stator tabs as viewed from
both ends of tube assembly.
5. Make sure field coil leads (white spade terminals) are pulled through proper stator openings
with no slack at the field coil and that neither
wire is pinched by the bobbin ears.
6. Using eighteen screws coated with loctite, fasten field coil bobbin ears to stator tabs (Figure
10-26). Tighten screws to 8-10 lb-in. (0.9- 1.1
Nm) torque.
Note: If field coil leads cannot be threaded through
stator openings with the terminal attached, unsolder
terminals, remove sleeving and then insert leads.
After field coil is in place slip sleeving on field leads,
solder terminals to wires and slip sleeving back over
terminal.
FIGURE 10-27.
1. Retaining Ring
(Tapered)
2. Front Housing
3. Retaining Ring
(Flat, both sides)
4. Bearing - Outer Race
FIGURE 10-26.
D10002
D10-29
FIGURE 10-28.
1. Tool (BF4818)
Front Rotor Assembly
FIGURE 10-29.
1. Shaft
2. Stud
3. SLot
D10-30
FIGURE 10-30.
1. Arbor Press
2. Tool (BF4810)
D10002
FIGURE 10-32.
1. Field Leads
2. Phase Leads
FIGURE 10-31.
1. Mounting Foot
2. Phase Leads
D10002
3. Field Leads
4. Drain Holes
D10-31
1. Field Leads
FIGURE 10-33.
2. Phase Leads
FIGURE 10-34.
1. Ignition (E) (Harness Lead #4)
2. Relay (R)
3. Terminal Block
4. F- (Harness Lead #1)
5. F+ (Harness Lead #3); 10 in. lbs. (1.3 Nm)
torque
6. Terminal Block Screw; 30 in. lbs. (3.5 Nm)
torque
7. Ground Wire from Regulator
(Harness Lead #2)
8. 24 in. lbs. (2.7 Nm) torque
9. B+ Buss Leads to Rectifier
10.When replacing output stud only; tighten to
12-15 ft.lbs. (16-20 N.m) torque, coat with
epoxy.
10. Solder here.
10. Apply RTV here.
10. Tighten to 180 in.lbs. (20 N.m) torque.
D10-32
FIGURE 10-34.
1.Cover Screws (TOP)
D10002
7. Position the insulating sleeving over wire terminals prior to attaching ring terminals to "E" & "R"
(or phase terminals) studs.
NOTE: Assembly sequence for "E" & "R" terminal (or
phase terminals) is: insulator-flatwasher-terminal-nut.
8. Position the control unit-face plate and attach
the regulator harness lead "4" to "E" terminal on
the face plate.
9. Attach the alternator phase lead to "R" terminal
(or phase terminals) on the face plate.
10. Use RTV #732 on the face of the housing. Use
Loctite in mounting screw holes for the face
plate.
11. Install the face plate onto the housing while sliding slot in the face plate onto grommet on regulator harness. Attach the face plate to the
housing with 4 screws.
12. Attach "B+" buss leads from rectifier to the back
of "B+" terminal.
13. Position "B+" buss leads from rectifier so that
the leads will not contact inside ends of "E" or
"R" terminals (or phase terminals).
14. Attach leads from the field coil to the terminal
block at "F" and "B+" positions.
15. Use RTV #732 to reseal the housing where the
field coil leads enter the housing.
16. Use RTV #3140 on inner ends of "R" (or phase
terminals) and "E" terminals, on the terminal
block, and all exposed wires on inner end of
"B+" stud to prevent corrosion.
17. Apply RTV #732 on the top of the housing.
18. Use five screws (coat with Loctite) to attach
control box cover to control box. Tighten screws
to 20 in. lbs. (2.2 Nm) torque.
D10002
FIGURE 10-35.
1. Studs or Screws
NOTE: Align stud or screw holes of core with scribe
marks on rotor, or center studs or screw holes of core
in the center of slots in rotor plate as shown in Figure
10-36.
2. Use six flanged locknuts or self tapping screws
to fasten rotor assembly to shaft and core
assembly (Apply Loctite to studs before installing locknuts). Torque flanged locknuts to 45 in.
lbs. (5.0 Nm), screws to 65 in. lbs. (7.3 Nm).
End Housing Assembly
1. Stand alternator on front end.Observe extra
care when installing housing if rotor shaft is
equipped with dust cap and ring seal carrier, as
ring seal must compress to enter into housing
bore.
NOTE: If shaft has ring seal, rear housing must have
chamfer on bearing bore. Studs from stator, field coil
and shell assembly will come through holes in end
housing.
2. Ring Seal Conversion The fan and shaft/core
assemblies have been modified to accommodate a new bearing ring seal design (Figure 1037). These changes affect alternators manufactured after January 1996. The changes affect
the shaft and fan hub diameters on full units and
service parts. When new service parts are used
to repair units manufactured before January
1996, the ring seals and lip seals must be
removed.
D10-33
Shaft/Core Replacement
Remove old shaft/core assembly. Remove the
shaft/core assembly from alternator (as directed
in this publication). Remove the front seal from
the old end housing.
Install New Shaft/Core Assembly
(Figure 10-39)
Remove the ring seal from the new shaft/core
assembly, if present.Install the shaft/core
assembly into the alternator (as directed in this
manual).
FIGURE 10-36.
1. Ring Seal Groove
2. Ring Seal
3. Bearing
4. O-Ring
5. Ring Seal
6. Ring Seal Groove
7. Fan Mounting
Hardware
8. Fan Guard Screws
To use new service parts on product manufactured before the modification date, follow these
instructions:
Fan Replacement (Fan with Ring Seal)
Remove the fan and rear bearing seal. Remove
the old fan assembly from the alternator.
Note: On older units a puller may be required to
remove the old fan from shaft. Using a pry bar or
large screwdriver, remove the rear bearing seal from
end housing. Do not remove bearing.
Installation Of New Fan On Old Assembly
(Figure 10-38).
FIGURE 10-38.
1. Ring Seal Groove
2. Bearing
3. Bearing Seal
4. Fan Mounting
Hardware
5. Fan Guard Screws
FIGURE 10-37.
1. Bearing Seal
2. Bearing
3. Ring Seal Groove
D10-34
D10002
Regulator Assembly
FIGURE 10-41.
FIGURE 10-40.
1. Ball Bearing
2. Shaft
3. Support
4. Bushing
5. Front Housing
6. End Housing
7. BF4821 Insertion
Tool
D10002
D10-35
Pulley Assembly
Fan Assembly
1. Place fan assembly on shaft (Figure 10-43).
Note: If fan hub has ring seals and carrier as ring
seal must compress ring enters housing.
FIGURE 10-42.
When repairing units manufactured before June
1994, the ring seal and contact seal must be
removed before installing the fan (Refer to Figure 10-38).
2. Use hardened washer and locknut to fasten fan
to alternator. Place alternator and pulley into
vise. With a 3/4" socket, tighten fan nut (Figure
10-43). Torque fan nut to 50 in. lbs. (68 N.m).
Note: Brass or aluminum jaw protectors must be
inserted into vise jaws to prevent damage to pulley.
D10-36
FIGURE 10-43.
D10002
D10002
D10-37
16. If the tool assembly attempts to rotate after significant resistance is felt, insert torque arm into
the large diameter holes in top thrust plate and
use torque arm to prevent tool assembly from
rotating. Continue threading jack screw in until
stator is removed from shell, observe caution
below.
CAUTION: The movement of the stator should be
checked often during stator removal process.
Use the exposed portion of the guide pin as an
indicator of stator movement. Tension on the
removal tool will abruptly cease when the stator
is free of the shell. The service technician may be
startled by this abrupt looseness, exposing the
technician to potential injury. Keep the stator service tool vertical. Do not use the tool laying on its
side.
Stator Installation
(Refer to Figure 10-45)
Shell Assembly Preparation
The bore that is to receive the new stator should be
clean and free from burrs.
1. Position the bottom thrust plate in the work
area.
2. Place the pressure plate, threaded hub facing
down, on the bottom thrust plate. Align the
smooth bored hole in the pressure plate with
the keyed hole in the bottom thrust plate. Insert
the correct length locating rod through the pressure plate and into the bottom thrust plate.
NOTE: The correct length locating rod is a rod that
has a hole that will allow the locating pin to pass
through both the locating rod and shell drain hole.
3. Place new stator on the stator indexing pins on
the bottom thrust plate.
NOTE: Proper placement of the stator is achieved
when the single stator lead aligns with a stator slot
next to the other stator's single lead. The finished
shell assembly will have a slot arrangement of two
leads-space, two leads-space, two leads-space.
The front stator is placed on the stator indexing
pins with the leads pointing down.
FIGURE 10-44.
1. Bottom Thrust Plate
2. Stator Index Pins
3. Guide Pins
4. Jack Screw
D10-38
D10002
FIGURE 10-45.
1. Top Thrust Plate
2. Support Ring
3. Stator & Shell
Assembly
4. Support Ring
12. After the stator has been properly seated, disassemble the tool. Pull the stator leads through
the correct slots. Continue with the alternator
assembly as per instructions in this manual.
D10002
D10-39
NOTES
D10-40
D10002
SECTION E
ELECTRICAL PROPULSION SYSTEM
INDEX
NOTE: Propulsion system electrical schematics are located in Section R of this manual.
E01012
Index
E1-1
DANGEROUS VOLTAGE LEVELS ARE PRESENT WHEN THE TRUCK IS RUNNING AND CONTINUE
TO EXIST AFTER SHUTDOWN IF THE REQUIRED SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES ARE NOT FOLLOWED.
Before attempting repairs or working near propulsion system components, the following precautions and truck shutdown procedure must be followed:
DO NOT step on or use any power cable as a handhold when the engine is running.
NEVER open any electrical cabinet covers or touch the Retarding Grid elements. Additional
procedures are required before it is safe to do so. Refer to Truck Shutdown Procedures,
this Section, for additional propulsion system safety checks to be performed by a technician
trained to service the system.
ALL removal, repairs and installation of propulsion system electrical components, cables etc.
must be performed by an electrical maintenance technician properly trained to service the
system.
THE LINK VOLTAGE LIGHTS MUST NOT BE ILLUMINATED WHEN TEST OR REPAIRS ARE INITIATED. It requires approximately 5 minutes after the truck is shut down before the Link Voltage has dissipated.
BEFORE WELDING ON THE TRUCK; Disconnect all electrical harnesses and the ground wire
from the Engine Control System (ECS - MTU engine). If equipped with DDEC or Komatsu
engine, disconnect ECM harnesses. In the PSC and TCI enclosures, pull cards forward far
enough to disconnect the card connector from the backplane connector. Disconnect the battery charging alternator lead wire and open the battery disconnect switches. The welding
ground electrode should be attached as close as possible to the area to be welded. NEVER
weld on the rear of the Electrical Control Cabinet or the retard grid exhaust air louvers. Avoid
laying welding cables across or near truck wiring harnesses or power cables; voltages can be
induced in adjacent cables, damaging electrical components.
E1-2
Index
E01012
SECTION E2
ELECTRICAL PROPULSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
INDEX
E02014 01/02
E2-1
E2-2
01/02
E02014
E02014 01/02
E2-3
E2-4
01/02
E02014
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Auxiliary Blower System
The Auxiliary Blower System, mounted behind the
main electrical cabinet, consists of the blower assembly and control electronics; power inverter/phase
control rectifier, power filter capacitor bank, and
power filter inductor.
The control electronics provide a 3-phase, AC, variable voltage/variable frequency output to the blower
motor. Output frequency (blower motor speed) is
controlled by the PSC.
Event detection
E02014 01/02
E2-5
The 17FL349/17FL373 TCI Panels contain the following internal, removable printed circuit boards:
E2-6
01/02
E02014
The panel has two display lines, each line 40 characters long. The top line is the "message" line and is
used by the TCI to inform service personnel of the
truck systems and components status.
The bottom display line provides information in addition to the top line or relates to the keypad, displaying
possible selection options and display functions. The
keypad, located below the display lines is used by
service personnel to direct the activity of the TCI.
The display provides service and status information
on the various truck systems and the propulsion system by displaying system status information or fault
codes as well as a description of the system status or
a problem on the top display line. Information on the
second display line may change to indicate what
functions are available by pressing the [F1] through
[F5] keys.
In addition, the DID panel can be used by to perform
the self-load test.
TABLE I
RESTRICTION
DEFINITION
No Power
No Propel
Speed Limit
No retarding allowed
No propulsion allowed
No power on the link
INV1 Disable
INV2 Disable
Engspd/RP
None
E02014 01/02
E2-7
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
000
NO FAULT
002
GROUND FAULT
No power
003
FAILED DIODE
No power
004
005
006
E2-8
None
DETECTION
INFORMATION
None
:01
:02
auxiliary inverter
:03
afse
:04
alternator
:05
left stator
:06
left rotor
No Propel
:07
right stator
:08
right rotor
:09
chopper GTO
:10
chopper diode
:11
:12
left diode
:13
:14
right diode
:15
rectifier diode
No power
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
DC LINK OVERVOLTAGE
:01
not in retard
:02
in retard
:03
instantaneous
009
No power
normal
:02
instantaneous
:01
:02
011
:02
013
014
012
No power
:01
:02
link amps
:03
:04
:05
:10
:11
:12
:13
A2D ground
:14
A2D gain
:15
fault current
:16
ATOC
:21
blower 1 amps
:22
blower 2 amps
015
Speed limit
link amps
E02014 01/02
Speed limit
E2-9
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
task_1
:02
task_2
:03
task_3
:04
task_4
:05
task_5
:06
task_6
:07
maintenance task
DETECTION
INFORMATION
Problem has occurred in the system CPU card.
No power
:09
BRAM CRC
:10
flash CRC
:11
excess timeouts
:12
invalid pointers
017
018
:02
No power
No power
Card missing.
Read timeout.
019
020
No propel
021
No propel
022
No power
023
TERTIARY OVERCURRENT
No propel
024
:01
no file
:02
bad CRC
:03
wrong version
:04
overspeeds incorrect
:01
:02
numerous shutdowns
025
E2-10
None
No power
No power
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
CAPACITOR OVERPRESSURE
No power
INV1
No power
INV1 capacitor
INV2
No power
INV2 capacitor
027
No power
030
GF CONTACTOR
031
:02
AFSE panels
:03
SCR3 shorted
032
Speed limit
Speed limit
RP CONTACTOR
:01
RP1
:02
RP2
:03
RETARD CIRCUIT
035
ESS INPUT
036
:01
RP3
033
blower 1 stall
:02
blower 2 stall
:03
blower 1 open
:04
blower 2 open
:05
:01
VOLTS 5 POS
037
No power
:02
VOLTS 15 POS
:03
VOLTS 15 NEG
040
VOLTS 24 POS
041
VOLTS 24 NEG
042
No propel
043
Speed limit
044
None
045
Speed limit
chopper 1
:02
chopper 2
046
047
ENGINE STALL
E02014 01/02
E2-11
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
048
SHORTED DC LINK
051
EVENT
RESTRICTION
No power
DETECTION
INFORMATION
DC link short detected at startup.
Input from M1 sensor out of tolerance.
:01
:02
:01
:02
052
053
INV1 disable
INV2 disable
:01
:02
:01
:02
054
None
None
High output from sensor with all other wheel speeds zero
055
None
056
INVERTER SW VERSION
None
061
MOTOR OVERSPEED
None
063
None
:01
below minimum
None
:02
above maximum
None
065
:01
:02
:03
:04
alternator temp
:05
:06
:07
:08
E2-12
Speed limit
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
:09
:10
:11
:12
:13
:14
:15
070
None
071
Speed Limit
072
Speed Limit
073
link amps
None
074
INV1 Disable
075
INV2 Disable
076
FB173 CARD
:01
speed FPGA DL
:02
:03
ALT FPGA DL
:04
Ucontroller
:05
slow task
:06
med task
:07
fast task
:08
FD task
:09
:10
No power
077
084
None
085
AUX COOLING
None
:02
None
:03
None
:04
abnormal shutdown
None
087
HP LOW
E02014 01/02
No power
E2-13
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
088
HP LIMIT
None
089
None
None
091
INVERTER 1 CUTOUT
None
092
INVERTER 2 CUTOUT
None
094
None
:02
095
None
096
None
098
DATA STORE
None
099
SOFTWARE EVENT
None
Software error
E2-14
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
:29
no extvi TIC
:30
no vector TIC
:31
no I TIC TIC
:32
NMI occurred
:34
no background TIC
:35
:38
:39
PGA DP failed
:40
:41
multiple par
:48
no cam TIC
:49
101/201
:01
:02
:03
:04
:05
:06
:07
:08
:09
:10
:11
:12
:13
no chopper TIC1
:14
no chopper TIC2
:16
E02014 01/02
E2-15
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
:05
gnd not ok
:08
no IO card
:09
:10
DB no brake
:11
ptf A signal
:12
ptf B signal
:13
ptf C signal
:14
IC zero not ok
:15
IC not ok
:16
ptl not ok
:17
103/203
:01
:02
:03
:04
:05
:06
:07
:08
:09
None
:10
:11
:12
:13
IA VCO hi
:14
IB VCO hi
:15
link V VCO hi
:16
infilV VCO hi
:17
IA too high
:18
IA too low
:19
IB too high
:20
IB too low
E2-16
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
103/203 (cont.)
:21
link V too hi
:22
infilV too hi
:23
DB chop VCO hi
:24
DB chopV too hi
:25
VA VCO hi
:26
VB VCO hi
:27
VC VCO hi
:28
VA volts too hi
:29
VB volts too hi
:30
:31
VC volts too hi
104/204
:01
:02
fo card disable
:03
fo card enable
105/205
None
:01
P5V not ok
:02
P15V not ok
:03
N15V not ok
:06
P24V not ok
:07
N24V not ok
106/206
:01
:02
107/207
DC WIRING
DC pwr conn open
GDPS FAILURE
:01
gate dr ps off
:02
gate dr ps off S
:03
109/209
:01
111/211
:01
E02014 01/02
E2-17
E2-18
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
INVERTER, GENERAL
:01
Aup cur hi
:02
Adn cur hi
:03
Bup cur hi
:04
Bdn cur hi
:05
Cup cur hi
:06
Cdn cur hi
:07
Aup cur lo
:08
Adn cur lo
:09
Bup cur lo
:10
Bdn cur lo
:11
Cup cur lo
:12
Cdn cur lo
:13
A zero cur hi
:15
B zero cur hi
:17
A volt hi Adn
:18
A volt lo Aup
:19
A volt hi Bdn
:20
A volt lo Bup
:21
A volt hi Cdn
:22
A volt lo Cup
:23
B volt hi Adn
:24
B volt lo Aup
:25
B volt hi Bdn
:26
B volt lo Bup
:27
B volt hi Cdn
:28
B volt lo Cup
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
113/213 (cont.)
:29
C volt hi Adn
:30
C volt lo Aup
:31
C volt hi Bdn
:32
C volt lo Bup
:33
C volt hi Cdn
:34
C volt lo Cup
:35
:36
:37
:38
:39
:40
:48
A volt hi off
:49
A volt lo off
:50
B volt hi off
:51
B volt lo off
:52
C volt hi off
:53
C volt lo off
:54
:55
:60
:70
:71
E02014 01/02
E2-19
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
113/213 (cont.)
:72
:73
Aph neg I hi
:74
Bph neg I hi
:75
Cph neg I hi
:76
:77
:78
:79
Aph pos I hi
:80
Bph pos I hi
:81
Cph pos I hi
:82
no current w run
114/214
E2-20
:22
IA VCO lo
:24
IB VCO lo
:26
linkV VCO lo
:28
infilV VCO lo
:38
LinkV too lo
:40
infilV too lo
:46
DB chop VCO lo
:48
DB chopV too lo
:50
VA VCO lo
:52
VB VCO lo
:54
VC VCO lo
:56
VA volts too lo
:58
VB volts too lo
:61
VC volts too lo
None
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
INVERTER SYSTEM
:01
no direction
:02
:03
:04
:05
:06
no hi spd data
:07
V line not ok
:08
I line not ok
:09
:10
DB GTO jn hot
:11
:12
VI test incomplete
VI test incomplete
116/216
:01
alarm A
:02
PTF A
:03
IGBT_SAT_AP
IGBT saturated.
:04
IGBT_SAT_AN
IGBT saturated.
117/217
Overcurrent in phase A
INVERTER, PHASE A+
:01
alarm AP
:02
:03
:04
hold AP
:05
Aup fb not on
:06
:07
IGBT_PS_AP
118/218
:02
:03
:04
:05
:06
E02014 01/02
E2-21
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
INVERTER, PHASE A-
:01
alarm AN
:02
:03
:04
hold AN
:05
Adn fb not on
:06
:07
IGBT_PS_AN
120/220
:02
:03
:04
:05
:06
121/221
None
:01
I sensor ph A
:02
IA zero not ok
:03
IA not ok
:04
I snsr ph A open
:05
I snsr ph A short
123/223
:01
V sensor phase A
:02
VA not ok
125/225
:01
alarm B
:02
PTF B
:03
IGBT_SAT_BP
IGBT saturated
:04
IGBT_SAT_BP
IGBT saturated
126/226
INVERTER, PHASE B+
:01
alarm BP
:02
:03
:04
hold BP
:05
Bup fb not on
:06
E2-22
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
INVERTER, PHASE B+
Bup temp short
:03
:04
:05
:06
128/228
:01
None
:02
:03
:04
hold BN
:05
Bdn fb not on
:06
:07
IGBT_PS_BN
129/229
:02
:03
:04
:05
:06
130/230
None
:01
I sensor ph B
:02
IB zero not ok
:03
IB not ok
:04
I snsr ph B open
:05
I sensr ph B short
132/232
:01
V sensor phase B
:02
VB not ok
134/234
:01
alarm C
:02
PTF C
:04
IGBT_SAT_CP
IGBT saturated
:05
IGBT_SAT_CN
IGBT saturated
E02014 01/02
Overcurrent on phase C
E2-23
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
:02
:03
:04
hold CP
:05
Cup fb not on
:06
:07
IGBT_PS_CP
136/236
:02
INVERTER, PHASE C+
Cup temp short
:03
:04
:05
:06
137/237
:01
None
:02
:03
:04
hold CN
:05
Cdn fb not on
:06
:07
IGBT_PS_CN
138/238
:02
:03
:04
:05
:06
141/241
:01
V sensor phase C
:02
VC not ok
E2-24
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
tach1 rate hi
tach1 no input
:03
TACH_INTERMIT
:01
145/245
:01
:02
146/246
:01
148/248
DETECTION
INFORMATION
:02
144/244
EVENT
RESTRICTION
None
INVERTER, TACH 2
None
None
:01
:02
chop1 fb not on
:03
:04
:05
:06
:07
150/250
None
:01
:02
chop2 fb not on
:03
:04
:05
:06
:07
151/251
:01
153/253
MISCELLANEOUS
tach differential
INVERTER, MOTOR
:01
motor open
:02
motor short
154/254
None
:01
rotor temp hi
:02
stator temp hi
E02014 01/02
None
E2-25
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
INVERTER, SECOND LOAD
EVENT
RESTRICTION
None
175/275
None
176/276
E2-26
DETECTION
INFORMATION
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
:01
:02
:03
:04
:05
:06
:07
flash CRC
:09
:10
excess timeouts
:11
BBRAM bad
:12
BBRAM CRC
602
No propel
603
No propel
604
:01
605
PSC FAULT
missing message
:02
bad tick
:03
bad CRC
:04
FIFO overflow
:05
:06
None
607
POSITIVE 5 VOLTS
Speed limit
608
POSITIVE 15 VOLTS
Speed limit
609
NEGATIVE 15 VOLTS
Speed limit
610
POT REFERENCE
Speed limit
E02014 01/02
E2-27
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
FREQUENCY INPUT
DETECTION
INFORMATION
Front wheel speed input out of range
None
:01
:02
ANALOG INPUT
613
None
:01
A2D gnd
:02
A2D gainchk
:01
:02
:03
614
616
None
DIRECTION MISMATCH
617
No propel
:01
:02
None
619
No propel
620
No propel
622
:01
command/response failure
:02
623
:01
tank
:02
:03
:04
:05
E2-28
None
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
624
625
Speed Limit
None
626
None
628
DETECTION
INFORMATION
Full payload and body up signal received at same time.
Dump body raised while truck is moving.
One of the connected batteries' volts incorrect with engine
speed above low idle.
:01
:02
:03
:04
629
None
None
:01
low
:02
high
630
:01
no cooling air
:02
low
:03
high voltage
:04
sensor reversed
:02
high
631
Speed Limit
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
632
No propel
:01
no file
No propel
:02
bad CRC
No propel
:03
version incorrect
No propel
633
BBRAM CORRUPTED
634
635
E02014 01/02
None
Speed limit
None
E2-29
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
AUX INVERTER
None
None
:02
None
:03
overcurrent
None
:01
:04
battery loss
None
:05
None
:06
None
:07
None
:08
None
:09
None
:10
current overload
None
:11
None
:12
None
:13
None
:14
no input voltage
None
638
None
639
None
640
No Propel
641
None
642
None
696
None
698
DATA STORE
None
E2-30
01/02
E02014
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT
RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
638
None
639
None
640
No propel
641
None
642
None
696
None
698
DATA STORE
None
E02014 01/02
E2-31
Test State:
The purpose of this state is to provide an environment for the verification of system functionality. Test
state will support a variety of activities, including:
Input Processing
This function reads in all external inputs for use by
the PSC. The Input Processing function performs
any signal conditioning required and computes the
required derived inputs.
STATE MANAGEMENT
State Machine
As part of the total software package, a particular
group of regulatory software commands is included
called a "state machine". The state machine controls
the various functions of truck operation.
The software implements the state machine by keeping track of which state the truck is in, and which
state the truck is allowed to move into if the operator
requests a different mode of operation. Each software state is defined as follows:
Startup/Shutdown State:
The purpose of this state is to ensure the system is in
a desired known state upon startup or shutdown.
This is an unpowered state.
NOTE: Powered and unpowered refer to the state of
the DC link; 600 volts or more on the DC link equals
"powered". 50 volts or less on the DC link equals
"unpowered".
E2-32
01/02
E02014
Retard State:
This transition will occur automatically once initialization is complete (i.e., functions performed while in
Startup/Shutdown state for the purpose of startup
have been completed).
E02014 01/02
E2-33
E2-34
01/02
E02014
DC Link State
Control Functions
2. AFSE enabled,
Engine Control
E02014 01/02
E2-35
Self-load
During self-load, the alternator provides power to the
resistor grids. The rectifying diodes will be forward
biased, and DC link voltage will be controlled by the
alternator. The alternator field control will be based
on the following:
1. The DC link voltage will not be allowed to drop
below 600 volts.
2. One mode of self-load will require the alternator
output to be controlled to maintain a set desired
horsepower dissipation in the resistor grids.
3. Another mode of self-load will require the alternator output to be controlled to maintain a set
desired link voltage between 600 volts and
1500 volts.
E2-36
01/02
E02014
E02014 01/02
E2-37
EVENT PROCESSING
Event Detection
This software function is responsible for verifying the
integrity of the PSC hardware and the systems to
which the PSC interfaces by detecting an "event"
(abnormal condition).
The events fall into three detection categories:
Power On Tests
The Auxiliary Blower Control regulates the temperatures of the AFSE, auxiliary blower system, rectifier
diodes, phase modules, chopper modules, and traction motors by controlling the speed of the auxiliary
blower. Additionally, this software function checks for
faults in the auxiliary blower.
E2-38
01/02
E02014
2.) The associated gate drive power converter has been enabled.
3.) The engine is running.
4.) Battery voltage is at least 25 VDC.
5.) The inverter is requesting that the low
voltage and/or high voltage powerup tests
be performed.
6.) The inverter has not been physically cut
out of the system.
7.) Active event restrictions do not preclude
powering the DC link or running the
inverter.
b. Low Voltage Test - A given inverter will automatically perform its low voltage test if
needed once inverter powerup testing is
enabled per the above requirements. The
PSC will declare the test failed and log an
event if the test does not successfully complete within an expected time period.
c. High Voltage Test - If the low voltage testing
defined above is successful for a given
inverter, the inverter will automatically perform its high voltage test if needed once
there is sufficient power on the DC link. The
PSC will declare the test failed and log an
event if the test does not successfully complete within an expected time after the DC
link is sufficiently powered.
4. DC Link Capacitance Test - Test will run once
every 24 hours when conditions allow, normally
after a VI-test during normal powerup
sequence. This test can also be run from the
DID panel to aid in troubleshooting. During test
execution, engine speed is set to 1500 rpm and
the link is charged to 1200VDC. The engine is
then returned to idle while the link is allowed to
discharge to 100 volts.Total link capacitance is
then calculated using the time it took to discharge. If capacitance is getting low, but still
OK, event 70 logs. If capacitance is below the
minimum allowable level, event 71 logs and the
truck is restricted to 10 MPH. If test is not able
to complete after numerous attempts, event 72
logs, indicating a problem in the truck's ground
detection circuit, and truck speed is limited to 10
MPH.
Initiated Tests
These tests are performed when requested by maintenance personnel; the truck must be in test mode for
these tests to run:
1. Maintenance Tests - The purpose of these tests
is to facilitate verification of system installation
and wiring (particularly the "digital" interfaces relays, contactors, etc.).
2. Self-load Test - Self-load testing is a means by
which the truck diesel engine can be checked
for rated horsepower output.
Periodic Tests
These automatic tests are run continuously during
the operation of the truck to verify certain equipment.
EVENT RESTRICTIONS
The PSC software will not override an event restriction as long as Limp Home mode is not active. Transitions to restricted states will not be allowed. If the
system is in a state which becomes restricted, it will
transition down to the highest unrestricted state. The
order from lowest to highest state is Startup/Shutdown, Rest, Test, Ready, Retard, Propel. Transitions
to the Test state or lower states in reaction to event
restrictions will not be allowed until the truck is not
moving.
NOTE. Limp Home mode is a state which is entered
when the truck has suffered a failure and is not able
to continue normal operation but is still capable of
"limping" (getting either back to the maintenance
area or at least out of the way of other trucks).
Event Restrictions associated with a given event are
listed in Table I, page E2-5.
E02014 01/02
E2-39
1. Fault information is maintained until overwritten, it is not cleared out following a reset. This
allows the user to examine data associated
with events that have been reset, as long as
there have not been so many new events as to
necessitate reuse of the storage space.
2. If a given event is active (logged and not reset),
logging of duplicate events (duplicate is defined
as having the same event and sub-id numbers)
will not be allowed. If the event is reset and subsequently reoccurs, it may be logged again.
Likewise, if an event reoccurs with a different
sub-id from the original occurrence, the event
may be logged again.
Event History Buffer
Event history buffer is defined as a collection of event
history records.
A buffer contains 300 entries filled with event numbers occurring in chronological order. Also included
in this buffer will be all the input and output values,
time the event occurred, reset time, state information,
etc., for each event. This buffer is filled continuously
and overwritten (if necessary).
Limits (accept-limit) are placed on the amount of
space which a given event code may consume. This
prevents a frequently occurring event from using the
memory space at the expense of a less frequent
event. This data may be cleared (after downloading
for troubleshooting) at each maintenance interval.
Data Packs
A data pack is defined as an extended collection of
information relevant to a given event.
NOTE: The concepts of lockout, soft reset, and
accept limit do not apply to data packs.
Thirty (30) data packs are stored with each containing 100 frames of real time snapshot data. Snapshot
data is defined as a collection of key data parameter
values for a single point in time). The purpose of
each data pack is to show a little "movie" of what
happened before and after a fault.
The time interval between snapshots is default to 50
ms, but each data pack may be programmed via the
DID (or PTU) from 10 ms to 1 sec. (In multiples of 10
ms). The "TIME 0:00 frame #" at which the fault is
logged is default to frame #60, but each data pack is
programmable from 1 to 100.
E2-40
In the above default cases, data is stored for 3 seconds (2.95 second actual) before the fault and 2 seconds after the fault.
A data pack status structure is assigned to each data
pack plus any programmable settings. This status
structure is used by the TCI (or PTU) to check for
available data (event number, id, and status, should
be set to zero if data pack is not frozen), as well as
for control of the data packs.
If a data pack is unfrozen (not holding any particular
fault data), it is continually updated each 100 frames,
organized in a circular queue, with new real time
snapshot data. When a fault occurs, the frame number at which the event occurred is used as a reference to mark the end of the data pack, and data is
collected until the data pack is full. Only when the
data pack is full will the event number, id and status
be updated in the status structure.
All logic control variables are saved in battery backed
RAM, in case a fault occurs and battery power is
cycled before the data pack is filled with data (the
software allows for proper recovery and then continues to fill the data pack). Maintenance personnel, by
way of the DID (or PTU), can assign the data pack to
hold only certain event numbers (for the case where
it is desired to collect data on a particular fault).
However, in the default case, faults will be stored as
they come until all data packs are frozen (holding
fault data). When all data packs are frozen, the data
pack with the fault that was RESET first (either automatically or by the DID/PTU), if any, will be unfrozen
and will start storing new data in case a new fault
occurs.
To Record and Save a Data Pack to a Floppy Disk
PSC:
1. With the PTU serial cable attached to the PSC
port, type c:\ACNMENU and press {enter}.
2. Select "PTU TCI and PSC" and press {enter}
3. Type your name and press {enter}.
4. Type your password and press {enter}.
5. Cursor to "Special Operation" and press {enter}.
6. Cursor to "Event Data Menu" and press {enter}.
7. Cursor to "View Data Packs" and press {enter}.
8. Type FLTR number to be recorded and press
{enter}.
9. Watch the lower right of the screen as 100 frames
are recorded. Press the F2 key.
01/02
E02014
Event Reset
TCI:
1. With the PTU serial cable attached to the TCI
port, type c:\ACNMENU and press {enter}.
2. Select "PTU TCI and PSC" and press {enter}
3. Type your name and press {enter}.
4. Type your password and press {enter}.
5. Cursor to "Special Operation" and press {enter}.
6. Cursor to "Event Data Menu" and press {enter}.
7. Cursor to "View Data Packs" and press {enter}.
8. Type PK number to be recorded and press
{enter}.
9. Watch the lower right of the screen as 100
frames are recorded. Press the F2 key.
10. Cursor to "Record Screen" and press {enter}.
11. Assign a file name for the data pack.
12. Press {escape} until back to the DOS "C:>"
prompt.
13. Insert a blank disk in drive A.
14. Type the following command: copy c:\geohvac\ptuaccur\f2data\filename
Note: Insert the name assigned to the file in step 11
in place of "filename" in the command in step 14.
15. Press {enter} to copy the file to the disk.
E02014 01/02
E2-41
This software function performs the processing necessary for the System CPU Card to communicate
with both Inverter CPU Cards. The communications
is through a high-speed serial link that is operated in
a polled fashion with the System CPU Card initiating
communications to an Inverter CPU Card.
E2-42
01/02
E02014
OUTPUT PROCESSING
ABNORMAL CONDITIONS/OVERRIDING
FUNCTIONS
Software functions given up to this point assumed for
the most part that the truck is operating under more
or less normal circumstances. The following paragraphs define system operation under abnormal or
exceptional circumstances. In the event of conflict
between these functions and those given for normal
operation, the functions in this section will take precedence.
The PSC will enter limp home mode if all of the following conditions are true:
1. The truck is not moving.
2. The TCI is requesting limp home mode.
3. The PSC is in Ready or test state and there is
no initiated testing in progress.
4. At least one inverter is functional.
E02014 01/02
E2-43
FUNCTION
ALT
Alternator (5GTA34)
AUX BLOWER
MOTOR
AFVLT
36
COMPONENT
21
AXCAP
11
AXFU1, 2
33
AXIND
30
The Auxiliary Phase Control Rectifier converts the 3phase, AC input voltage from the Alternator to regulated
DC voltage and supplies the regulated voltage through a
filter to the Auxiliary Power Inverter. The Auxiliary Power
Inverter inverts the regulated, filtered, DC voltage into a
variable voltage, variable frequency, 3-phase output to
power the Auxiliary Blower Motor.
AXINV
29
ASYN
35
Alternator Synchronization
Transformer
A3PV
Attenuates high voltage from two phases of the Alternator to a level acceptable to the Analog I/O card in the
PSC.
E2-44
01/02
E02014
19
BATTSW
COMPONENT
FUNCTION
System Fuse
Connects and disconnects the 12 VDC and 24 VDC circuit batteries (located at right front corner of truck).
BDI
68
BFC
67
BLFP
10
BM1, 2
63
BM1I
65
BM2I
66
CCLR1, 2
20
Connected across the DC link to provide a voltage attenuated sample of the DC link voltage to the Capacitor
Charge Indicating lights.
CCL1, 2
61
Capacitor Charge Indicating Lights Illuminated when 50 volts or more is present on the DC
link (the DC bus connecting the Alternator output, Chop1 and 2
40
Stores the Inverter 1 DC bus voltage to provide instantaneous power when the PM1 GTO Phase Modules first
turn on.
41
Stores the Inverter 2 DC bus voltage to provide instantaneous power when the PM2 GTO Phase Modules first
turn on.
CLSW
59
CMAF
27
CMT
28
Alternator Tertiary Current Sensing Detects amount of current flowing through the Alternator
tertiary winding.
Module
CM1, 2
5, 6
Chopper GTO Phase Module 1 and Controls the DC voltage applied to the grids during
retarding.
2 (17FM630)
CM1A, 1B
45
CM2A, 2B
44
CPR
53
CPRD
CPRS
CPS
E02014 01/02
56
E2-45
COMPONENT
FUNCTION
Detects amount of current flow through the Alternator ter-
CT
34
CTR
Battery Boost Current Transformer tiary winding. Signal turns off the AFSE battery circuit
DC Bus
DID
Provides maintenance personnel with the ability to monitor the operational status of certain truck systems and
perform system diagnostic test.
DC link
38
DIT1A, 1B, 1C
43
DI/DT Transformers
DIT2A, 2B, 2C
42
DI/DT Transformers
FDP
24
FDT
23
FIBER OPTIC
ASSEMBLY
31
FP
39
GDFU1, 2
GDPC1
17
Converts 19 to 95 VDC from the Gate Drive Power Supply to 25 kHz, 100 VRMS, square wave power to drive
Inverter 1 GTO Phase and Chopper Modules.
GDPC2
16
Converts 19 to 95 VDC from the Gate Drive Power Supply to 25 kHz, 100 VRMS, square wave power to drive
Inverter 2 GTO Phase and Chopper Modules.
GDPS
18
GF
49
GFCO
62
GFIP
22
GFM
E2-46
01/02
E02014
COMPONENT
FUNCTION
GFR
52
GFRS
50
GRR
26
I1CO
57
I2CO
58
Key Switch
KEYSW
LDBXI
48
Load Box Current Sensing Module Monitors current during load box test.
LED's indicate status of the following:
CPR: Illuminated when CPR is energized.
SYS RUN: Illuminated when the PSC power-up
sequence has completed successfully and control logic
is executing.
NAFLT: When illuminated, indicates a fault has occurred
that prevents propulsion or retarding.
TEST: Illuminated when system is in the Test state.
REST: Illuminated when system is in Rest state and there
is essentially no voltage on the DC link.
LEDP
60
LINKI
LINKV
L1, 2, 3
Cabinet Lights
M1, 2
E02014 01/02
E2-47
COMPONENT
FUNCTION
PSC
32
13
12
15
14
RD
64
RP1, 2, 3
47
RP1S, 2S, 3S
55
Suppression Modules
RSN1, 2
Snubber Resistors
Provide a current path for the associated Chopper Module filter capacitors.
Snubber Resistors
When closed, connects Grid Resistors to the DC link during retarding, load box testing, and Inverter Filter discharge operations.
Note: Some trucks do not have RP3 installed.
R1
51
AUX SNUB
25
Snubber
SPS
37
PS
37a
SS1, 2
E2-48
01/02
E02014
COMPONENT
FUNCTION
TH1
54
VAM1
46
VAM2
46
E02014 01/02
E2-49
E2-50
01/02
E02014
E02014 01/02
E2-51
E2-52
01/02
E02014
E02014 01/02
E2-53
Removal
NOTE: Repair procedures for the retard and
accelerator pedal are identical. The retard pedal is
mounted on the brake pedal. Refer to Section "J" for
instructions for removing and installing the electronic
pedal on brake actuator.
Note routing and clamp location of wire harness.
Proper wire routing is critical to prevent damage
during operation after reinstallation.
1. Disconnect pedal wire harness from truck harness connector.
2. Remove mounting capscrews, lockwashers and
nuts and remove pedal assembly.
Installation
1. Install pedal assembly using hardware
removed in step 2, "Removal". Connect potentiometer to wiring harness.
2. Calibrate pedal potentiometer per instructions
in "AC Drive System Checkout Procedure - Setting Pedal Percentages".
Disassembly
1. Remove screws on cable clamps (1, Figure 29) and potentiometer cover (6).
Assembly
1. Position new potentiometer with the flat side
toward the potentiometer cover and install on
shaft as follows:
a. Align cutouts in shaft with the potentiometer
drive tangs.
b. Press potentiometer onto shaft until it bottoms against the housing.
2. Install screws (5) and lockwashers but do not
tighten.
3. Rotate potentiometer counterclockwise until
mounting slots contact the mounting screws
and tighten screws (5) to 15 in. lbs. (1.70 N.m)
torque.
4. Install grommet (3) and potentiometer cover.
Tighten screws to 15 in. lbs. (1.70 N.m) torque.
5. Install cable clamps and tighten screws to 40 in.
lbs. (4.21 N.m) torque.
6. Inspect assembly and verify proper wiring clearance during operation of pedal throughout the
range of travel.
E2-54
01/02
E02014
SECTION E3
AC DRIVE SYSTEM ELECTRICAL CHECKOUT PROCEDURE
INDEX
AC DRIVE SYSTEM ELECTRICAL CHECKOUT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-3
AC DRIVE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-3
TRUCK SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-3
NORMAL TRUCK SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-4
SHUTDOWN AFTER SYSTEM FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-5
SYSTEM CHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-6
Battery and Control Checks of System WITH Battery Power OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-6
Battery and Control Circuit Checks of System With Battery Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-9
Checks with Key Switch OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-10
CPU Battery Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-12
MEMORY BACKUP BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-12
TCI PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-13
PSC PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-13
INVERTER PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-14
TCI CHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-14
Modular Mining Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-15
TCI Input Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-16
TCI Digital Output Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-18
TCI Digital Input Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-20
PSC Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-22
PSC Digital Input Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-26
Miscellaneous Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-27
A3PV Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-27
LINKV Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-27
E03015 1/02
E3-1
E3-2
1/02 E03015
ALL removal, repairs and installation of propulsion system electrical components, cables
etc. must be performed by an electrical maintenance technician properly trained to service
the system.
E03015 1/02
If a problem occurs in the AC drive system preventing NORMAL shutdown procedures, ADDITIONAL
PRECAUTIONS ARE NECESSARY to ensure dangerous drive system voltages are not present when
tests or repairs are performed.
E3-3
E3-4
1/02 E03015
4. After the engine has been off for at least five (5)
minutes, inspect the Link Voltage lights in the
Information Display Panel (6, Figure 3-1) on the
main control cabinet and back wall of the operator
cab (next to the DID panel). If all lights are off, the
retard grids, wheel motors, alternator, and power
cables connecting these devices are safe to work
on.
5. The blower motors, control cabinet and power
cables connecting these devices may still be
unsafe. To establish these devices are safe, wait
approximately 15 minutes, open the top control
cabinet cover and inspect the red lights (6, Figure
3-2) on the Auxiliary Capacitor Panel (AXCAP)
(4). If these lights are off, the blower system,
blower power cables and remainder of the control
cabinet is safe to work on. The normal de-energization time is 10 to 15 minutes.
IF THE LINK VOLTAGE RED LIGHTS IN THE CONTROL CABINET INFORMATION DISPLAY PANEL,
AND/OR THE BACK WALL OF THE OPERATOR
CAB CONTINUE TO BE ILLUMINATED AFTER FOLLOWING THE ABOVE PROCEDURE, A FAULT HAS
OCCURRED.
E03015 1/02
E3-5
SYSTEM CHECKOUT
Test equipment needed to fully test A/C system:
E3-6
1/02 E03015
APPROX.
VALUE
NOTES
11B1
11
15V
TB21
71GE
TB22
120
71TCI
TB23
120
439
TB25
10V
TB28
11SL
TB28
11ST
TB28
15PV
TB29
11S
TB30
CIRCUIT
11A
TB30
11T
TB30
>36
11FR
TB30
11HTR
TB30
712
TB32
71
TB32
11L
CB30
12M
>10
12F
>200
E03015 1/02
E3-7
E3-8
1/02 E03015
AFSE P1 adjustment:
11. Connect an ohmmeter from the wiper of Pot P1
(cathode of ZD1) to Terminal E (GND) on the Battery Boost Module.
If necessary, adjust P1 to obtain an ohmmeter
reading of 6000 ohms.
12. Restore the following circuits:
a. Reconnect ground wires at GB1 ground block.
b. Reconnect wire RTN62 on TB4-D.
c. Reconnect the CCLR1 and CCLR2 connectors.
GRR wiring:
13. Remove the circuit #DCP20 wire on the DCPBUS
located to the right of the Main Rectifier Panel
(RD). Connect the VOM positive lead to this wire
and the negative lead to the negative link bus.
Make sure the ground block wires are connected.
Resistance should be 10K ohms.
14. Reconnect DCP20.
15. Measure between the GRRC wire on GFIP Terminal A to ground.
Resistance should be 500 ohms.
E03015 1/02
E3-9
TABLE II.
Pin
Ohms
47
Circuit
Pin
Ohms
Circuit
+5
32
return
47
+5
33
return
47
+5
34
return
47
+5
35
return
47
+5
36
return
47
+5
37
return
38
515
-15
47
+5
39
515
-15
11
47
+5
42
return
a. Verify key switch is OFF, batteries are connected and the battery disconnect switches
closed.
12
return
43
13
return
44
return
14
return
45
return
15
return
46
1.3K
16
return
47
17
return
48
1.3K
18
49
19
return
50
20
return
51
21
return
52
11S (TB30)
22
53
11L (CB30)
23
600
+15
54
return
11A (TB30)
24
600
+15
55
return
25
56
543
-24
26
600
+15
57
47
+5
40
515
-15
10
47
+5
41
515
-15
+24
+24
27
58
543
-24
28
210
+15
59
29
210
+15
60
30
return
61
31
return
62
E3-10
11SL (TB28)
NOTE: The voltage should be 25.0 volts minimum. If
voltage is significantly low, check battery circuits. If
voltage is slightly low, install a battery charger.
8. Check circuit 11B1 voltage to ground.
Read approximately 12V DC.
9. Using a digital multimeter, check polarity at the
BATFU fuse holder.
With the leads on BATP (positive lead) and
RTN (negative lead) meter should indicate
BATP is positive.
1/02 E03015
Input Voltage
Voltage should be between +20 and +32 volts
with voltmeter positive (+) lead on IN+
(SP24V03) and negative lead (-) on IN-
(RTN59).
Positive Output Voltage
Voltage should be between +22.8 and +25.2
volts with voltmeter positive (+) lead on V+
(P24VDC19) and negative lead on VR+
(RTN58).
Negative Output Voltage
Voltage should be between -22.8 and -25.2
volts with voltmeter positive (+) lead on V-
(N24VDC19) and negative lead on VR-
(RTN60).
E03015 1/02
E3-11
E3-12
1/02 E03015
TCI PROGRAMMING
PSC PROGRAMMING
BE SURE TO VERIFY LINK VOLTAGE IS DISCHARGED BEFORE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES.
BE SURE TO VERIFY LINK VOLTAGE IS DISCHARGED BEFORE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES.
c:\>ACNMENU {enter}
c:\>ACNMENU {enter}
E03015 1/02
E3-13
INVERTER PROGRAMMING
TCI CHECKOUT
BE SURE TO VERIFY LINK VOLTAGE IS DISCHARGED BEFORE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES.
1. Open the right door on the Electrical Control Cabinet and connect the serial communication cable
from the PTU to one of the two ports located to
the right of the PSC Panel. (RS11 is used for the
inverter card in slot No. 09, RS12 is used for the
inverter card in slot No. 11.)
To program the Inverters:
c:\>ACNMENU {enter}
Highlight PROGRAM INVERTERS {enter}
Highlight either DOWNLOAD TMC - FB172 (2735) or DOWNLOAD IMC - FB138, depending
on which cards are installed in slots No. 09 and
11. {enter}.
E3-14
1/02 E03015
COMMLINK=OK
{escape} {escape}
On the PSC PTU:
Move the cursor to Normal Operation {enter}
Cursor to PSC Real Time Data {enter}
Verify PTU display indicates:
COMMLINK=OK
{escape} {escape}
E03015 1/02
E3-15
1. Verify analog values and functions highlighted on the PTU are similar to the examples below:
Note: Actual values shown in illustrations will vary from those displayed on truck being serviced:
2. Press {enter} to display TCI SERIAL LINK DATA screen shown below:
E3-16
1/02 E03015
E03015 1/02
E3-17
2. On the TCI COMMUNICATION MENU, place cursor on Engine Stopped Tasks and press {enter}.
{escape} {escape}
4. For Table III steps 1 through 17, turn on each discrete output by highlighting it then pressing
{enter}. After the output is verified, press {enter}
to turn it off. Refer to Figure 3-4 for lamp location
and color.
DO NAME
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
(Fig. 3-3)
RESTLT
Rest Light
B6
PSCNOTRDY
C6
REDUCELT
D6
LINKONLT
TEMPWARNLT
C5
NORETARDLT
A5
NOPROPELLT
No Propel Light
A6
PSCWARNLT
B5
RTRDCONTLT
E6
10
HYDBHOTLT
D5
11
PKBRKON
12
RETARDLT
13
RETARDXLT
14
BATSEPC
15
SPEED1
not used
16
SPEED2
not used
17
REVERSELT
A3
D3
B4
Refer to TCI Digital Output Test procedure step 5. before performing the following test:
18
E3-18
ENGCRANK
1/02 E03015
Row-Col.
Indicator Description
Color
A1*
Spare
B1*
Red
C1
Red
D1
Spare
E1
Red
A2*
Red
B2*
Amber
C2*
Amber
D2*
Amber
E2*
Low Fuel
Amber
A3*
Amber
B3*
Amber
E03015 1/02
C3*
Body Up
Amber
D3*
Amber
Red
E3
STOP ENGINE
A4*
Spare
B4*
Amber
C4*
Amber
D4*
Amber
E4*
CHECK ENGINE
Amber
A5
No Propel/Retard
Red
B5
Amber
C5
Amber
D5
Red
E5*
Red
A6
No Propel
Red
B6
Amber
C6
Amber
D6
Amber
E6
Amber
E3-19
DID Display:
1. Observe the DID display.
The cursor to the right of the event code
should appear to spin.
E3-20
1/02 E03015
DO NAME
DESCRIPTION
LAMPTEST
Lamp Test Switch (Overhead Display - all lamps except last two rows should illuminate)
Note: When version 18 software is installed, the following will occur when the Lamp Test Switch is
activated:
Back-up horn sounds and back-up lights turn on.
Retard lights at rear of truck and on top of cab turn on.
ENGCAUTION
Check Engine Caution Lamp (Jumper circuit 419M @ TB30 to ground to illuminate overhead lamp)
(Note: If equipped with Komatsu engine, ENGCAUTION will not be highlighted on PTU but overhead
display lamp should illuminate.)
ENGWARN
Stop Engine Warning Lamp (Jumper circuit 509 @ TB30 to ground to illuminate overhead lamp)
If equipped with Komatsu engine, jumper 528A @ TB32 to ground to illuminate 2nd indicator lamp.)
RESET
RESTSW
Rest Switch (Place in REST position to activate) Note: Some trucks are equipped with a release button on the Rest Switch that must be pressed before moving the switch to the REST position. Verify the
internal lamp on the Rest Switch lights when in REST position.
REVREQ
FORREQ
ENGKILL
Engine Shutdown Switch (Depress switch on console) Verify circuit 439 (TB25) changes from 0 to
24VDC.
DATASTORE
10
BODYDWN
Body Up Switch (Activated when body is down) Circuit 63L (TB12) to ground voltage should be
approximately 24 volts with body down, 0 volts when body is raised. Verify lamp is Overhead Display
is OFF when body is down.
11
PRKBRKSW
12
PRKBRKFDBK
Park Brake Feedback Signal (Highlighted - Jumper circuit 73S on Park Brake Pressure switch, on
brake manifold in brake cabinet to ground to remove highlight.)
13
ENGSTRTREQ
14
RSC
15
OVERPAYLD
16
CONTROLON
Refer to procedure step 3. before performing the following checks (RB2 circuit breakers must be OFF, if RB2 is installed):
17
MIDPAYLD
18
FULLPAYLD
E03015 1/02
E3-21
E3-22
1/02 E03015
9. Press {enter}. Verify the values on the PTU are similar Figure 3-7 below:
Press {enter}. Verify the values on the PTU are similar to Figure 3-8 below:
E03015 1/02
E3-23
DO NAME
DESCRIPTION
DEVICE CHECKOUT
GF
GF Contactor
GFR
GFR Contactor
RP1
RP1 Contactor
RP2
RP2 Contactor
RP3
CPRL
With CPRL highlighted turn off CPS and verify that control power is not
lost. Turn CPS back on.
AFSE
SYSRUN
Verify the second LED from the top (labelled Control System OK),
located on Information Display Panel on the side of the control cabinet
is ON
TEST
Verify the fourth LED from the top (labelled Test Mode), located on the
Information Display Panel on the side of the control cabinet is ON.
10
REST
Verify the fifth LED from the top (labelled Rest Mode), located on the
Information Display Panel on the side of the control cabinet is ON.
11
SYSFLT
Verify the third LED from the top (labelled System Fault), located on
the side of the control cabinet is on.
Early Production Trucks: For steps 12 & 13, jumper a 20K ohm resistor across circuits 72FD (TB23) to 712 (TB32) and a 20K ohm resistor
across circuits 79RD (TB23) to 712 (TB32). Remove resistors after steps 12 and 13 are completed.
12
FORT
Verify circuit 72FD changes from 24VDC to 0VDC when FORT is activated
13
REVT
Verify circuit 79RD changes from 24VDC to 0VDC when REVT is activated
14
GD1E
15
GD2E
16
CMCTL
Do not check.
17
AUXRESET
E3-24
1/02 E03015
Without looking directly into the plug on Chopper Module One, verify that a red light is
present.
Without looking directly into the plug on Chopper Module 2, verify that a red light is present.
E03015 1/02
E3-25
DI NAME
DESCRIPTION
DEVICE CHECKOUT
KEYSW
Key Switch
CPSFB
CNFB
CNIFB
CNXFB
INV1CO
Will be highlighted with Inverter #1 switch on the side of the control cabinet in
the CUTOUT position (down).
INV2CO
Will be highlighted with Inverter #2 switch on the side of the control cabinet in
the CUTOUT position (down).
BRKON
Will be highlighted with wire 44R (TB26) jumpered to 712 (TB22) (Wires do not
have to be removed.)
E3-26
With the Key Switch and Control Power Switch ON, digital inputs should be
highlighted.
1/02 E03015
Miscellaneous Checks
A3PV Panel
1. Remove the wires from panel terminals A and C.
2. With the Control Power Switch ON, measure voltage between terminals D and F:
Verify 0.0 30 Millivolts.
3. Connect a jumper wire from the BATFU fuse
located on the bottom left wall in the left compartment to terminal A on A3PV.
c:\>ACNMENU {enter}
Highlight PTU TCI & PSC {enter}
LINKV Panel
1. Remove the wires from panel terminals A and C.
2. With the Control Power Switch ON, measure voltage between terminals D and F:
Verify 0.0 30 Millivolts.
3. Connect a jumper wire from the BATFU fuse
located on the bottom left wall in the left compartment to terminal A on LINKV.
E03015 1/02
E3-27
A: Retard Pedal:
Move the cursor under the (K - Z) column on
channel 1 (CH1) {enter}
Cursor to Parameter name rpinhi_ail5 {enter}
Record the parameter value with the retard
pedal fully released. (typical value; 1.53
volts).
Record the parameter value with the retard
pedal fully depressed. (typical value; 9.50
volts).
B: Retard Lever:
Cursor down to channel 2 (CH2) and position
the cursor under the (K - Z) column {enter}
Cursor to parameter name retlever_ail4 {enter}
Record the parameter value with the lever up
(typical value; 0.0 volts).
Record the parameter value with the lever
down (typical value; 8.75 volts).
E3-28
1/02 E03015
E: Truck Speed:
F: Accelerator pedal:
E03015 1/02
E3-29
E3-30
1/02 E03015
I: Program TCI
(PTU connected to TCI port)
1. 1. Place the REST switch in the OFF position and
turn keyswitch ON.
To program the 17FB144 CPU card:
From the Main Menu, highlight DOWNLOAD
TCI PANEL {enter}
Highlight SELECT TCI SETUP {enter}
Cursor to configuration desired {enter}
Highlight DOWNLOAD TCI PANEL {enter}
Highlight DOWNLOAD TCI {enter}
2. Cycle keyswitch or CPS when requested on
screen.
3. Verify the Object Code and Configuration file
shown on the screen for downloading are correct.
J: Program PSC
RSCMPH = 5
7. With Retard Speed Control knob pulled up and
the knob turned fully clockwise, verify the following is displayed:
RSCMPH = 37 (see note below)
Note: In step 7, truck configurations 07E and 13E will
indicate 31 (instead of 37) for 38.1 gear ratio.
E03015 1/02
E3-31
LOAD TESTING
1. Reconnect wires 21SR and 21SS (MTU 396
engine) to the starter or 21B (MTU/DDC 16V4000
or Komatsu engine) to the starter solenoids.
C:\>ACNMENU {enter}
Highlight PTU TCI & PSC {enter}
Type your name {enter}
Type your password {enter}
Cursor to Normal Operation {enter}
Preload Checks
5. Verify the analog values and the functions highlighted on the PTU are similar to Figure 3-10.
6. Connect a second serial communication cable
from the PTU to the TCI port.
C:\>ACNMENU {enter}
Highlight PTU TCI & PSC {enter}
position, (down).
E3-32
1/02 E03015
E03015 1/02
E3-33
E3-34
1/02 E03015
Final Checks:
E03015 1/02
E3-35
Inspect and verify the front and side electrical cabinet doors are closed and locked before performing
the following tests.
Preparation
E3-36
1/02 E03015
E03015 1/02
E3-37
E3-38
1/02 E03015
E03015 1/02
E3-39
E3-40
1/02 E03015
FIGURE 3-19. SELF LOAD TEST SCREEN; RP1 RP2 & RP3 PICKED UP
12. The load box screen should be recorded and values compared to values calculated to account for
parasitic losses at the elevation of the test site
and ambient temperature during testing as follows:
Trucks with DDEC engine:
a. The output horsepower should be 2700 HP
5% @ 1900 +10, -15 rpm.
b. The requested rpm from GE must be 1910
rpm.
c. Refer to Figure 3-20 for parasitic losses curve.
Read the parasitic losses from the graph
based on ambient temperature and altitude.
Add the value on the graph to the delivered
HP to GE and compare that to the -5%
value at the rpm rated tolerance. (i.e. 2612
HP plus value from graph = corrected HP)
Trucks with Komatsu SSDA16V160 engine:
a. The output horsepower should be 2700 HP
5% @ 1900 +10, -15 rpm.
b. The requested rpm from GE must be 1900
rpm.
c. Refer to Figure 3-21 for parasitic losses curve.
Read the parasitic losses from the graph
based on ambient temperature and altitude.
E03015 1/02
E3-41
E3-42
1/02 E03015
TROUBLESHOOTING
PVM Optimum Load Curve Handshaking
Troubleshooting
Note: a value of below 0.5VDC or above 9.5VDC (on
circuit 72E) indicates a failure.
Trucks equipped with DDEC engine:
1. 1. With the engine shut down, keyswitch ON and
control power ON, measure voltage between 72E
(+) and 0 (-) lead. Voltage should be 5.0VDC.
a. If the voltage is low or 0VDC, check voltage of
circuit 15VL @ TB32. (This supply is from the
GE drive system power supply card through
the GE/Auxiliary Control harness.)
Voltage should be 5.0 volts.
b. Then check voltage of circuit 15SIM @ TB32.
Voltage should be approximately 14.5 VDC.
c. If voltage is 0VDC or considerably lower than
14.5 volts, check the 20 ohm resistor on DB1.
2. 2. With the engine running and under load, with
keyswitch and control power switch ON, check
the voltage at 72E(+) to 0 (-).
Voltage should be 5.0 volts
a. If the voltage in step 2 is lower or higher than
5.0 volts, check using the DDR to see the percent of load the engine is given to the PVM
module.
b. Multiply the percentage value in the previous
step by 10. This should equal the 72E to 0
voltage reading. (i.e. 50% X 10 = 5.0 VDC)
Note: The DDR is updated every second and is not a
true real (electronic) time value. The GE system
updates every 20msec. A more accurate method of
measuring the updated value is to attach an
oscilloscope to the circuit 908M terminal point to
ground and measure the time the signal is positive
divided by the total time of the signal wave form and
multiply it by a factor of 10. This should equal the 72E
to 0 circuit voltage. This is a 50HZ signal.
Examples:
10ms/20ms = .50 X 10 = 5.0VDC
15ms/20ms = .75 X 10 = 7.5VDC
5ms/20ms = .25 X 10 = 2.5VDC
c. Verify circuit 0 is connected to ground.
d. If the signal 908M is correct and the supply
voltage (15SIM) to the PVM is correct, but output is incorrect, replace the PVM module.
E03015 1/02
E3-43
E3-44
1/02 E03015
E03015 1/02
E3-45
Subcode 03:
Description: An overcurrent condition was detected
during operation.
1. Check Capacitor Bank and Controller connections.
2. Verify the inductor connections match-up (+ and ) from the Auxiliary Inverter and to the Auxiliary
Capacitor bank (PH+ to IV+ and PH- to IV-).
Subcode 00:
No fault condition - initial state upon applying power.
Subcode 01:
Description: A low DC bus voltage was detected during power up sequence.
1. Check the 3-phase input connections and input
fuses F1 and F2.
2. Check Capacitor Bank and Controller connections.
3. If a problem was found and corrected in step 1 or
2, restart and check again.
4. If no problem was found in above steps, replace
the Controller.
Subcode 02:
E3-46
Subcode 06:
Description: A high DC bus voltage was detected after
the phase controller power up sequence.
1. Check Capacitor Bank and Controller connections.
2. Check DC Sense connection (connector J13 to
IV+ (red wire) and IV- (black wire)).
3. If problem still exists, replace controller.
1/02 E03015
Subcode 07:
Subcode 08:
2. If no problem was found in step 1, use an ohmmeter to check for short circuits between AM101,
AM201, and AM301 wires and between IV+ and
IV-.
E03015 1/02
6. Capacitor Fuses
7. Propulsion System Controller (PSC)
8. Cover
9. Input Fuses (F1 & F2)
10. 3- Pin Connector
E3-47
Subcode 09:
Subcode 12:
Subcode 13:
Description: IGBT protection circuit detected an overcurrent condition.
1. Disconnect AM101, AM201 and AM301 wires
connecting the Auxiliary Inverter to the blower
motor.
2. Using an ohmmeter, check for shorts between
blower motor cables and between blower motor
cables and chassis ground.
3. Using an ohmmeter, check for shorts between
AM101, AM201 and AM301 wires and between
IV+ and IV-.
Subcode 10:
Description: A sustained current overload exists that
is below component safe operating range.
1. Verify the inductor connections match-up
(+ and -) from the Auxiliary Inverter and to the
Auxiliary Capacitor bank (PH+ to IV+ and PH- to
IV-).
2. Check the blower fan for blockage or damage.
3. If no problem was found in step 1 or 2, the blower
motor may be damaged.
Subcode 14:
Description: Zero input voltage detected.
1. Check the 3-phase input connections and fuses
F1 and F2.
2. If no problems were found in step 1, replace the
controller.
Subcode 11:
Description: An overcurrent condition exists due to a
low DC bus voltage.
1. Check the 3-phase input connections and fuses
F1 and F2.
2. Check Capacitor Bank and Controller connections.
3. After performing checks in step 1 and 2, attempt
to restart.
4. If problem still exists, replace the controller.
E3-48
1/02 E03015
AC Input 2
AC Input 3
Term 1
PH+
Term 2
PH+
Term 3
PH+
Term 1
PH-
Term 2
PH-
Term 3
PH-
E03015 1/02
E3-49
Measuring Point
3. Terminals
Specified Value
C2-4
23.75
26.25
C1-4
23.75
26.25
C3-4
23.75
26.25
C2-2
C1-2
R1-1
C3-2
C1-4
C1-2
0.10 F
0.17 F
C2-4
C2-2
0.10 F
0.17 F
C3-4
C3-2
0.10 F
0.17 F
E3-50
1/02 E03015
IGBT TROUBLESHOOTING
Connector
J1
J2
J3
J4
J7
J8
E03015 1/02
From Pin
To
Measurement
IV+
Continuity
AM101
Continuity
AM101
Continuity
IV-
Continuity
IV+
Continuity
AM201
Continuity
AM201
Continuity
IV-
Continuity
IV+
Continuity
AM301
Continuity
AM301
Continuity
IV-
Continuity
E3-51
NOTES
E3-52
1/02 E03015
SECTION G
REAR AXLE, SPINDLES AND WHEELS
INDEX
G01017
Index
G1-1
NOTES
G1-2
Index
G01017
SECTION G2
TIRES AND RIMS
INDEX
G02015 08/01
G2-1
NOTES
G2-2
08/01 G02015
G02015 08/01
G2-3
5. Rim
6. Bead Seat Band
7. Side Flange
8. Lock Ring
9. O-Ring
10. Clamp Bracket
11. Flanged Nut
G2-4
08/01 G02015
Installation
Removal
G02015 08/01
G2-5
8. Clamps
9. Adapter Ring
10. Flanged Nut
11. Flanged Nut
4. Extension
5. Wheel Hub
6. Flanged Nut
7. Inner Extension
Installation
G2-6
08/01 G02015
G02015 08/01
G2-7
RIM
Tire Removal
4. Repeat this procedure at locations approximately 90 from the first application. Continue
this procedure until tire bead is free from rim.
5. After bead is broken loose, insert flat of tire tool
in beading notch on lockring (8). Pry lockring up
and out of groove on rim.
6. Pry in on bead seat band (6) until O-ring (9) is
exposed. Remove O-ring.
Reposition wheel assembly and repeat removal procedure on opposite side of tire. Remove tire from rim.
G2-8
5. Rim
6. Bead Seat Band
7. Side Flange
8. Lock Ring
9. O-Ring
10. Clamp Bracket
11. Flanged Nut
08/01 G02015
Tire Installation
1. Before mounting tire to rim, remove all dirt and
rust from rim parts, particularly the O-ring
groove and bead seats. It is advisable to touch
up all metal parts with a good anti-rust paint to
prevent bare metal from being exposed to the
weather.
NOTE: Do not allow paint, rust or other
contamination to cover mating faces of lockring (8,
Figure 2-6) and rim (5).
G02015 08/01
G2-9
NOTES
G2-10
08/01 G02015
SECTION G3
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND SPINDLE
INDEX
G03017 08/02
G3-1
NOTES
G3-2
08/02 G03017
Preparation
1. Reduce the engine speed to idle. Place the
selector switch in NEUTRAL and apply the
parking brake. Be certain the parking brake
applied indicator lamp in the overhead panel is
illuminated.
2. Place the drive system in the rest mode by turning the rest switch on the instrument panel ON.
Be certain the rest warning lamp is illuminated.
Removal
Remove the front tire and rim assembly. Refer to
Section G, Tires and Rims, Front Tire and Rim Removal
1. Close hydraulic pump shut-off valves.
2. Disconnect speed sensor connector(s) (5, Figure 3-1). Tie cables back away from the spindle
to prevent damage during spindle removal.
NOTE: The left wheel has two speed sensors
installed.
3. Disconnect disc brake cooling oil hoses (4) at
inlet and outlet ports on the brake housing.
G03017 08/02
G3-3
G3-4
4. Steering Arm
5. Arm Retainer
Capscrews
08/02 G03017
3. Removal Tool
4. Steering Arm
5. Spindle
6. Suspension Piston
2. Tool Structure
G03017 08/02
G3-5
Use of anti-seize compounds that contain copper are prohibited from use on spindle bores and
rod tapers. These lubricants can cause severe
damage. Only use multi-purpose grease Number
2 with 5% Molybdenum Disulphide.
G3-6
08/02 G03017
16. Remove capscrews (31) and hardened flatwashers (32). Remove brake adapter (19) and
discard O-rings (22 & 25).
4. Disconnect speed sensor cables. Loosen sensor clamping capscrews and remove speed
sensors (16).
5. Remove capscrews (20) and hardened flatwashers (21) securing brake adapter (19) to
brake housing.
6. Remove the capscrews and washers that
secure cover (5). Remove the cover and discard O-ring seal (41).
7. Remove capscrews (11) and hardened flatwashers (12). Remove bearing retainer (13)
and shims (8).
8. Attach a lifting device to the wheel hub/brake
assembly and carefully lift it straight up and off
the spindle.
9. Remove outer bearing cone (7) and retainer pin
(40).
10. Remove spindle cap (10) and O-ring (9).
11. Rotate hub vertically 180 and place on blocking
to prevent damage to wheel studs and
machined surfaces.
10. Remove capscrews (14) and washers (15)
securing seal carrier (37) sensor gear (35) and
shims (36) to wheel hub.
11. Remove capscrews (23) and hardened washers
(24) securing brake assembly inner gear to
wheel hub.
G03017 08/02
G3-7
G3-8
15. Washer
16. Speed Sensor
17. Sensor Bracket
18. Disc Brake Assembly
19. Brake Adapter
20. Capscrew
21. Hardened Washer
22. O-ring
23. Capscrew
24. Hardened Washer
25. O-ring
26. Spindle
27. Bearing Spacer
28. Inner Bearing Cone
08/02 G03017
c. After cups have warmed to ambient temperature, press the cups tight against hub shoulder as follows:
G03017 08/02
G3-9
1.416 in.
-1.375 in.
= 0.041 in.
G3-10
19. Install hardened flatwashers (32) and capscrews (31). Tighten capscrews to 1995 100
ft. lbs. (2705 136 N.m).
Socket head capscrews (34) are installed to position the seal carrier on the brake back plate after
assembly and prior to installation on the hub/
spindle. In the next step, it may be necessary to
loosen these capscrews, slightly to align the
brake assembly holes with the brake adapter.
NOTE: The following instructions must be performed
carefully to prevent damage during assembly to
brake adaptor O-ring seal (22).
20. Prior to installing the hub and brake assembly
on the spindle, install four alignment studs on
the brake adapter (in place of capscrews (20).
Space the studs 90 apart to ensure the brake
assembly is properly aligned during the following steps.
a. Install a new O-ring (22) onto the brake
adapter shoulder. Be certain the O-ring is not
twisted and properly seated.
b. Lubricate the O-ring with petroleum jelly or
chassis grease.
21. Attach an overhead hoist to wheel hub and
brake assembly. Rotate hub 180 in preparation
for lowering onto spindle.
NOTE: The hoist must be rigid enough to prevent
"springing" or "jerking" as the hub and brake
assembly is lowered into position.
22. Lift the hub over the spindle and slowly lower
while aligning the brake mounting holes with the
alignment studs.
a. When the brake piston housing is approximately 0.50 in. (13 mm) from the adaptor,
install four capscrews (20) and flatwashers
(21) spaced evenly in between the alignment
studs.
b. Carefully pull the brake and wheel hub
assembly into position by tightening the capscrews evenly and in small increments.
c. Do Not allow the assembly to "cock" (angle).
If the assembly is cocked, lift the assembly,
and inspect O-ring (22) for damage. Replace
the O-ring if necessary, and repeat the procedure.
08/02 G03017
4. Capscrews
5. Shims
6. Brake Back Plate
30. Install speed sensor(s) (16, Figure 3-6) in support bracket(s) (17). Adjust sensor gap as follows:
a. Rotate hub to position the top of a gear tooth
directly under the sensor tip.
b. Insert a 0.060 in (1.5 mm) feeler gauge
between sensor tip and gear tooth. Loosen
and adjust sensor clearance.
c. Lock the sensor in place.
d. Rotate hub 180 and verify clearance
remains within 0.040 in (1.0 mm) minimum to
0.080 in (2.0 mm) maximum.
31. Install speed sensor cables.
32. Install hub and spindle assembly on suspension
per instructions in Installation.
G03017 08/02
G3-11
Use extreme caution when performing maintenance on any vehicle with an active steering
system. Serious injury or death can result from
contact with moving parts. Always keep a safe
distance from crush points.
4.31 in.
(109.47 mm)
0.043 in.
(1.09 mm)
G3-12
3. Pin
4. Bearing Housing
08/02 G03017
G03017 08/02
G3-13
G3-14
4. Bearing Retainer
5. Rod End
08/02 G03017
TOE-IN ADJUSTMENT
1. The steering system must first be centered in
the straight ahead position. Shut down engine
and turn key switch OFF. Allow at least 90 seconds for the accumulators to bleed down. Do
Not turn the steering wheel. Block front and
back of the rear wheels.
2. Check toe-in by measuring the distance
between the centers of the front tires. These
measurements should be taken on a horizontal
centerline at front and rear of tires. Refer to Figure 3-11.
3. Radial tires should have equal measurements
(zero toe-in).
4. Loosen clamp locknuts on tie rod and rotate tie
rod as necessary to obtain correct toe-in setting.
5. When adjustment is complete, tighten clamp
locknuts (7, Figure 3-9) on tie rod to 310 31 ft.
lbs (420 42 N.m).
6. Remove blocks from rear wheels.
930E TOE-IN DATA
in. (cm)
G03017 08/02
G3-15
NOTES
G3-16
08/02 G03017
SECTION G4
REAR AXLE HOUSING ATTACHMENT
INDEX
REAR AXLE HOUSING ATTACHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-3
PIVOT PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-3
PIVOT EYE BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-4
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-4
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-4
PIVOT EYE REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-5
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-5
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-5
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-5
ANTI-SWAY BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-6
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-6
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-6
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-6
G04014 06/03
G4-1
NOTES
G4-2
06/03 G04014
1. Truck Frame
2. Capscrew
3. Lockwasher
4. 12 Pt. Capscrew
5. Lock Plate
6. Sleeve
7. Pivot Pin
8. Spacer
9. Cover Ring
10. 12 Pt. Capscrew
11. Locknut
12. Puller Holes
13. Bearing
14. Bearing Retainer
15. Pivot Eye Structure
16. Bearing Carrier
17. Clamp
Installation
1. Raise pivot eye (15, Figure 4-1) into position.
4. Position lock plate (5) by lining up the capscrews with the capscrew holes in the pin.
Install the capscrews.
5. Rotate the pin and lock plate to align capscrews
(2) with holes in frame mounting structure.
a. Install capscrews (2) and lockwashers (3).
b. Tighten capscrews (2) to 175 ft. lbs. (237
N.m) torque.
c. Tighten capscrews (4) to 1715 ft. lbs. (2325
N.m) torque.
G04014 06/03
G4-3
Assembly
1. Setup an appropriate tool to press spherical
bearing (4, Figure 4-2) into bearing carrier (3).
Be certain bearing outer race is flush with bearing carrier sides.
2. Install bearing retainers (2) using capscrews (5)
and locknuts (6). Tighten the capscrews to 575
ft. lbs. (779 N.m).
G4-4
4. Spherical Bearing
5. 12 Pt. Capscrew
6. Locknut
06/03 G04014
Assembly
1. Setup an appropriate tool to press bearing carrier (3, Figure 4-2) into the bore of the pivot eye
structure.
NOTE: With parts to correct size, the fit of the
bearing carrier into the bore of the pivot eye structure
may be 0.001 - 0.003 in. (0.025 - 0.08 mm)
interference fit. Freezing the bearing carrier will
ease installation.
Installation
1. Be certain the mating surfaces of axle housing
(1, Figure 4-3) and pivot eye (4) are clean and
not damaged.
2. Install an appropriate lifting device to the pivot
eye. The weight of the pivot eye is 762 lbs. (346
kg).
G04014 06/03
G4-5
ANTI-SWAY BAR
NOTE: The anti-sway bar mounting arrangement is
identical at each end.
Removal
1. Position the frame and the rear axle housing to
allow use of a puller arrangement to remove
anti-sway bar pins (4, Figure 4-4) on the rear
axle housing and the frame.
2. Securely install blocking between the frame and
the axle housing.
3. Disconnect the lubrication lines.
4. Position a fork lift or attach a lifting device to
anti-sway bar (11). The weight of the anti-sway
bar is 325 lbs (147 kg).
5. Remove capscrews (9) and locknuts (10) at
each mount.
6. Attach a puller and remove pin (4) from each
end of the anti-sway bar.
7. Remove the anti-sway bar from the mounting
brackets.
FIGURE 4-4. ANTI-SWAY BAR ASSEMBLY
Installation
1. Place pin (4, Figure 4-4) into position at the
front of the frame mount. Push the pin through
spacer (6), and rotate the pin to align retaining
capscrew (9) hole with the hole in mounting
structure (1).
2. Raise the anti-sway bar into position. The
weight of the anti-sway bar is 325 lbs (147 kg).
3. Push the pin through the spherical bearing,
insert the second spacer and continue pushing
into the other ear of the bracket. If necessary,
realign the pin with the retainer capscrew hole.
Install capscrew (9) and locknut (10).
4. Repeat the previous steps to install the remaining pin and spacers at the opposite end of the
bar. Start the pin into the bore of the axle housing mount from the rear of the truck.
5. Attach the lubrication lines. Pump grease into
the bearing to verify the line and the system is
operational.
6. Remove the blocking from between the frame
and the axle housing.
7. If necessary, recharge the suspensions. Refer
to Section H, Oiling and Charging Procedures.
G4-6
1. Mounting Structure
2. Capscrew
3. Lockwasher
4. Pin
5. Sleeve
6. Bearing Spacer
7. Retainer Ring
8. Bearing
9. Capscrew
10. Locknut
11. Anti-Sway Bar
Disassembly
1. Remove retainer rings (7, Figure 4-4) from the
bores of both ends of anti-sway bar (11).
2. Press out spherical bearings (8).
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Inspect bearing bores of the anti-sway bar. If
the bores are damaged, repair or replace the
anti-sway bar.
2. Inspect bearing spacers (6) for damage or
wear.
Assembly
1. Press new bearings into the sway bar.
2. Install retainer rings (7). Be certain the rings are
properly seated in the grooves.
06/03 G04014
SECTION G5
REAR AXLE HOUSING
INDEX
G05018
G5-1
NOTES
G5-2
G05018
Removal
1. Remove the dump body as outlined in Section
B, Dump Body. Block up truck and remove rear
tires as described in this Section G, Tires and
Rims.
2. Loosen hose clamps and disconnect wheel
motor cooling air duct from connection on front
center of housing.
Preparation
4. Disconnect hydraulic hoses at manifold (4, Figure 5-1). Cap fittings and plug hoses to prevent
contamination.
5. Remove covers from access holes (17).
G05018
G5-3
G5-4
G05018
G05018
G5-5
WHEEL MOTOR
Read and observe the following instructions
before attempting removal of the wheel motors or
any repairs on the propulsion system components!
Preparation
1. Reduce the engine speed to idle. Place the
selector switch in NEUTRAL and apply the
parking brake. Be certain the parking brake
applied indicator lamp in the overhead panel is
illuminated.
2. Place the drive system in the rest mode by turning the Rest switch on the instrument panel ON.
Be certain the rest warning lamp is illuminated.
3. Shut down the engine using the keyswitch.
Place the GF cutout switch in the CUTOUT
position.
Removal
NOTE: If suitable equipment is available to lift wheel
motor assembly from the axle housing it is not
necessary to remove the truck body. The equipment
used must be capable of lifting and supporting the
weight of the complete wheel motor assembly,
39,975 lbs. (18,132 kg.), must be mobile and must be
capable of aligning the wheel motor to the axle
housing mounting flange during installation. If the
wheel motor must be removed by use of a crane or
overhead hoist. Refer to Section B, Dump Body for
removal instructions.
1. Raise the rear of truck as described in this section, until tires clear the ground. Use support
stands or cribbing to block under rear housing.
2. Remove the inner and outer wheels from wheel
motor. Refer to tire and wheel removal instructions in this Section G, Tires and Rims. Be certain additional capscrews have been installed to
provide support for the wheel motor transmission housing while the rear tires are removed.
3. With the pump shut-off valves in the closed
position, remove the drain plug at bottom of
brake assembly and drain oil from disc brake
housing.
4. Remove covers from access holes (17, Figure
5-1)
5. Disconnect brake system cooling lines (2 & 10)
at brake back plate. Disconnect brake apply
lines (11). Cap and plug openings.
6. Remove clamps (3) securing brake hoses to
spindles.
G5-6
G05018
G05018
2. Capscrew
G5-7
G5-8
G05018
MASTIC SEALANT
Vendor Product Name:
Punch Marks
Description:
Vendor Source:
Uniseal
1800 W. Maryland Street
Evansville, IN 47712
be
available
G05018
G5-9
G5-10
G05018
G05018
Flushing
The transmission of the wheel motor must be flushed
using the same oil that is used in normal operation.
The use of solvents or low viscosity oils are not
acceptable.
After flushing to remove contamination from the
wheel motor, the transmission should be filled with
new or filtered oil. A sample should be taken for analysis after 100 hours of operation. If results of the oil
analysis are within the acceptance range, the wheel
motor may return to the 250 hour interval for oil analysis. If the results of the analysis are not within the
acceptance range, immediately contact your area GE
or Komatsu service representative. Large quantities
of loose material in the oil may be an indication of
imminent wheel motor failure.
G5-11
G5-12
G05018
Element
Max ppm
Iron (Fe)
600
Max spike
200
100
Action: A sun pinion and magnetic plug inspection should be done immediately. The magnetic plugs should be
inspected for metal chips and shavings. The sun pinion and low speed planet gears should be inspected for wear
or spalling per GE GDY-85/106 AC Motorized Wheel Component Inspection and Reuse Criteria (GEK-91680). If
the low speed planet gears fail to meet the inspection criteria the wheel should be removed, disassembled, and
gears replaced. If the low speed planet gears meet the re-use criteria, but the sun pinion fails to meet the reuse criteria, then replace the sun pinion. Once the sun pinion has been replaced drain the oil and replace with fresh oil.
This wheel should then be monitored closely and replaced if the iron level spikes again.
Element
Chromium
(Cr)
Max ppm
Max spike
10
Action: The oil should be resampled immediately and a gear train inspection completed. If resampling shows high
chrome, the wheel should be removed from service, disassembled, and the bearings and gears inspected.
Element
Max ppm
Max spike
Nickel (Ni)
10
Action: This could indicate a condition such as gear tooth pitting or spalling. The oil should be resampled immediately and a gear train inspection completed. If the resampling of the oil shows high nickel and chromium, the wheel
should be removed from service, disassembled, and the bearings and gears inspected.
Element
Max ppm
Max spike
15
Copper (Cu)
50
20
Action: This often indicates a normal wear condition such as minor thrust washer wear. It can also be an indicator
of bearing wear. If bearing wear is a concern review the chromium readings in conjunction with the copper readings. If both the copper and chromium readings spike; remove the wheel from service, disassemble the wheel, and
inspect the bearings. If the only elevated reading is that of copper or lead; remove the sun pinion and check the
outer thrust washer for wear. If the outer thrust washer has worn less than the depth of the oil lubricating grooves
then reassemble the sun pinion, filter the oil and continue to monitor. If the outer thrust washers have worn more
than the depth of the oil lubricating grooves then replace the outer thrust washers, reassemble the sun pinion, filter
the oil and continue to monitor.
G05018
G5-13
Element
Max ppm
Max spike
Calcium (Ca)
40
20
Action: If calcium and zinc spike then look at the oil viscosity. If the oil viscosity is below the 53 cSt at 100 C (212
F) or 588 cSt at 40 C (104 F) condemning limit, the oil should be resampled immediately. If the resampling still
shows a spike in calcium and low viscosity remove the wheel, disassemble, and replace the internal brake seals.
The oil removed from a low viscosity wheel should be disposed of and not reused under any circumstances. If the
oil viscosity is above 53 cSt at 100 C (212 F) or 588 cSt at 40 C (104 F) then monitor the wheel for any further
changes in viscosity
Element
Zinc (Zn)
Max ppm
75
Max spike
Indications of oil samples
Possible cause of elevated ppm's
40 If zinc, phosphorus, and calcium are high: Hydraulic oil has entered the drive train.
25 If zinc is high without high calcium and
phosphorus:
Action: If zinc and calcium increase proportionally then look at the oil viscosity. If the oil viscosity is below the 53
cSt at 100 C (212 F) or 588 cSt at 40 C (104 F) condemning limit, the oil should be resampled immediately. If
the resampling still shows a spike in calcium and low viscosity remove the wheel, disassemble, and replace the
internal brake seals. The oil removed from a low viscosity wheel should be disposed of and not reused under any
circumstances. If the oil viscosity is above 53 cSt at 100 C (212 F) or 588 cSt at 40 C (104 F) then monitor the
wheel for any further changes in viscosity.
Element
Max ppm
Phosphorus
400
(P)
Max spike
150
Action: If the oil viscosity is below the 53 cSt at 100 C (212 F) or 588 cSt at 40 C (104 F) condemning limit, the
oil should be resampled immediately. If the resampling still shows a spike in phosphorus and low viscosity, remove
the wheel, disassemble, and replace the internal brake seals. The oil removed from a low viscosity wheel should
be disposed of and not reused under any circumstances. If the oil viscosity is above 53 cSt at 100 C (212 F) or
588 cSt at 40 C (104 F) then monitor the wheel for any further changes in viscosity.
Element
Max ppm
Silicon (Si)
50
Max spike
20
25
Contamination can reduce sun pinion gear life significantly, as well as the rest of the drive train. Additional
component (sun pinion gear, etc.) inspections may be required, in addition to normal maintenance interval
inspections, if oil samples from a wheel motor show elements are above normal or rapidly elevating.
G5-14
G05018
G05018
G5-15
NOTES
G5-16
G05018
SECTION H
HYDRAIR II SUSPENSIONS
INDEX
H01013
Index
H1-1
NOTES
H1-2
Index
H01013
SECTION H2
FRONT SUSPENSIONS
INDEX
H02013 03/03
Front Suspensions
H2-1
NOTES
H2-2
Front Suspensions
03/03 H02013
FRONT SUSPENSION
The HydrairII suspensions are hydro-pneumatic
components containing oil and nitrogen gas. The oil
and gas in the four suspensions carry the gross truck
weight less wheels, spindles and rear axle assembly.
The front suspension cylinders consist of two basic
components; a suspension housing attached to the
truck frame and a suspension rod attached to the
front spindle.
Check valves and orifice dampening holes control
suspension travel to provide good ride qualities on
haul roads under loaded and empty conditions.
The front suspension rods also act as kingpins for
steering the truck.
The HydrairII suspension cylinder requires only
normal care when handling as a unit. However, after
being disassembled these parts must be handled
carefully to prevent damage to the machined surfaces. Surfaces are machined to extremely close tolerances and are precisely fitted. All parts must be
completely clean during assembly.
Removal
1. Park unloaded truck on hard level surface.
Block wheels and set parking brake. Remove
front wheel and tire. Refer to Section G, Tires
and Rims. Remove front wheel hub and spindle
as covered in Section G, Front Wheel Hub and
Spindle.
2. Remove boot clamp and boot from around suspension.
3. Discharge nitrogen pressure from suspension
by removing cap from charging valve (5, Figure
2-1). Turn the charging valve swivel nut (small
hex) (2, Figure 2-2) counterclockwise 3 full
turns to unseat valve seal (DO NOT turn more
than three turns). DO NOT TURN LARGE HEX
(4) (see DANGER below). Wearing face mask
or goggles, depress valve stem until all nitrogen
pressure has been relieved.
Make certain only the swivel nut (2) turns. Turning the complete charging valve assembly may
result in the valve assembly being forced out of
the suspension by the gas pressure inside.
4. After all nitrogen pressure has been relieved,
loosen large hex (3) and remove charging valve
assembly. Discard O-ring seal.
H02013 03/03
3. Pressure Sensor
Port
4. Vent Plug
5. Charging Valve
Front Suspensions
3. Charging Valve
Body (Large Hex)
4. Vent Plug
H2-3
The front HydrairII suspension weighs approximately 6150 pounds (2790 kg). Be certain the lifting device to be used is of sufficient capacity to
handle load.
8. Remove capscrews and washers (1, Figure 23) and nuts and washers (2).
9. Remove capscrews and washers (8), and nuts
and washers (10).
10. Remove capscrews and washers (6), and spacers (9).
11. Move suspension to a clean work area for disassembly.
When using a cleaning agent, follow the manufacturer's instructions for use, proper ventilation
and/or use of breathing apparatus.
H2-4
2. Inspect suspension and frame mounting surfaces and spotfaces for flatness. Surface finish
must not exceed 250 (RMS) (medium tool cut).
Surface flatness must be within 0.010 in. (0.254
mm).
3. Clean and dry all capscrews, nuts and washers
as stated in Step 1, above.
Front Suspensions
03/03 H02013
RUSTOLENE
Company.
grease
from
Sinclair
Oil
1. Hardened Flat
Washer
H02013 03/03
Front Suspensions
H2-5
H2-6
Front Suspensions
03/03 H02013
H02013 03/03
Front Suspensions
H2-7
H2-8
Front Suspensions
03/03 H02013
Assembly
NOTE: All parts must be completely dry and free of
foreign material. Lubricate all interior parts with clean
Hydrair suspension oil. Refer to the Oil and
Nitrogen Specifications Chart in Section H, Oiling
and Charging Procedures.
Use care not to damage the machined or plated
surfaces, O-rings or seals when installing piston
assembly.
1. Install new rod seal (28, Figure 2-8), step seal
(27), and rod wiper (29).
H02013 03/03
3. Install lower bearing (18) into lubricated suspension housing. Install capscrews and hardened lockwashers (20 & 21) through bearing
flange and into tapped holes in housing. Tighten
to 500 ft. lbs. (678 N.m) torque.
4. Install new backup rings and O-rings (15, Figure 2-7) in end cap grooves. Backup rings must
be positioned toward the flange on the end cap.
5. Install new bearing (14) on upper bearing
retainer (5).
6. Slide upper bearing retainer assembly over cap
structure rod (16).
Front Suspensions
H2-9
H2-10
Front Suspensions
03/03 H02013
SECTION H3
REAR SUSPENSIONS
INDEX
H03013 3/03
Rear Suspensions
H3-1
NOTES
H3-2
Rear Suspensions
3/03 H03013
REAR SUSPENSIONS
The Hydrair II suspensions are hydro-pneumatic
components containing oil and nitrogen gas. The oil
and gas in the four suspensions carry the gross truck
weight less wheels, spindles and final drive assembly. The rear suspension cylinders consist of two
basic components; a suspension housing attached to
the rear axle housing, and a suspension rod attached
to the frame.
Removal
Description
Quantity
EJ2847
EJ2848
Cylinder
EJ2849
Hand Pump
EJ2850
Shackle
MM0093
Capscrew
(M16 x 2 x 70 mm)
H03013 3/03
3. Suspension Cylinder
1. Valve Cap
2. Seal
3. Valve Core
4. Swivel Nut
5. Rubber Washer
Rear Suspensions
6. Valve Body
7. O-Ring
8. Valve Stem
9. O-Ring
H3-3
7. Position a fork lift under the suspension housing, above the lower mounting pin. Secure suspension to fork lift.
The rear HydrairII suspension weighs approximately 2,470 pounds (1120 kg.). Be certain the
capacity of the lifting device used is sufficient for
lifting this load.
NOTE: The mounting arrangement for the top and
bottom pins is identical.
8. Remove locking capscrew (4, Figure 3-4) from
the lower suspension pin that is to be removed.
The locking capscrew on the remaining cylinder
must remain installed.
6. Bearing
7. Capscrew
8. Washer
9. Sleeve
H3-4
Rear Suspensions
3/03 H03013
H03013 3/03
Rear Suspensions
H3-5
3. Inspect all parts for evidence of wear or damage. Inspect plated surfaces for scratches,
nicks or other defects. Replace or repair any
damaged parts.
H3-6
Rear Suspensions
3/03 H03013
1. Housing
2. Capscrews
3. Hardened Flatwashers
4. Piston Bearing
5. Piston Rod
6. Bleeder Screw
7. Vent Plug
8. Shield
9. Capscrew
10. Washers
11. Vent Plug
12. Charging Valve
13. Plug (Sensor)
14. Vent Plug
15. Wiper Seal
16. Rod Seal
17. Step Seal
18. Socket Head
Capscrew
19. Backup Ring
(See Note)
20. O-Ring
21. Housing Bearing
22. Ball Check
H03013 3/03
Rear Suspensions
H3-7
NOTES
H3-8
Rear Suspensions
3/03 H03013
SECTION H4
SUSPENSION OILING AND CHARGING PROCEDURE
INDEX
H04015 10/03
H4-1
NOTES
H4-2
10/03 H04015
EQUIPMENT LIST
All HydrairII suspensions are charged with compressed nitrogen gas with sufficient pressure to
cause injury and/or damage if improperly handled. Follow all safety instructions, cautions, and
warnings provided in the following procedures to
prevent any accidents during oiling and charging.
Proper charging of HydrairII suspensions requires
that three basic conditions be established in the following order:
1. Oil level must be correct.
2. Suspension piston rod extension for nitrogen
charging must be correct.
3. Nitrogen charge pressure must be correct.
For best results, Hydrair II suspensions should be
charged in pairs (fronts together and rears together).
If rears are to be charged, the fronts should be
charged first.
NOTE: For longer life of suspension components, a
friction modifier should be added to the suspension
oil. See Specifications Chart, Figure 4-5 at the end of
this chapter.
NOTE: Set up dimensions specified in the charts
must be maintained during oiling and charging
procedures. However, after the truck has been
operated, these dimensions may vary.
H04015 10/03
H4-3
H4-4
10/03 H04015
FRONT SUSPENSION
1. Park the unloaded truck on a hard, level surface. Apply the parking brake, and chock the
wheels.
2. Thoroughly clean area around the charging
valve on the suspensions. Remove the protective covers from the charging valves.
All HydrairII suspensions are charged with compressed nitrogen gas with sufficient pressure to
cause injury and/or damage if improperly handled. Follow all the safety notes, cautions and
warnings in these procedures to prevent accidents during servicing and charging.
H04015 10/03
OILING
HEIGHT
In. (mm)
CHARGING
HEIGHT
In. (mm)
CHARGING
PRESSURE
psi (kPa)
930E-1*
1.0 (25.4)
9.0 (229)
440 (3034)
930E-2*
930E-3*
1.0 (25.4)
9.0 (229)
425 (2930)
H4-5
H4-6
6. Valve Body
7. O-Ring
8. Valve Stem
9. O-Ring
10/03 H04015
REAR SUSPENSION
1. Park the unloaded truck on a hard, level surface. Apply the parking brake, and chock the
wheels.
2. Thoroughly clean the area around the charging
valve on the suspensions. Remove the protective covers from the charging valves and the
metal covers from the suspension piston.
H04015 10/03
H4-7
930E-1,
930E-2,
930E-3
OILING
HEIGHT
In. (mm)
CHARGING
HEIGHT
In. (mm)
*CHARGING
PRESSURE
psi (kPa)
1.0 (25.4)
7.5 (190)
215 (1482)
* Note: Charging pressures are for reference only and may vary
depending on body weights.
H4-8
10/03 H04015
H04015 10/03
H4-9
Part No.
Approved Sources
VJ3911
(need to add
6% of
AK3761)
AK4063
AK4064
5 Gallon container
55 Gallon container
VJ5925
(need to add
6% of
AK3761)
AK4065
5 Gallon container
AK4066
55 Gallon container
NOTE: VJ3911 and VJ5925 oils are not compatible and must not be mixed in a suspension.VJ3911 and VJ5925
oils are supplied in 5 gallon (19 Liter) cans.
Rear
930E-1
930E-2
930E-3
FRICTION MODIFIER
Part Number
Suspension Oil
AK3761
(5 Gallon container of
100% Friction Modifier)
Property
Value
Nitrogen
99.9% Minimum
Water
32 PPM Maximum
Dew Point
Oxygen
0.1% Maximum
H4-10
10/03 H04015
SECTION J
BRAKE CIRCUIT
INDEX
J01027
Index
J1-1
NOTES
J1-2
Index
J01027
SECTION J2
BRAKE CIRCUIT
INDEX
J02027
Brake Circuit
J2-1
NOTES
J2-2
Brake Circuit
J02027
BRAKE CIRCUIT
The Komatsu truck is equipped with an all-hydraulic
actuated wet disc service brake system. The brake
system utilizes Type C-4 hydraulic oil provided by the
brake/steering pump from the main hydraulic tank for
brake application. Brake disc cooling during truck
operation is provided by the hoist circuit pump
through the hoist valve. A disc type parking brake,
located in the rear axle housing, is attached to each
wheel motor. The fundamental function of the brake
system is to provide an operator the control he needs
to stop the truck in either a slow modulating fashion
or in as short a distance as reasonably possible.
Outlined below are the functions that Komatsu feels
are necessary for safe truck operation:
Warn the operator as soon as practical of a
serious or potentially serious loss of brake
pressure so proper action can be taken to stop
the truck before the secondary system is
exhausted of power.
Provide secondary brake circuits such that any
single failure leaves the truck with sufficient
stopping power.
Automatically apply service brakes if low
pressure warnings are ignored and pressures
continue to decrease.
Wheel brake lock to relieve the operator from
holding the brake pedal while at the dump or
shovel.
Spring applied park brake for holding, not
stopping, the truck during periods other than
loading or dumping.
Brake system that is easy to diagnose and
perform necessary service.
The following brake circuit description should be
used in conjunction with the hydraulic brake system
schematic, refer to Section R.
The brake system consists of several major valve
components; the foot operated dual circuit treadle
valve, hydraulically operated dual relay valves, and
the brake manifold. The dual circuit treadle valve is
the only component located in the operator's cab.
The remainder of the system, including the dual relay
valve for the front brakes, brake manifold, two accumulators, and electrical components, are located in a
weatherproof cabinet (Figure 2-1) behind the cab.
The hydraulic components cabinet is easily accessible for brake system diagnostic and service work.
J02027
Brake Circuit
J2-3
J2-4
Brake Circuit
J02027
A fundamental function of the secondary brake system is to provide reserve braking in the event of any
single failure. For this reason, the system is divided
into multiple circuits, each with its own isolation
check valve, two accumulators, and circuit regulator.
The secondary system becomes whatever circuit(s)
is operable after a failure. If the failure is a jammed
treadle valve, then the brake lock becomes the secondary system, otherwise, either of the two brake circuits would be the secondary system.
J02027
Brake Circuit
J2-5
WARNING CIRCUIT
The brake warning circuit is equipped with a low
brake pressure warning light (on the overhead display panel) and an audible alarm (in the cab) to alert
the operator of low brake pressures. Several electrical sensors, a relay and delay timer are used to
detect brake system problems. (See Figure 2-1 for
the following component references.)
Pressure sensor, system supply pressure
Located on the pump pressure sensing manifold.
When system supply pressure drops below 2300
psi (15.8 MPa), the low steering pressure light,
low brake pressure light and buzzer will turn on.
Pressure switch, low brake pressure (20)
Located on the brake manifold. When the
accumulator with the lower pressure falls below
1850 psi (12.7 MPa), the low brake pressure light
and buzzer will turn on.
Differential pressure switches (8)
Located on the dual controller valve (foot treadle)
and on each dual relay valve. During brake
application, if the difference in brake apply
pressure between the front and rear circuits is
greater than a preset level, the differential
pressure switch located on the dual controller
valve will turn on the low brake pressure light and
buzzer. If the difference in brake apply pressure
between the left and right circuits of the front or
rear wheel brakes is greater than a preset level,
the differential pressure switch located on the
dual relay valve at either the front or rear wheels
will turn on the low brake pressure light and
buzzer. The pressure differential switches
complete a path to ground in order to turn on the
low brake pressure light and buzzer. The
differential pressure switches provide detection of
faults such as a brake line rupture, poor brake
valve tracking, line blockage, excessive brake
displacement or air trapped in the system.
J2-6
Brake Circuit
J02027
NOTE:
B1 - Rear Brakes
B2 - Front Brakes
J02027
Brake Circuit
J2-7
J2-8
Brake Circuit
J02027
SECTION J3
BRAKE CIRCUIT COMPONENT SERVICE
INDEX
BRAKE CIRCUIT COMPONENT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J3-3
BRAKE VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-3
Rebuild Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-4
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-5
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-8
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-8
Actuator Base Threaded Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-8
Boot and Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-8
Valve Body Seal Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-8
Regulator Sleeve O-Ring Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-9
Actuator Plunger O-ring Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J3-9
Assembly of Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-9
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-11
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-11
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-11
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-11
VALVE BENCH TEST AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-12
Test Set Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-13
Brake Valve Output Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-13
Differential Pressure Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-13
Final Test and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-14
Installation Of Brake Pedal Actuator Assembly to Brake Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-15
Installation of Retard Pedal To Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-15
DUAL RELAY VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-17
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-17
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-17
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-19
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-19
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-19
J03025 06/03
J3-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-24
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-24
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-24
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-25
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-26
Charging Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-27
ACCUMULATORS - FRAME MOUNTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-28
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-28
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-28
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-29
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-29
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-30
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-30
ACCUMULATOR CHARGING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-31
RETARDER CONTROL LEVER (STEERING COLUMN-MOUNTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-32
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-32
Disassembly and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-32
Potentiometer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-34
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-34
J3-2
06/03 J03025
pressure
with
pedal
fully
J03025 06/03
J3-3
Installation
Removal
If the brake valve is to be removed from the vehicle
for repair or adjustment, additional equipment will be
required as outlined in disassembly, assembly.
NOTE: Minor repairs and service adjustment may not
require the removal of the brake valve.
J3-4
06/03 J03025
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: If not already removed, remove electronic
retard pedal (16, Figure 3-2) from brake pedal by
removing pivot shaft (8).
NOTE: During disassembly, precision machined
parts should be ink marked or tagged to ensure
proper reassembly and minimize adjustment time.
All items must be placed back into the bores from
which they were removed.
J03025 06/03
13. Pad
14. Nut
15. Capscrew
16. Electronic Retard Pedal
Assembly
17. Brake Pedal Actuator
18. Spring Pivot (Lower)
19. Spring
20. Spring Pivot (Top)
21. Set Screw
22. Jam Nut
23. Differential Pressure
Switch
J3-5
5. Capscrew
6. Actuator Base
7. Threaded Insert
7. Remove capscrews (36, Figure 3-4) and the differential pressure switch (35). Refer to Differential Pressure Switch for further switch repair
instructions.
8. Remove and discard the seals (27 & 28).
9. Loosen the plunger locknuts (2). Loosen the
socket head capscrew from the adjustment collars (1).
22. Remove the plunger return springs (10), regulator springs (8 & 10), and spring seats (11) from
the valve body.
23. Remove the actuator plungers (3) by pushing
down (toward the bottom of the valve) on the
actuator plunger with your hand until the actuator plunger slides out.
24. Remove the staging seat (6). Remove and discard packing (5).
11. Remove the two socket head capscrews (5, Figure 3-3) that retain the actuator base (6) to the
valve body.
J3-6
06/03 J03025
J03025 06/03
30. O-Ring
31. Retaining Plug
32. Base Plate
33. Washer
34. Capscrew
35. Differential Pressure
Switch
36. Capscrew
J3-7
scraper. Clean thoroughly to remove all adhesive or particles of the old boot.
3. Apply a thin bead of Loctite Prism 410 onto
the upper sides of the cap. Apply the bead to
the two long sides only. Do not apply it to the
rounded ends, these must not be sealed to
allow the boot to "breathe".
4. Carefully position the cap into the new boot
groove wiping off the excess glue.
5. Position the boot such that it conforms to the
contour of the cap, then set aside. Adhesive
requires about 30 minutes to cure.
Valve Body Seal Installation
1. Install the poly-pak seal (3, Figure 3-5) in the
seal groove first. Position the seal in the groove
so that the internal O-ring inside the poly-pak
seal is facing down toward the bottom of the
valve.
2. Make sure the internal O-ring is still seated
inside the poly-pak seal (3) and did not get dislodged during installation. Position the poly-pak
seal to the bottom of the groove.
ASSEMBLY
Actuator Base Threaded Inserts
1. If any inserts (7, Figure 3-3) were removed
from the actuator base (6), position the actuator
base upside down on the work bench and support directly under each of the four floor mounting holes.
2. Install the threaded inserts into the actuator
base by tapping lightly with a small hammer
until the insert flanges become flush with the
actuator base. Be sure the base is supported to
avoid breaking the base.
3. Thoroughly clean the actuator base and set
aside.
Boot and Cap
1. Examine the boot (2, Figure 3-3) for any
cracks, tears, or other damage. If damage is
evident, the boot must be replaced. To replace
the boot, follow the procedure below.
2. Remove the boot from the actuator cap (1) and
discard the old boot. Thoroughly clean the sides
of the cap by scraping the lip where the cap
contacts the boot. Use a knife or suitable
J3-8
4. Back-Up Ring
5. Wiper Seal
6. Actuator Base
06/03 J03025
4. Back-Up Ring
5. O-Ring
6. O-Ring
Assembly of Valve
NOTE: Start with either side (circuit) of the valve and
build that side complete through Step 4. before
starting on the other side (circuit). Be careful to
assemble components into the circuit from which
they were removed.
1. If removed, install stud (4, Figure 3-4) in
plunger (3). Tighten nut (2).
2. Install new packing (5) on staging seat (6) and
insert in plunger bore.
3. Lightly lubricate the actuation plunger Glyde
ring (7).
J03025 06/03
3. Glyde Ring
4. Sharp Edges
J3-9
J3-10
06/03 J03025
Assembly
1. Install plug (11, Figure 3-8). Tighten plug to 190
- 210 in. lbs. (21.5 - 23.7 N.m) torque.
2. Lightly lubricate Glyde rings on spool assembly
(10) and carefully insert in body (4) until it bottoms on plug (11).
3. Install plug (5). Tighten plug to 190 - 210 in.
lbs. (21.5 - 23.7 N.m) torque.
J03025 06/03
1. Differential Pressure
Switch Assembly
2. Valve Body
3. Switch Assembly
4. Body
5. Plug
6. Plug
7. Screw Plug
8. Spring
9. Piston
10. Spool Assembly
11. Plug
12. O-Ring
J3-11
1. Motor
2. Pump
3. System Pressure Gauge
4. Needle Valve
NOTE: Shut off valves (8) for tests not requiring simulated brake loads, such as circuit tracking.
NOTE: B1, B2 Cylinders must be capable of a 10 cubic inch maximum displacement.
J3-12
06/03 J03025
3. Attach the main supply input pressure to the Oring ports on the rear of the valve labeled "P1"
and "P2".
4. Attach the tank return line to the O-ring port
labeled "T" on the rear of the valve.
5. Attach the regulated output ports "B1" and "B2"
to the test lines. Pressure monitoring devices in
these two lines must be capable of 3000 psi
(20,680 kPa). Connect all ports. The connections should be according to the diagram shown
in Figure 3-9. All ports must be used and connected.
6. Start hydraulic pump and regulate output pressure to 2750 psi (18,960 kPa) at pressure
gauge (3). Pressure gauges (7 & 10) should
read zero.
J03025 06/03
J3-13
J3-14
06/03 J03025
J03025 06/03
J3-15
J3-16
06/03 J03025
Removal
The dual relay valves (one for front and one for rear
brake circuits) supply the apply pressure for each
disc brake assembly. When the operator depresses
the brake valve, hydraulic pressure, proportional to
the amount of brake valve application, is applied to
the pilot pressure circuit of each dual relay valve.
Regulated pressure (proportional to the pilot pressure applied) is then delivered from the "B1" and "B2"
ports of each dual relay valve to each wheel.
The regulated pressures supplied to each wheel are
equal. If a malfunction occurs, causing a pressure
differential greater than 600 psi (4137 kPa) between
the right and left brake apply circuit, a differential
pressure switch (3, Figure 3-11) mounted on the
valve activates a warning horn and lamp in the cab. If
a pressure differential greater than 600 psi (4137
kPa) occurs in the pilot circuit supplying the front and
rear dual relay valves, a differential pressure switch
mounted on the brake valve activates the warning
horn and lamp in the cab.
The dual relay valve for the front brake circuit is
located in the hydraulic components cabinet behind
the cab. The dual relay valve for the rear brake circuit
is located in the rear axle housing and requires
removal of the wheel motor cooling air duct components for access to the valve as described below.
J03025 06/03
J3-17
J3-18
9. Sleeve
10. Seal
11. Spool Spring
12. Regulator Spool
13. Lower Spring Seat
14. Regulator Spring
15. Upper Spring Seat
16. Plunger
17. Sleeve
18. O-Ring
19. Plug
20. Capscrew
21. Backup Ring
22. O-Ring
23. Backup Ring
24. O-Ring
25. O-Ring
26. Switch
27. Body
28. Plug
29. Screw Plug
30. Spring
31. Piston
32. Spool Assembly
06/03 J03025
Disassembly
The parts installed in the valve body for the "B1" and
"B2" bores are identical, however the parts must not
be interchanged between the two bores.
1. Thoroughly clean valve to remove dirt accumulation. Drain all oil from all ports of the valve by
rotating the valve over a suitable container.
2. Use a felt tip pen to mark manifold body (1, Figure 3-11) and valve body (2) to ensure correct
reassembly.
NOTE: As the valve is disassembled, lay out parts in
order of disassembly, being certain to note the valve
body bore from which they are removed. Parts must
be reinstalled in the same bore from which they are
removed.
3. Secure valve in an upright position in a vice.
4. Remove capscrews securing the differential
pressure switch (3) to the valve body. Remove
and discard seals behind differential pressure
switch ports. Refer to Differential Pressure
Switch for disassembly.
5. Remove the two socket head capscrews (20)
retaining the manifold body (1) to the valve
body (2). Remove manifold body and discard Orings (18).
6. Remove plungers (16) and sleeves (17).
7. Remove controller from vice.
8. Remove the four capscrews and washers (7)
from the base of the valve.
9. Remove the sleeve retainer (6).
10. With the valve upright, the plug (5) should fall
out. If not, tap lightly to dislodge.
11. Remove the spools (12), reaction plungers (8)
and spool return springs (11). Keep parts separate so they may be installed in the same spool
from which they were removed.
12. Remove and discard the packing (4) from the
counterbore in the base of the valve body.
13. Turn the valve on its side on the work bench
and remove the sleeves (9) from the valve body.
14. Remove seal (10), O-rings (22 & 24), and
backup rings (21 & 23) and discard.
15. Remove spring seats (13 & 15) and regulator
springs (14).
J03025 06/03
J3-19
Assembly
1. Install one plug (28, Figure 3-11) in the spool
assembly bore. Tighten plug to 190 - 210 in.
lbs. (21.5 - 23.7 N.m) torque.
2. Lightly lubricate Glyde rings on spool assembly
(32) and carefully insert in valve body bore until
seated against the plug.
3. Install plug in other end of spool bore. Tighten
to 190 - 210 in. lbs. (21.5 - 23.7 N.m) torque.
4. Using new O-ring (25), install switch (26).
Tighten to 55 - 60 in. lbs. (6.2 - 6.8 N.m)
torque.
5. Turn valve over and install piston (31), spring
(30) and screw plug (29). Plug should be
inserted approximately 0.5 in. (13 mm) below
edge of valve body. Temporarily install plug in
screw plug port.
NOTE: Screw plug (29) adjustment controls switch
actuation point. Refer to Valve Test and Adjustment,
Differential Pressure Switch Adjustment for
calibration procedure.
J3-20
06/03 J03025
J03025 06/03
6. Needle Valve
(Pressure Bleed to Tank)
7. Pilot Pressure Gauge
8. Dual Relay Valve
9. LH Brake Apply Pressure
Gauge
10. RH Brake Apply Pressure
Gauge
J3-21
1. With pump operating and supply and pilot pressure adjusted as described in setup instructions, inspect valve for leakage.
J3-22
06/03 J03025
J03025 06/03
J3-23
ACCUMULATORS - HYDRAULICS
COMPONENTS CABINET
Removal
1. Shut down engine to bleed steering accumulators. Exhaust all pressure from the brake system by opening accumulator manual drain
valves.
2. Remove the valve guard and "Dyna-seal" from
top of accumulators.
3. Depress valve core to release gas precharge
pressure from accumulator bladder. (Refer to
Figure 3-13).
4. Remove accumulator mounting bracket.
Loosen and remove accumulator from the
brake manifold. Plug opening on brake manifold
to prevent contamination.
5. Transfer accumulator to work area.
Installation
1. After service repairs or bench test has been
completed, move the accumulators to the brake
control cabinet. DO NOT precharge accumulators on the bench test.
2. Position the accumulators on the brake manifold. Tighten fittings securely. Install mounting
brackets. Secure mounting brackets in place
with capscrews and lockwashers. Tighten capscrews to standard torque.
3. Refer to Charging Procedure in this section.
4. Replace "Dyna-seal" and valve guard on top of
accumulators.
Disassembly
1. Securely clamp accumulator (preferably in a
chain vise). Make sure accumulator shell is
suitably protected by strips of padding or soft
metal on vise base.
2. Remove core from gas valve using valve core
tool. (Refer to Figure 3-13).
3. Remove pipe plug from plug and poppet.
4. Remove locknut from plug and poppet assembly using a spanner wrench and an adjustable
wrench. One for torque and one for countertorque. (Refer to Figure 3-14).
5. Remove spacer, Figure 3-15.
6. With palm of hand, push plug and poppet
assembly into the shell.
J3-24
06/03 J03025
J03025 06/03
J3-25
8. Grasp threaded section of plug and insert poppet end into shell mouth.
Assembly
1. Replace shell in vise, if removed.
2. Pour a liberal amount of clean C-4 hydraulic oil
into shell to serve as a cushion.
3. With bladder assembly on bench, expel all air to
completely collapse bladder and fold bladder
longitudinally into a compact roll. To maintain
rolled condition of bladder, install gas valve core
into the valve stem, thereby preventing air from
entering the bladder.
9. Install anti-extrusion ring inside shell. Fold antiextrusion ring to enable insertion into shell.
Place anti-extrusion ring on plug and poppet
assembly with its steel collar toward shell
mouth.
10. Withdraw threaded end of plug through shell
mouth. (Refer to Figure 3-21).
J3-26
06/03 J03025
Charging Procedure
1. Mount hose assembly gland nut on pressure
regulator.
J03025 06/03
J3-27
3. Charging Valve
J3-28
3. Capscrews, Washers
& Nuts
4. Mounting Bands
5. Oil Line
06/03 J03025
Disassembly
1. Remove charging valve (3, Figure 3-27).
2. Remove gland (4).
Note: Figure 3-28 illustrates a tool that can be
fabricated locally to aid in removing the gland.
3. Remove plugs and/or adaptor (10 & 11). Using
a round rod, push piston (6) out of accumulator.
4. Remove piston rings (7) and seal (8).
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean parts using fresh cleaning solvent, lint
free wiping cloth and filtered compressed air.
All parts must be absolutely free of any foreign
matter larger than 3 microns.
2. Inspect piston for damage. If scored or otherwise damaged, replace with a new part.
3. Minor defects in the housing bore may be corrected by honing.
a. Measure the bore at several places along
the length of the housing. Make two measurements, 90 apart at each point to verify
tube is not out-of-round.
J03025 06/03
J3-29
Assembly
Testing
To carry out the testing required, it will be necessary
to check for internal and external leaks at high pressure. A source of 5000 psi (35 MPa) hydraulic pressure and nitrogen pressure of 1400 psi (9.65 MPa)
will be required. A small water tank with the necessary safety guards in place will be necessary for a
portion of the test.
J3-30
06/03 J03025
ACCUMULATOR CHARGING
PROCEDURE
(Frame Mounted Brake Accumulators)
1. Valve Cap
2. Seal
3. Valve Core
4. Swivel Nut
5. Rubber Washer
6. Valve Body
7. O-ring
8. Valve Stem
9. O-ring
If nitrogen pressure is present in the accumulators, make certain only the small swivel hex nut
is turned during the next step. Turning the complete valve assembly may result in the valve
assembly being forced out of the accumulator by
the nitrogen pressure inside.
4. Remove charging valve cap (1, Figure 3-28).
Turn small swivel hex nut (4) three complete
turns counterclockwise.
5. Depress the valve stem and hold down until all
nitrogen has been released.
6. If a loss in nitrogen pressure is the reason for
recharging, inspect the charging valve and
accumulator for damage. Replace or repair
items, as necessary, before charging.
J03025 06/03
J3-31
Removal
Adjustment of the retarder control lever or replacement of the potentiometer requires removal of the
assembly from the steering column.
1. Tilt the steering wheel downward, and telescope the wheel towards the operator seat.
Remove the top cover from the steering column.
a. Lever Disassembly:
If the retarder control lever is to be completely disassembled, loosen and remove
locknut (9). Remove tang washer (10),
spring (11), and washer (12).
1. Remove capscrews (1, Figure 3-30) and lockwashers (2) from steering column (3).
Remove the lever and shaft assembly. If necessary, unscrew lever (16) from shaft (15)
and handle (17).
b. Lever Adjustments:
1. Connect the wiring harness to harness connector (5, Figure 3-30) on retarder control lever (4).
2. Place the retarder control lever into position on
steering column (3).
3. Install capscrews (1) and lockwashers (2).
Tighten the capscrews to 36 in. lbs. (4.1 N.m)
torque.
4. Place the cover on the top of the steering column and return the steering wheel to its original
position.
J3-32
06/03 J03025
J03025 06/03
7. Lockwasher
8. Potentiometer
9. Locknut
10. Tanged Washer
11. Disc Spring
12. Internal Tang Washer
J3-33
Assembly
Potentiometer Check
Potentiometer (8, Figure 3-30) is spring-loaded to the
OFF position. With the switch assembly removed
from the retarder control lever, make the following
checks:
signal voltage
input voltage
) x 100
J3-34
06/03 J03025
SECTION J4
BRAKE CIRCUIT CHECK-OUT PROCEDURE
INDEX
J04026 07/03
J4-1
NOTES
J4-2
07/03 J04026
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
J04026 07/03
J4-3
J4-4
07/03 J04026
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
AF2
AF1
AF3
Plug Port
AR1
AR2
AR3
Plug Port
BF (B2)
BL
BR (B1)
CV, CVR,
CVF
HS1
LAP1
LAP2
LS1
NVF
NVR
PK1
PK2
Plug Port
PK3
PP3
PR
PS1
SP1
SP2
Plug Port
SP3
SP4
Plug Port
SV1
SV2
T1
Return To Tank
T2
Plug Port
T3
Plug Port
J04026 07/03
J4-5
J4-6
07/03 J04026
J04026 07/03
J4-7
J4-8
36. Turn key switch ON. Very slowly, open the rear
brake accumulator bleeddown valve a small
amount ([NVR] 19, Figure 4-1) while observing
LAP1 decreasing pressure.
41. Turn the key switch OFF and allow the steering
accumulators to bleed down.
42. Open both accumulator bleeddown valves and
bleed down the entire brake system. Close
valves after all pressure is released.
43. Disconnect the hose (4, Figure 4-4) that supplies oil to the brake valve ("P2" port), front
brake circuit, by removing at the tee attached to
the bottom of the hydraulic cabinet (brake manifold port "AF1"). Cap the tee fitting, but hose
must be vented to atmosphere.
44. Start engine and allow low brake accumulator
pressure (LAP1 gauge) to stabilize at or above
2700 psi (18,613 kPa).
07/03 J04026
J04026 07/03
J4-9
J4-10
07/03 J04026
Replace coil.
Remove restriction.
Remove obstruction.
Replace piston.
TROUBLE: A Low Brake Pressure Warning Occurs When the Brakes are Not Applied
Short in electrical system.
Check wiring.
Replace relay.
J04026 07/03
J4-11
POSSIBLE CAUSES
TROUBLE: Differential Pressure Warning Circuit activates Briefly When Brakes are Applied or Released
Brake valve out of balance (not tracking).
Check the switch and replace if defective. Check differential pressure switch adjustment.
Accumulator precharge/leak.
Bleed brakes.
Replace timer.
TROUBLE: A Low Brake Pressure Warning Occurs When Brakes are Applied
Leak or other malfunction in one brake circuit.
Check the switch and replace if defective. Check differential pressure switch adjustment.
Replace bulb.
Electrical problem.
Check the switch and replace if defective. Check differential pressure switch adjustment.
Replace relay.
J4-12
07/03 J04026
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Check wiring.
TROUBLE: A Brake Accumulator Bleeds Off Quickly When Supply Pressure is Cut Off
Accumulator bleeddown valve is open.
Recharge accumulator
Check plumbing.
Remove,
replace.
disassemble,
clean,
reassemble;
or
Normal
TROUBLE: The Output Pressure At Controller is Correct but Brakes are Not Applying
Brake lines are blocked or improperly connected.
Check plumbing.
TROUBLE: The Brake Pressures Drift Excessively While Pedal is Held Steady
Contamination in brake valve assembly.
Remove,
replace.
J04026 07/03
disassemble,
clean,
reassemble;
or
J4-13
POSSIBLE CAUSES
TROUBLE: The Pump Cycles Too Often Or Low Pressure Warning Comes On At Low Engine RPM
Excessive internal leakage in a component.
Correct plumbing.
J4-14
07/03 J04026
CHECK-OUT PROCEDURE
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM DATA SHEET
MACHINE MODEL_______ UNIT NUMBER__________SERIAL NUMBER______________
I. INITIAL SYSTEM SET-UP
Operate hydraulic steering system to obtain proper operating temperature. Refer to Check-out
Procedures.
STEP 2
STEP 7
STEP 8
J04026 07/03
J4-15
CHECK-OUT PROCEDURE
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM DATA SHEET
STEP 24 __________ Brake lock degradation switch actuation pressure.
STEP 27 __________ Rear brake pressure with brake lock applied.
J4-16
07/03 J04026
SECTION J5
WET DISC BRAKE ASSEMBLY
INDEX
J05018 03/01
J5-1
NOTES
J5-2
03/01 J05018
Piston assembly
OPERATION
The ring gear (4, Figure 5-1) is internally splined to
retain the dampers (8) and separator plates (12). The
separator plates are alternately placed between the
friction faced discs (7) which are splined to the inner
gear (6). The inner gear mounts directly to the wheel
hub on the front wheel brakes. On the rear, the inner
gear requires an adapter hub which mounts on the
wheel hub on the wheel motor.
The inboard side of the assembly contains the piston
(9) which is activated by hydraulic pressure supplied
by the dual relay valves (controlled by the brake
valve). As hydraulic pressure is applied, the piston
moves to compress the rotating friction faced discs
against the stationary steel discs. The friction forces
generated resist the rotation of the wheels. As
hydraulic pressure increases, friction forces are
increased and wheel rotation is slowed until maximum force is reached and the wheel is stopped.
The complete brake disc pack is cooled by hydraulic
oil. The low pressure cooling circuit is completely isolated from the high pressure, piston apply circuit.
Cooling oil flows from the hydraulic tank to the hoist
pump, through the hoist circuit high pressure filters,
through the hoist valve, and into the brake housings.
A parallel circuit from the hoist valve outlet is connected to relief valves at the hydraulic tank which
limit brake cooling circuit pressure to 35 psi (241
kPa). Oil routed to the front brakes passes through
the oil cooler before entering the front brake housings. In addition, the brake cooling oil provides lubrication for the front wheel bearings. Oil exiting the
brake housings returns to the hydraulic tank.
J05018 03/01
J5-3
MAINTENANCE
Brake disc wear should be checked every 1000 hrs.
using the wear indicator tool (Part Number EF9302),
included in the tool group shipped with the truck.
Refer to Figure 5-2.
5. O-Ring
6. Tool Housing
7. O-Ring
8. Indicator Pin
J5-4
03/01 J05018
4. Diagnostic Coupler
5. Wear Indicator
Installation Port
J05018 03/01
J5-5
BRAKE REBUILD
1. Ring Gear
2. Back Plate
3. Capscrew
4. Shipping/Storage
Bar
5. Inner Gear
6. Remove socket head capscrews (2, Figure 55). Lift seal retainer (1) off brake assembly.
NOTE: Socket head capscrews (2) are required to
retain and position seal carrier on brake back plate
when the brake assembly is not installed on the
wheel hub or during brake assembly shipping or
storage. Shipping bars (4, Figure 5-4) must be
installed to retain the inner gear inside the brake
assembly.
7. Remove capscrews (4, Figure 5-5) and hardened flatwashers (5) from backplate (3).
8. Insert a 7/8 UNC x 2.0 in. pusher bolt in each of
the three tapped holes in the back plate.
Tighten bolts evenly to lift back plate from ring
gear (7). Remove and discard O-ring (6).
9. Noting order of assembly of discs, remove the
damper (10) from top of stack. Remove friction
discs (11), separator plates (9) and remaining
damper at bottom of stack.
10. Rotate the brake assembly to position shipping
bars on top as shown in Figure 5-4.
11. Remove capscrews (3) retaining shipping bars
(4) to housing.
J5-6
03/01 J05018
5. Hardened Washer
6. O-Ring
7. Ring Gear
8. Piston Housing
9. Separator Plate
10. Damper
11. Friction Disc
12. Inner Gear
J05018 03/01
3. Hardened Washer
4. O-Ring
5. Ring Gear
J5-7
12. Attach a lift strap through bars and lift inner gear
(5) out of brake assembly. Remove shipping
bars and spacers.
13. Remove capscrews (2, Figure 5-6) and hardened washers (3) from piston housing (1).
14. Insert a 7/8 UNC x 2.0 in. pusher bolt in each of
the three tapped holes in the piston housing.
Tighten bolts evenly to lift housing from ring
gear (5). Remove and discard O-ring (4).
J5-8
6. Seal Assembly
7. Seal Assembly
03/01 J05018
Free Height:
If the brake wear indicator test indicates internal
brake components are worn to the maximum
allowable limit, it is recommended that all friction
discs, separator plates and dampers should be
replaced with new parts. Always replace seal
assemblies and O-rings with new parts.
1. Clean all parts thoroughly prior to inspection.
2. Remove and discard toric rings from floating
ring oil seal assembly (6, Figure 5-1) in seal
retainer and back plate. Inspect seal ring polished (mating) surfaces for scratches or other
damage. Inspect the contact band of the mating
faces to determine amount of wear.
NOTE: A new seal will have a contact band
(dimension "A", Figure 5-8) approximately 0.06 in.
(1.6 mm) wide. As wear occurs, the contact band will
widen slightly (dimension "B") and migrate inward
until the inside diameter is reached and the entire
seal assembly must be replaced. Remaining seal life
can be estimated by the width of the contact band.
3. Inspect piston housing for nicks or scratches in
piston seal area. If nicks or scratches cannot be
removed by polishing, replace housing.
4. Inspect piston seal assembly grooves for damage.
J05018 03/01
J5-9
Assembly
J5-10
03/01 J05018
J05018 03/01
3. Separator Plate
4. Piston Housing
5. Piston
J5-11
J5-12
03/01 J05018
J05018 03/01
J5-13
J5-14
03/01 J05018
10. Be certain both housings are in correct alignment and are square and concentric. Move the
parts slowly and carefully toward each other.
8. Wipe the polished metal seal surfaces with
clean tri-chloroethane to remove any foreign
material or fingerprints. No foreign particles of
any kind should be on the seal ring faces.
Something as small as a paper towel raveling
will hold the seal faces apart and cause leakage.
Ensure seals are
square and concentric.
NOTE: Do not slam, bump or drop seals together.
High impact can damage the seal face and cause
leakage.
J05018 03/01
J5-15
J5-16
03/01 J05018
SECTION J7
PARKING BRAKE
INDEX
J07010 12/98
Parking Brake
J7-1
NOTES
J7-2
Parking Brake
12/98 J07010
PARKING BRAKE
The Model 930E truck is equipped with a dry disc
type parking brake assembly mounted on each
wheel motor rotor shaft. The parking brake assemblies are inboard mounted and can be accessed
through the rear axle housing door.
The parking brake is intended to prevent truck movement after the vehicle has stopped, the engine is
shut down, and when the truck is left unattended.
The parking brake is not for use during truck loading
or dumping operations. Refer to the Operation and
Maintenance Manual for additional brake system
operation instructions.
OPERATION
The parking brake is a spring applied, hydraulically
released, multiple disc type brake, actuated by the
parking brake switch mounted on the instrument
panel in the operator's cab.
J07010 12/98
Parking Brake
J7-3
MAINTENANCE
The parking brake system requires periodic inspection to determine the amount of wear incurred to
insure adequate brake torque is available. The following inspection should be made at 500 hour intervals.
The parking brake assembly weighs approximately 350 lbs. (159 kg). Be certain a lifting
device capable of supporting the weight is used
to support the brake assembly when removed.
1. Apply the parking brake, put selector switch in
NEUTRAL, place the rest switch in the ON
position, turn the key switch OFF to shut down
the engine, and allow approximately 90 seconds for the steering accumulators to bleed
down. Confirm the steering pressure is
released by turning the steering wheel - no
movement should occur. Block the truck
wheels.
2. Block wheels securely to prevent truck movement during parking brake repair.
3. Open brake accumulator bleeddown valves
located on brake manifold inside the hydraulic
components cabinet behind the cab. Allow adequate time for the accumulators to bleed down
completely.
4. Open the rear axle housing access door and
remove wing nuts retaining duct inside door.
Remove duct tube and open access covers
inside axle housing. Remove ducts as required
to setup a lifting device for brake removal.
5. Disconnect park brake apply supply hose (7,
Figure 7-1).
6. Remove capscrews and lockwashers (9). Install
guide studs in two of the mounting holes to support brake assembly when removed from wheel
motor frame.
7. Slide parking brake assembly out of wheel
motor frame and off inner gear (4). Remove
from axle housing.
J7-4
Parking Brake
12/98 J07010
Gear Removal:
If the rotor shaft gear (4, Figure 7-1) is worn, damaged or otherwise requires removal, follow the procedures below:
Gear Installation:
4. Install capscrews and lockwashers (9, Figure 71) Tighten evenly to be certain brake housing is
properly seated on the wheel motor. Tighten to
220 ft. lbs. (298 N.m) final torque.
J07010 12/98
Parking Brake
J7-5
J7-6
Parking Brake
12/98 J07010
7. Belleville Springs
8. Piston Seal Assembly
9. Piston Seal Assembly
10. Capscrew
11. Hardened Washer
12. Separator Disc
Pressure Test:
10. Install the O-ring plug and bleeder (17). Install a
fitting in one of the pressure supply ports and
attach a hydraulic power source. Install an Oring plug in the remaining port.
J07010 12/98
Parking Brake
J7-7
J7-8
Parking Brake
12/98 J07010
SECTION L
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
INDEX
L01033
Index
L1-1
NOTES
L1-2
Index
L01033
SECTION L2
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
INDEX
L02031
Hydraulic System
L2-1
NOTES
L2-2
Hydraulic System
L02031
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC PUMP MODULE
The following is a general description of the model
930E hydraulic system. Additional information concerning individual component description and operation can be found under the different system
circuits such as the hoist circuit, steering circuit, and
hydraulic brake circuit.
L02031
Hydraulic System
L2-3
The hoist, steering and brake circuits share a common hydraulic tank (7, Figure 2-2). The tank is
located on the left side of the frame, forward of the
rear wheels. Service capacity of the tank is 250 gal.
(947 l). Type C-4 hydraulic oil is recommended for
use in the hydraulic system. Oil used in the hoist,
steering and brake circuits flows from the bottom of
the tank through 100 mesh wire suction strainers.
Hydraulic oil from the tank is supplied to a gear type
hoist circuit pump (18, Figure 2-1), rated at 246 GPM
(931 l/min.) @ 1900 RPM and 2500 psi (17.2 MPa).
Oil from the pump outlet port is directed to high pressure filters (4, Figure 2-2) and then enters the hoist
valve (5).
The hoist pump (and steering/brake pump) is driven
by a driveshaft (6) off the rear of the traction alternator.
Hoist valve (5) directs oil flow to hoist cylinders (1)
when the operator moves the body dump control
lever. The body dump lever is connected to the hoist
pilot valve located in the hydraulic components cabinet by a flexible control cable. If the control lever is in
the float position, oil is returned to the hydraulic tank
through brake/hoist return oil manifold (2) and also
flows through the disc brake circuit to cool the wet
disc brake system. Heat generated during service
brake application is removed by an oil-to-water heat
exchanger (1, Figure 2-5).
Hoist system pressure is limited to 2500 psi (17.2
MPa) maximum pressure.
L2-4
Hydraulic System
L02031
L02031
5. Hoist Valve
6. Pump Drive Shaft
7. Hydraulic Tank
Hydraulic System
L2-5
L2-6
Hydraulic System
L02031
L02031
6. Hydraulic Tank
7. Pump Supply Shutoff Valve
8. Steering/Brake Circuit Pump
9. Steering/Brake Circuit Filter
10. Hoist Circuit Pump
Hydraulic System
L2-7
L2-8
Hydraulic System
L02031
L02031
Hydraulic System
L2-9
NOTES
L2-10
Hydraulic System
L02031
SECTION L3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENT REPAIR
INDEX
L03030
L3-1
NOTES
L3-2
L03030
L03030
5. Hoist Valve
6. Pump Drive Shaft
7. Hydraulic Tank
L3-3
1. Hoist Pump
2. Nut & Washer
3. Dowel
4. O-ring
5. Capscrew
L3-4
14. Compensator
Adju
ment
15. Unloader Adjustment
16. O-ring
17. Nut
L03030
Installation
NOTE: The following assumes the steering pump is
already in position on the truck.
1. Install O-ring (16, Figure 3-3) to steering pump
(11). Install coupler (9) to hoist pump.
L03030
L3-5
Disassembly
NOTE: As parts are removed they should be laid out
in a group in the same order in which they are
removed.
1. Clean the exterior of the pump assembly thoroughly. If the steering pump is attached,
remove capscrews (10, Figure 3-3) and pull
the steering pump free of transition plate (8).
Remove O-ring (16).
2. Remove coupling (9). Inspect the coupling.
Remove and discard internal snap ring, if
installed. Remove dowels (3) if damaged, or if
replacement of the bearing plate is necessary.
L3-6
19. Dowel
20. Bearing Plate
21. Dowel
22. Transition Plate
23. O-ring
24. (Not Used)
25. Coupler
26. O-ring
27. Drive Gear (Rear)
L03030
L03030
7. Stud
8. O-ring
9. Connector Plate
10. Steel Ring
11. Idler Gear
12. Drive Gear (Rear)
13. Bearings
14. Steel Ring
15. Backup Ring
16. O-ring & retainer
17. Isolation plate
18. Pressure Plate
L3-7
L3-8
8. O-ring
9. O-ring
10. Bearing Plate
11. O-ring
12. Thru Studs
13. Steel Rings
14. Backup Ring
L03030
3. Bearings
L03030
L3-9
INSPECTION OF PARTS
1. Examine the gear bores in both gear plates; reference Figure 3-9. During the initial break-in,
the gears cut into the aluminum gear plates.
The nominal depth of this cut is 0.008 in (0.203
mm) and should not exceed 0.015 in (0.381
mm). As the gear teeth cut into the gear plates,
metal is rolled against the pressure plates.
Using a knife or sharp pointed scraper, remove
the metal that was rolled against the pressure
plates. Remove all metal chips that were broken
loose.
L3-10
2. Gear Plate
3. Bearing Projection
L03030
12. With the bronze side up and the milled slot facing toward the discharge side, slide pressure
plate (2, Figure 3-13) down into the gear bores
until it rests on the backup ring and O-ring. Do
not force the plate down the gear bores. If it
hangs up on the way down, work it back and
forth until it slides freely into place.
13. Coat the inside of the gear plate and the gears
with clean hydraulic oil.
L03030
8. Bearing
9. Bearing
10. Weep Hole
11. Plug
12. Dowel
13. Gear Plate
14. Thru Studs
7. O-ring
8. Backup Ring
9. Isolation Plate
10. Relief Area
11. Thru Studs
L3-11
3. Slot
L3-12
7. O-ring
8. Snap Ring
9. Coupling
10. Thru Studs
11. Steel Ring
12. Backup Ring
L03030
20. Lubricate the I.D. of bearings (26). Install Orings (8 & 9) and dowel (25), if removed. Install
gear plate (10). Ensure the relief in gear plate
is toward bearing plate (7).
L03030
8. O-ring
9. O-ring
10. Gear Plate
11. Connector Plate
12. Stud
13. Idler Gear
14. Capscrew
22. Dowel
23. Dowel
24. O-ring
25. Dowel
26. Bearings
L3-13
21. Install rear drive gear (1) and idler gear (13).
The rear drive gear must be timed with the front
drive gear. This is accomplished by lining up a
tooth on the rear drive gear with the valley of
two teeth on the front drive gear, as shown in
Figure 3-16.
FIGURE 3-17.
1. Wrench
2. Input Shaft
3. Pump
L3-14
L03030
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(Hoist Pump)
TROUBLE
1. Sandblasted band around pressure
plate bores
2. Angle groove on face of pressure
plate
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1. Abrasive wear caused by
fine particles.
a. Dirt (fine contaminants,
not visible to the eye)
SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE
ACTION
1. Was clean oil used?
2. Was filter element change period
correct?
3. Were correct filter elements used?
3. Incorrect installation
4. Aeration-Cavitation
a. Restricted oil flow to
pump inlet
b. Aerated Oil
5. Lack of oil
7. Excessive Heat
1. Broken shaft
8. Over Pressure
L03030
L3-15
HYDRAULIC TANK
Filling Instructions
NOTE: If filling is required, use only type C-4
hydraulic oil as specified on the truck Lubrication
Chart. Filtering of oil with a 3 micron filtering system
is recommended.
Removal
1. Turn the keyswitch OFF and allow at least 90
seconds for the steering accumulators to bleed
down.
NOTE: Be prepared to contain approximately 250
gal. (947 L) of hydraulic oil. If the oil is to be reused,
clean containers must be used with a filtering (3
micron) system available for refill.
2. Thoroughly clean the outside of the hydraulic
tank and attached equipment.
3. Drain the hydraulic tank by use of the drain
valve located on the rear side of the tank.
4. Disconnect hydraulic lines. Plug lines to prevent
possible contamination to the system. Tag each
line at removal for proper identification during
installation.
L3-16
4. Drain Valve
5. Drain Cocks
L03030
Installation
1. Lift the hydraulic tank into position and secure
with capscrews and lockwashers. Tighten to
459 ft. lbs. (622 N.m) torque.
2. Uncap the hydraulic lines and attach to the
proper connections.
3. Replace breather filters if required.
4. Fill the hydraulic tank with clean, filtered C-4
hydraulic oil. Refer to Filling Instructions.
5. Bleed all air from the hydraulic lines.
6. Bleed trapped air inside steering pump. Refer to
Pump Pressure Setting, Section L for air bleeding procedure.
NOTE: If trapped air is not bled from steering pump,
possible pump damage and no output may result.
Removal
1. Clean the strainers with fresh cleaning solvent
from the inside out.
Prior to opening the hydraulic tank, allow at least
90 seconds for the accumulators to bleed down
after engine shutdown with the key switch OFF.
1. Shut down the engine and the key switch OFF
for at least 90 seconds.
L03030
L3-17
L3-18
L03030
SECTION L4
STEERING CIRCUIT
INDEX
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-1
NOTES
L4-2
Steering Circuit
L04038
STEERING CIRCUIT
STEERING CIRCUIT OPERATION
The pump (8, Figure 4-1) supplies oil to the bleeddown manifold (5) after passing through a high
pressure filter (9). This oil supply is then distributed
to the brake system and steering system.
L04038
7. Shut-off Valve
8. Steering/Brake Pump
Steering Circuit
9. Steering/Brake Circuit
Filter
10.Hoist Circuit Pump
L4-3
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
L4-4
Steering Circuit
L04038
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-5
L4-6
Steering Circuit
L04038
Relief Valves
The 4000 psi (28.0 MPa) relief valve limits maximum
steering circuit pressure by returning oil to the
hydraulic tank through internal passages in the
bleeddown manifold.
The 600 psi (4.1 MPa) relief valve provides maximum
pressure protection for the oil returning to the hydraulic tank.
Hoist Limit Solenoid
The body-up limit solenoid is a 3-way valve, activated
by the hoist limit switch (refer to Section D for additional information) when the hoist cylinders approach
the maximum extension limit. When activated, the
solenoid will close the power up pilot line to the hoist
valve from the hoist pilot valve mounted in the
hydraulic cabinet.
Pilot operated check valve (30, Figure 4-4) is opened
by the power down pilot pressure line (19) to allow oil
in the raise port to bypass the body-up limit solenoid
(24) for the initial power down operation while the
solenoid is activated by the hoist limit switch.
Refer to Section D, Electrical System (24VDC) for
adjustment procedure of the hoist limit switches.
Accumulators
The steering accumulators (5, Figure 4-1) are a floating piston type. The top side of the accumulators are
charged to 1400 psi (9.7 MPa) with pure dry nitrogen
with the piston at the bottom.
Oil entering the accumulators pushes the piston
upward compressing the nitrogen on the top side of
the piston. The nitrogen pressure increases directly
with steering circuit pressure. When steering circuit
pressure reaches 3025 psi (20.9 MPa) the unloader
valve will unload the pump. The accumulators will
contain a quantity of oil under pressure and held by
check valves in the bleeddown manifold, available for
steering the truck. When system pressure drops to
2750 psi (19.0 MPa) the pump output will again
increase, to refill the accumulators and increase
steering system pressure. The accumulators also
provide oil, for a limited period of time, to be used in
case the pump becomes inoperative.
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-7
Flow Amplifier
Flow amplifier (4, Figure 4-1, & Figure 4-5) is located
on the left frame rail forward of the bleed down manifold valve and is used in the steering circuit to provide the high volume of oil required for the steering
cylinders.
L4-8
Steering Circuit
L04038
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-9
No Steer
(Refer to Figure 4-6):
High pressure oil from the steering pump and steering accumulators is available through the steering
bleeddown manifold to the HP port on the flow
amplifier assembly.
Upon entering the priority valve, it goes past the
spool to the closed amplifier valve and also out port
P through a hose to port P on the steering control
unit. In the steering control unit, it goes to a closed
area in the control.
As pressure builds up in these two areas, oil passes
through orifices in the end of the priority valve and
builds pressure on the end of the valve and port PP.
When pressure reaches approximately 500 psi (3.5
MPa), the spool moves, compressing its spring and
closes off oil supply through area A resulting in high
pressure at PP, but only 500 psi (3.5 MPa) at the
amplifier spool and steering control unit.
L4-10
Steering Circuit
L04038
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-11
Steering Left
(Refer to Figure 4-7):
When the operator turns the steering wheel left, the
steering control unit is opened to allow oil coming in
port P to pass to the gerotor section of the control
unit to turn the rotor. Oil in the other side of the gerotor flows through other passages in the control unit
valve and out steering control unit port L. This oil
enters port L of the flow amplifier assembly and
goes to a closed area B in the directional valve.
As pressure in this area builds, it also passes into the
spool through orifice C to the spring area on the
end of the directional valve. The pressure then
moves the spool compressing the springs on the
opposite end. This movement allows the oil entering
area B to pass through the directional valve to area
D of the amplifier valve through sleeve E holes to
a passage between sleeve E and valve F, through
hole G in sleeve E where it initially is blocked by
the valve body.
As pressure builds up in this area, oil also flows from
area D, around the outside of sleeve E, around
pin H, through orifice J to build pressure on the
end of the amplifier valve and opens hole G only
enough to allow the flow of oil coming from the steering control unit to pass to the control area of the
directional valve.
L4-12
Steering Circuit
L04038
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-13
Steering Right
(Refer to Figure 4-8):
Only a few differences occur between steer left and
steer right. When the operator turns the steering
wheel right, oil is supplied out ports R and LS of
the steering control unit.
L4-14
Steering Circuit
L04038
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-15
L4-16
Steering Circuit
L04038
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-17
STEERING PUMP
Operation
Driveshaft (35, Figure 4-10) runs through the centerline of pump housing (37) and valve plate (48). Cylinder barrel (45) is splined to the drive shaft.
L4-18
Steering Circuit
L04038
1. Plug
2. O-ring
3. Spring
4. Back-Up Ring
5. O-Ring
6. Back-Up Ring
7. O-Ring
8. O-Ring
9. O-Ring
10. Back-Up Ring
11. Spring
12. Control Piston Sleeve
13. Spring
14. Piston
15. Pin
16. Control Piston Stop
Pin
17. Shoe Retainer
18. Pin
19. Retainer Ring
20. Washer
21. Saddle Bearing
22. Roll Pin
23. Link
24. O-Ring
25. Stroke Adjuster
26. Retainer Ring
27. Pin
28. Swashblock
29. Dowel Pin
30. Saddle
31. Roll Pin
32. Retainer Ring
33. Bearing
34. Shaft Retainer Ring
35. Shaft
36. Seal Retainer
37. Pump Housing
38. Shaft Seal
39. O-Ring
40. Fulcrum Ball
41. Cylinder Bearing
42. O-Ring
43. Elbow Fitting
44. Piston/Shoe Assy.
45. Cylinder Barrel
46. Gasket
47. Bearing
48. Valve Plate
49. Capscrew
50. O-Ring
51. Cover
52. Seal
53. Cap
L04038
Steering Circuit
L4-19
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Full Pump Volume:
Control piston (1, Figure 4-11) controls the angle of
the swashblock (4). When control piston moves to
the full right position, the pump is at maximum pumping capacity.
The driveshaft turns the splined housing (2) which
contains the pumping pistons (3). When the housing
is rotated, the pistons move in and out of their bores
and the piston shoes ride against the angled
swashblock (4).
As the cylinder rotates, the individual piston bores
are connected, alternately to the left (port A) and
right (port B) crescent shaped ports in the valve
plate. While connected to left side (suction) port A,
each piston moves outward, drawing fluid from port
A into the piston bore until its outermost stoke is
reached. At that point the piston bore passes from
the left crescent port to the right crescent port.
Neutral Position:
Neutral position (Figure 4-13) results when the control piston (1) centers the swashblock (4). The
swashblock angle is now zero and swashblock face
is now parallel to cylinder face. Therefore, no inward
or outward motion of the pump pistons exists as piston shoes rotate around the swashblock face. The
lack of inward and outward motion results in no fluid
being displaced from the piston bores to the crescents in the valve plate and subsequently no delivery
from pump ports.
FIGURE 4-13. PUMP IN NEUTRAL POSITION
L4-20
Steering Circuit
L04038
Steering Pump
Figure 4-14 shows the steering pump and the location of the pressure control adjustments and stroke
(flow) adjuster.
Note: Stroke adjuster (3, Figure 4-14) is set at the
factory to provide maximum pump flow and
adjustment is not normally required. If the truck is
operated at high elevations, 10,000 ft. (3,050 meters)
above sea level or more, it may be necessary to
readjust the stroke control to reduce pump flow to
prevent pump cavitation under certain conditions. If
the truck is operating at high altitude and problems
are experienced, consult your Komatsu service
representative for adjustment procedures.
Figure 4-15 shows the schematic of the pump and
the pressure control valves.
L04038
4. Pressure Compensator
Control Block
5. Case Drain
Steering Circuit
6. GP2 Port
7. GP4 Port
8. GPA Port
L4-21
NOTES
L4-22
Steering Circuit
L04038
SECTION L5
STEERING CONTROL UNIT
INDEX
L05027
L5-1
NOTES
L5-2
L05027
Use care to avoid contact with hot oil. Avoid spillage and contamination.
3. Remove capscrews (10, Figure 5-1) from steering unit mounting bracket and remove sterring
control unit (7).
L05027
4. Remove plugs from the hydraulic lines. Be certain that the previously tagged hydraulic lines
are connected to their respective ports according to the markings on the steering control unit.
L5-3
Serious personal injury to the operator or to anyone positioned near the front wheels may occur if
a truck is operated with the hydraulic steering
lines improperly installed. Improperly installed
lines can result in uncontrolled steering and/or
SUDDEN AND RAPID rotation of the steering
wheel as soon as the steering wheel is moved. It
will turn rapidly and cannot be stopped manually.
After servicing the steering control unit, hydraulic steering lines should be checked for correct
hook-up before starting the engine.
L5-4
L05027
2. O-Ring
1. Screwdriver
2. Dust Seal
3. Housing
5. Remove outer gear of gear wheel set (1) and Oring between gear set and distribution plate.
6. Lift inner gear off cardan shaft.
7. Remove cardan shaft (11, Figure 5-7), distribution plate (15) and O-ring (14).
8. Remove threaded bushing (4) and ball (3).
9. With valve housing positioned with the spool
and sleeve vertical, carefully lift spool assembly
out of housing bore.
Cleaning and Inspection - Steering Control Unit
1. Clean all parts carefully with fresh cleaning solvent.
If housing is not vertical when spool and sleeve
are removed, pin (9) may slip out of position and
trap spools inside housing bore.
10. Remove O-ring (5), kin ring (6) and bearing
assembly (7).
11. Remove ring (8) and pin (9) and carefully push
inner spool out of outer sleeve.
12. Press the neutral position springs (10) out of
their slot in the inner spool.
L05027
L5-5
L5-6
7. Bearing Assembly
8. Ring
9. Pin
10. Neutral Position
Springs
11. Cardan Shaft
12. Spacer
13. Tube
14. O- ring
15. Distribution Plate
16. Gear Wheel Set
17. O-ring
18. O-ring
19. End Cover
20. Washers
21. Rolled Pin
22. Capscrew With Pin
23. Capscrews
L05027
1. Slots
2. Hole
3. Spool
4. Sleeve
L05027
L5-7
2. Spool Assembly
5. Thrust Bearing
6. Bearing race
7. Neutral Position
Springs
L5-8
L05027
L05027
3. O-Ring
4. Housing
19. Tighten cover capscrews in a criss-cross pattern to 2 0.4 ft. lbs. (3 0.5 N.m) torque.
L5-9
NOTES
L5-10
L05027
SECTION L6
STEERING CIRCUIT COMPONENT REPAIR
INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-12
J06027
J6-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-24
L6-2
L06027
J06027
J6-3
FLOW AMPLIFIER
FIGURE 6-2. FLOW AMPLIFIER VALVE
Removal
Installation
1. Support the flow amplifier and move into position. The weight of the valve is 64 lbs. (29 kg).
2. Install mounting capscrews and tighten to standard torque.
3. Identify hydraulic line location, unplug lines and
connect at proper location. Tighten fittings
securely. Use new O-rings on the flange fittings.
4. Reinstall protective cover.
L6-4
1. Capscrew
2. Lockwasher
3. Capscrews
4. Lockwasher
5. Cover
6. O-ring
7. O-ring
8. O-ring
9. (Not Used)
10. O-ring
11. O-ring
12. Shock/Suction Valve (Complete)
13. Orifice Screw
14. Valve Housing
15. Counterpressure Valve (Complete)
16. O-ring
17. Plug
18. Plug
19. Seal
20. Stop
21. Spring
22. Spring
23. Spring Control
24. Orifice Screw
25. O-ring
26. Shock/Suction Valve (Complete)
27. Main Spool
28. O-ring
29. Spring Control
30. Spring
31. Spring
32. Spring Stop
33. Orifice Screw
34. Capscrews
35. Capscrew
36. Lockwasher
37. Lockwasher
38. O-rings
39. Cover
40. O-rings
41. (Not Used)
42. Stop
43. Spring
44. Spool
45. Orifice Screw
46. Name Plate
47. Check Valve
48. Orifice Plug
49. Spring
50. Pins
51. O-ring
52. Spring
53. Amplifier Spool Assembly (Complete)
54. Relief Valve Assembly
55. Seal
L06027
J06027
J6-5
Disassembly
1. Remove counterpressure valve plug (17, Figure
6-2), and O-ring (16). Remove counterpressure
valve assembly (15).
2. Remove plug (18) and seal (19). Using an 8
mm hex allen head wrench, remove the relief
valve assembly (54). Remove steel seal (55).
3. Remove capscrew (35) and capscrews (34)
using a 10 mm and 13 mm hex head allen
wrench. Remove lockwashers (36 & 37).
Remove end cover (39).
4. Remove spring stop (42) and spring (43).
Remove spring stop (32) and springs (30 & 31).
Remove O-rings (38 & 40).
5. Remove spring control (29) and main spool
(27). Remove priority valve spool (44). Remove
spring control (23), springs (21 & 22) and spring
stop (20).
6. Remove amplifier valve spool assembly (53).
Set amplifier valve spool assembly aside for further disassembly, if required.
7. Remove shock and suction valve (26). Set
shock and suction valve aside for further disassembly, if required.
8. Remove capscrews (1 & 3) using a 10 mm and
13 mm hex head allen wrench. Remove lockwashers (2 & 4). Remove end cover (5).
9. Remove O-rings (6, 7 & 8). Remove spring (52).
10. Remove shock and suction valve assembly
(12). Set the shock and suction valve aside for
further disassembly, if required. Remove orifice
screw (13).
11. Remove orifice screw (45). Remove check valve
(47).
3. O-Ring
L6-6
L06027
10. Install spring control (29), springs (30 & 31) and
spring stop (32).
11. Lubricate O-rings (6, 7 & 8) with molycote
grease and position on cover (5). Install end
cover (5). Install capscrews (3) with lockwashers (4). Tighten capscrews to 2 ft. lbs. (2.7
N.m) torque. Install capscrew (1) and lockwasher (2). Tighten capscrew to 6 ft. lbs. (8
N.m) torque.
12. Lubricate O-rings (38 & 40) with molycote
grease and install on cover (39). Install end
cover (39). Install capscrews (34) with lockwashers (37). Tighten capscrews to 2 ft. lbs.
(2.7 N.m) torque. Install capscrew (35) with
lockwasher (36). Tighten capscrew to 6 ft. lbs.
(8 N.m) torque.
FIGURE 6-3. AMPLIFIER SPOOL ASSEMBLY
1. Check Valve
2. O-Ring
3. Spool
4. Pin
5. Pin
6. Retaining Ring
7. Retaining Ring
8. Inner Spool
9. Spring
10. Plug
11. Orifice Plug
Assembly
1. Thoroughly lubricate each part prior to installation using clean, type C-4 hydraulic oil.
2. Reassemble the Amplifier spool assembly in
reverse order. Refer to Steps 12 & 13, and Figure 6-4 under disassembly.
3. Install orifice screw (13, Figure 6-2). Tighten orifice screw to 4 in. lbs. (.5 N.m) torque.
4. Install check valve (47). Tighten check valve to
8 in. lbs. (1 N.m) torque.
5. Install orifice screw (45). Tighten orifice screw
to 8 in. lbs. (1 N.m) torque.
6. Install seal (55) and relief valve assembly (54).
Install seal (19), and plug (18). Tighten plug to
22 in. lbs. (2.5 N.m) torque.
7. Install counterpressure valve assembly (15).
Install plug (17) using new O-ring (16).
8. Install both shock and suction valves (12 & 26)
as complete units. Install spring stop (20)
springs (21 & 22) and spring control (23). Install
orifice screws (24 & 33) if removed from main
spool (27). Install main spool (27).
9. Install amplifier spool assembly (53). Install priority valve spool (44) and spring (43). Install
spring (52).
J06027
J6-7
STEERING CYLINDERS
Figure 6-5 illustrates details of the steering cylinder
mounting. Refer to Section G for removal and installation instructions.
Relieve pressure before disconnecting hydraulic and other lines. Tighten all connections
before applying pressure.
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can
have sufficient force to enter a person's body by
penetrating the skin and cause serious injury
and possibly death if proper medical treatment
by a physician familiar with this injury is not
received immediately.
L6-8
5. Bearing Retainer
6. Capscrew
7. Lockwashers
8. Retainer
9. Mount Bracket
(Frame)
10. Bearing Spacer
11. Bearing
12. Pin
13. Hardened Washer
L06027
1. Housing
2. Locknut
3. Piston
Cylinder Assembly
Disassembly
1. Remove capscrews (9, Figure 6-6) and pull rod
(10) and gland (8) out of cylinder housing (1).
2. Remove locknut (2) and piston (3). Remove piston bearing (4) and piston seal (5) from piston.
3. Pull rod (10) free of gland (8). Remove O-ring
(6) and backup ring (7). Remove rod seal (12)
and rod wiper (11). Remove Bearing (13).
4. Inspect cylinder housing, gland, piston and rod
for signs of pitting, scoring or excessive wear.
Clean all parts with fresh cleaning solvent and
lubricate with clean Type C-4 hydraulic oil.
Test
b. Remove piston seal from water and assemble on piston. DO NOT take longer than 5
seconds to complete as seal will take a permanent set. The piston bearing (4) may be
used to position seal assembly in groove.
Apply pressure evenly to avoid cocking seal.
J06027
J6-9
Installation
1. Install a new O-ring on pump mounting flange.
2. Make certain the steering pump splined coupler
is in place (inside hoist pump) prior to steering
pump installation.
L6-10
L06027
NOTE: Use only Komatsu filter elements, or elements that meet the Komatsu hydraulic filtration
specification of Beta 12 = 200.
10. Open shut-off valve in steering pump suction
line completely.
11. With the body down and the engine shut-off, fill
the hydraulic tank with clean C-4 hydraulic fluid
(as specified on the truck Lubrication Chart) to
the upper sight glass level.
12. With suction line shut-off valve open, loosen
suction (inlet) hose capscrews (at the pump) to
bleed any trapped air. Tighten hose connection
capscrews to standard torque.
J06027
J6-11
Disassembly
L6-12
L06027
J06027
8. Name Plate
9. Plug
10. O-Ring
11. Plate
12. O-Ring
13. Stem
14. O-Ring
15. Gland
16. Jam Nut
17. Pin
18. O-Ring
19. Pin
20. O-Ring
21. Housing
J6-13
L6-14
8. Pin
9. Back-Up Ring
10. Cylinder Barrel
11. Control Piston
12. Ball
13. Piston Shoe Assembly
14. Retainer Ring
15. Washer
16. Pin
17. Link
18. Pin
19. Dowel Pin
20. Saddle
21. O-Ring
L06027
Driveshaft Group
Rotating Group
Inspection
J06027
J6-15
L6-16
6. O-Ring
7. Capscrew
8. Capscrew
9. Cover Plate
10. O-Ring
L06027
Swashblock Group
11. Inspect swashblock (25, Figure 6-9) for
scratches, grooves, cracks or uneven surface.
Replace if defective.
NOTE: The wear face is coated with a gray colored
epoxy based dry film lubricant for break-in
purposes. Scratching or wear of this coating is not
detrimental as long as the metal surface underneath
the coating is not scored or picked-up.
J06027
8. O-Ring
9. Orifice (0.062 in.)
10. Compensator Control Block
11. 4-Way Valve
12. Screw
13. Plug
14. O-Ring
J6-17
Assembly
Driveshaft Group
15. Remove shaft seal (26, Figure 6-8).
16. Check shaft bearing (2) for galling, pitting, binding or roughness. Replace if necessary.
17. Check shaft and its splines for wear. Replace
any parts necessary.
Compensator Block and Unloader Module
18. Remove screws (17, Figure 6-11) and separate
unloader module (18) from compensator block
(10).
19. Remove 4-way valve (11) and compensator (16)
from compensator block. Remove all plugs and
orifices (9 & 15). Clean block in solvent; inspect
all passages and orifices for obstructions.
20. Remove unloader valve from block (18).
Remove plugs and clean block passages. If
unloader is inoperative, replace entire module.
Stroke Adjuster Assembly
21. Measure and record dimension A on stroke
adjuster assembly as shown in Figure 6-12.
The procedures for assembling the pump are basically the reverse order of disassembly procedures.
During assembly, install new gaskets, seals, and Orings.
1. Apply a thin film of CLEAN grease or hydraulic
fluid to sealing components to ease assembly. If
a new rotating group is used, lubricate thoroughly with CLEAN hydraulic fluid. Apply fluid
generously to all wear surfaces.
Swashblock Group
2. Press or tap roll pin (22, Figure 6-9) into pump
housing (18, Figure 6-8).
3. Press new shaft seal (26) into saddle (20, Figure 6-9) using an arbor press. Install O-ring (21)
into the groove in the saddle.
4. Press four roll pins (23) into saddle (20) until
they bottom, then press saddle bearing (24)
onto the pins to locate the bearing in the saddle.
Extreme care should be used not to damage saddle bearing surfaces while installing the saddle
into the pump housing.
5. Use a long brass bar and a mallet (or an arbor
press), to install saddle and bearing assembly
into pump housing. Tap or press ONLY on the
area of the saddle that is exposed between the
saddle bearings (DO NOT tap on bearing surfaces). Saddle is fully seated when a distinct
metallic sound is heard when installing saddle
into pump housing.
6. Fasten control link (17, Figure 6-9) to swashblock (25) using link pin (16) and two retaining
rings (14).
7. Be sure the two dowel pins (19), are pressed
into swashblock (25).
8. Insert swashblock into pump housing until it
engages in saddle bearing and allow swashblock to settle to its lowest natural position.
L6-18
3. Gland
4. Jam Nut
L06027
Driveshaft Group
NOTE: Be sure punch marks on cylinder bearing (26,
Figure 6-9) will face toward shaft end of pump.
The assembled rotating group weighs approximately (30 lbs.). Assistance from others and use
of proper lifting techniques is strongly recommended to prevent personal injury.
21. The rotating group can now be carefully
installed over the end of the driveshaft and into
the pump housing.
22. When installing the rotating group, support the
weight of the cylinder barrel (10, Figure 6-9) as
cylinder spline is passed over the end of driveshaft to avoid scratching or damage.
23. Push cylinder barrel forward until the cylinder
spline reaches the driveshaft spline. Rotate the
cylinder slightly to engage shaft splines.
24. Continue to slide cylinder barrel forward until it
encounters the cylinder bearing (26). Lifting the
driveshaft slightly helps cylinder barrel and cylinder bearing engagement. Continue pushing
cylinder forward until the piston shoes contact
swashblock (25).
25. At this point, the back of the cylinder barrel
should be located approximately 0.25 in (6.3
mm) inside the back of the pump housing.
J06027
J6-19
Care should be taken during this next step to prevent the washer and retaining ring from falling
into pump housing.
41. Install second control link washer (15) and control link retaining ring (14) onto pin.
42. Once assembled, remove capscrew from pin.
FIGURE 6-12. O-RING LOCATION ON PISTON
SLEEVE
1. Back-Up Ring
2. O-Ring
3. Back-Up Ring
4. O-Ring
5. Back-Up Ring
38. Assemble one control link retainer ring (14, Figure 6-9) and one control link washer (15) onto
the threaded hole side of the control link pin
(16). Then thread a 1/4 in - 20 UNC capscrew
into pin to ease holding.
39. Carefully maneuver valve plate assembly, supported by overhead hoist, over driveshaft and
into pump housing so slot on control piston (11)
engages control link (17).
L6-20
L06027
ACCUMULATORS
Removal
1. Insure key switch has been OFF for at least 90
seconds to allow accumulator oil to drain back
to tank. Move steering wheel to be certain all
pressurized oil is released.
2. Remove charging valve guard (3, Figure 6-2)
and loosen small hex on charging valve (4)
three complete turns. Depress the valve core
until all nitrogen pressure has been relieved.
J06027
3. Mounting Band
J6-21
Disassembly - Accumulators
1. Remove charging valve (3, Figure 6-4).
2. Remove gland (4).
Note: Figure 6-5 illustrates a tool that can be
fabricated locally to aid in removing the gland.
3. Remove plugs and/or adaptor (10 & 11). Using
a round rod, push piston (6) out of accumulator.
4. Remove piston rings (7) and seal (8).
Cleaning and Inspection - Accumulators
1. Clean parts using fresh cleaning solvent, lint
free wiping cloth and filtered compressed air.
All parts must be absolutely free of any foreign
matter larger than 3 microns.
2. Inspect piston for damage. If scored or otherwise damaged, replace with a new part.
3. Minor defects in the housing bore may be corrected by honing.
a. Measure the bore at several places along
the length of the housing. Make two measurements, 90 apart at each point to verify
tube is not out-of-round.
L6-22
L06027
Assembly - Accumulators
Testing - Accumulators
To carry out the testing required, it will be necessary
to check for internal and external leaks at high pressure. A source of 5000 psi (35 MPa) hydraulic pressure and nitrogen pressure of 1400 psi (9.65 MPa)
will be required. A small water tank with the necessary safety guards in place will be necessary for a
portion of the test.
J06027
J6-23
Charging Procedure
If nitrogen pressure is present in the accumulators, make certain only the small swivel hex nut
is turned during the next step. Turning the complete valve assembly may result in the valve
assembly being forced out of the accumulator by
the nitrogen pressure inside.
3. Remove charging valve cap (1, Figure 6-6).
Turn small swivel hex nut (4) three complete
turns counterclockwise.
4. Depress the valve stem and hold down until all
nitrogen has been released.
5. If a loss in nitrogen pressure is the reason for
recharging, inspect the charging valve and
accumulator for damage. Replace or repair
items, as necessary, before charging procedure.
6. Connect the nitrogen charging kit to the charging valves. Open the regulator and charge the
accumulators simultaneously to 1400 psi (9.65
MPa).
NOTE: If a loss in nitrogen pressure occurred during
operation, oil may still be present in the accumulator
below the piston. This oil can be bled off during the
L6-24
L06027
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
TROUBLE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE
ACTION
STEERING CIRCUIT
Erratic steering
3. Replace pump
4. Repair or replace
1. Air in system due to low oil level, cavitating pump, leaky fittings, pinched
hose, etc.
J06027
2. Repair as required:
J6-25
TROUBLE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1. Broken or worn linkage between steering cylinder and steered wheels
SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE
ACTION
STEERING PUMP
No pump output
L6-26
L06027
TROUBLE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1. Low pump pressure
3. Restricted inlet
Loss of pressure
Noise or squeal
Excessive heat
J06027
SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE
ACTION
J6-27
TROUBLE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE
ACTION
FLOW AMPLIFIER
2. Disassemble valve, check directional spool and orifices for damage or obstruction
1. Air in LS line
3. Obstruction in orifice in LS or PP
port
L6-28
L06027
SECTION L7
HOIST CIRCUIT
INDEX
L07023
Hoist Circuit
L7-1
NOTES
L7-2
Hoist Circuit
L07023
HOIST CIRCUIT
HOIST CIRCUIT OPERATION
The following information describes the basic hoist
system circuit as shown in Figure 7-1. Detailed component operation is outlined under the individual
component descriptions.
Hydraulic fluid is supplied by a tank (1) located on
the left frame rail. The tanks service capacity is
approximately 250 gal. (947 l). Hydraulic oil is
routed to a tandem gear type pump (2). A second
pump, coupled to the rear of the hoist pump, supplies oil for the steering and brake systems. The
pumps are driven by an accessory drive at the end
of the traction alternator.
Hoist pump output is directed to a pair of high pressure filters (3), mounted to the inboard side of the
fuel tank.
L07023
Hoist Circuit
L7-3
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Hydraulic Tank
The hydraulic tank supplies hydraulic oil for the hoist,
steering and brake circuits. The tank is located on
the left hand frame rail forward of the rear wheels.
The service capacity of the tank is 250 gal. (947 l).
Type C-4 hydraulic oil is recommended for use in the
hydraulic system. Oil used in the hoist circuit flows
through 100 mesh wire suction strainers to the inlet
hoses of the pump. Air drawn into the tank during
operation is filtered by air filters located on the top of
the tank. Oil level can be checked visually at sight
glasses located on the face of the tank.
Hydraulic Pump
The hoist system hydraulic pump is a tandem, gear
type pump driven by a drive shaft on the end of the
traction alternator. The pump has a total output of
246 gpm (931 l/m) at 1900 rpm and 2500 psi (17, 235
kPa).
A smaller, piston type, pressure compensated pump
rated at 66 gpm (250 l/m) @ 1900 rpm, coupled to
the hoist pump, supplies oil to the steering system
and brake apply system.
Hoist pressure is limited to 2500 psi (17,235 kPa) by
internal relief valves located in the hoist control valve
inlet sections.
High Pressure Filters
Hoist pump output oil is directed to the high pressure
filters, mounted on the inboard side of the fuel tank.
The filter assemblies are equipped with a bypass
valve which permits oil flow if the filter element
becomes excessively restricted. Flow restriction
through the filter element is sensed by an indicator
switch. This switch will turn on a cab mounted red
warning light to indicate filter service is required. The
indicator light will illuminate when restriction reaches
approximately 40 psi (276 kPa). Actual filter bypass
will result when the filter element restriction reaches
approximately 50 psi (345 kPa).
Hoist Valve
The hoist valve (Figure 7-2) is mounted on a modular
assembly containing the hoist valve, overcenter manifold, and both hydraulic pumps. This assembly is
bolted to brackets attached to the frame rails behind
the main alternator. The hoist valve is a split spool
design. (The term split spool describes the spool
section of the valve.) The hoist valve precisely fol-
L7-4
4. Inlet Section
5. Inlet Port
6. Outlet Port
7. Spool Section Cover
8. Separator Plate
Hoist Circuit
L07023
L07023
Hoist Circuit
4. To Hoist Valve
(Rod End)
5. To Hoist Valve
(Base End)
L7-5
Bleeddown Manifold
Overcenter Manifold
When the body is nearly fully raised, the body activates the magnetic proximity switch, signalling the
solenoid to open the raise pilot line to tank, and
close the raise pilot line to the hoist valve, stopping
further oil flow to the hoist cylinders.
Refer to Section D, Electrical System (24VDC) for
adjustment procedure of the hoist limit switches
Pilot Operated Check Valve
The pilot operated check valve (6, Figure 7-1),
located in the bleeddown manifold, is opened by
power down pilot pressure to allow oil in the raise
port to by-pass the hoist up limit solenoid for initial
power down operation while the solenoid is activated
by the hoist limit switch.
L7-6
Hoist Circuit
4. Overcenter Valve
5. Quick Disconnects
6. Steering/Brake Pump
7. Hoist Pump
L07023
The following pages describe the hoist circuit operation in the FLOAT, POWER UP,
HOLD, and POWER DOWN positions. (Refer to Figures 7-5 through 7-9.)
L07023
Hoist Circuit
L7-7
L7-8
Hoist Circuit
L07023
L07023
Hoist Circuit
L7-9
Power Up Operation
(Figure 7-6)
The hoist pilot valve spool is moved to the power up
position when the operator moves the lever rearward
in the cab. The pilot supply oil coming in port (12) is
prevented from returning to the tank and, instead, is
directed out port (14) through hoist limit solenoid (13)
in the bleeddown manifold and into port (14) of the
hoist valve.
From there it goes to the top of the head end spool
(8), builds pressure on the end of the spool, causes
the spool to move down compressing the bottom
spring, and connects the high pressure passage (19)
to head end port (9). Working oil flow in the high
pressure passage is now allowed to flow through the
spool (8) and out port (9) to extend the hoist cylinders.
Even though a small amount of oil flows through the
check poppet in the top of spool (8), raise pilot pressure at ports (14) increases to slightly higher pressure than the required hoist cylinder pressure. As a
result, the pilot supply pressure in ports (12) also
increases causing back pressure to occur in the
spring area of the flow control valve (2). This overcomes the pilot pressure on the other end of the flow
control valve causing it to close and direct the incoming pump oil through the head end spool (8) to the
hoist cylinders to extend them. At this time, oil flow to
the brake cooling circuit is stopped.
If at any time the resistance to the flow of the pump
oil coming into the inlet section causes the pressure
to increase to 2500 psi (17,238 kPa), the pilot pressure against hoist relief valve (1) causes it to open
and allow flow to exit out port (23) to the brake cooling circuit and to return to the tank.
L7-10
Hoist Circuit
L07023
L07023
Hoist Circuit
L7-11
Hold Operation
(Figure 7-7)
The pilot valve spool is positioned to allow the pilot
supply oil entering port (12) to return to the tank
through port (10). Pilot supply pressure in ports (12)
then decreases to no pressure allowing flow control
valve (2) to open and route the incoming pump oil to
the brake cooling circuit through port (23) and back
to the tank.
L7-12
Both pilot ports (14 & 15) in the pilot valve are closed
by the pilot valve spool. In this condition pressure is
equalized on each end of each main spool (7 & 8)
allowing the springs to center the spools and close all
ports to trap the oil in the cylinders and hold the body
in its current position.
Hoist Circuit
L07023
L07023
Hoist Circuit
L7-13
L7-14
Hoist Circuit
L07023
L07023
Hoist Circuit
L7-15
Float Operation
(Figure 7-9)
When the operator releases the lever as the body
travels down, the hoist pilot valve spool returns to the
FLOAT position. In this position all ports (10, 12, 14,
& 15) are common with each other. Therefore, the
pilot supply oil is returning to tank with no pressure
build-up thus allowing the flow control valve (2) to
remain open to allow the pump oil to flow through
hoist valve port (23) to the brake cooling circuit and
eventually returning to the tank.
L7-16
Hoist Circuit
L07023
L07023
Hoist Circuit
L7-17
NOTES
L7-18
Hoist Circuit
L07023
SECTION L8
HOIST CIRCUIT COMPONENT REPAIR
INDEX
L08032
L8-1
L8-2
L08032
Removal
4. Mark, disconnect and cap or plug all line connections to help prevent hydraulic oil contamination. Refer to Figure 8-1.
5. Remove capscrews and lockwashers securing the hoist valve (5, Figure 8-1).
1. Hoist Cylinder
2. Brake/Hoist Return Oil
Manifold
3. Overcenter Manifold
4. Hoist Circuit Filters
5. Hoist Valve
6. Pump Drive Shaft
7. Hydraulic Tank
L08032
L8-3
O-Ring Replacement
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the individual
valve sections to accomplish repair, unless
emergency field repair is required to replace the Orings between sections to prevent leakage.
Loosening and retightening of the main valve tie rod
nut could cause distortion resulting in binding or
severely sticking plungers, poppet and spools.
To replace the O-rings between the valve sections:
1. Remove the four tie rod nuts and washers (5,
Figure 8-2) from one end of the valve. Slide the
tie rods from the valve and separate the sections.
L8-4
L08032
1. Capscrew
2. Inlet Cover
3. Spring (Orange)
4. Flow Control & Main
Relief Valve
12. Springs
13. Cover
14. Capscrews
INLET SECTION
Disassembly
1. Match mark or identify each part when removed
in respect to its location or respect to its mating
bore to aid reassembly.
2. Disconnect the external tube (7, Figure 8-2) at
the cover end and remove. Remove capscrews
(14, Figure 8-5), remove cover (13). Remove
springs (12), check valves (11) and O-rings
(10).
NOTE: Inlet section shown removed from main valve
body for clarity.
3. Remove capscrews (1) and cover (2). Remove
springs (3 & 5) and flow control/main relief valve
(4). Remove sleeve (6), low pressure relief (7)
and O-rings (8).
NOTE: If restrictor poppet removal in cover (2, Figure
8-5) is required, refer to Step 4 and Figure 8-6.
4. Remove sleeve (9), backup ring (8), O-ring (7),
backup ring (6). Remove backup ring (5), O-ring
(4), backup ring (3) and restrictor poppet (2).
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the opposite inlet
section if disassembly is required.
L08032
6. Backup Ring
7. O-ring
8. Backup Ring
9. Sleeve
L8-5
Disassembly
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the inlet
sections (1 or 4, Figure 8-2) to accomplish spool
section (2 or 3) disassembly.
1. Match mark or identify each part when removed
in respect to its location or respect to its mating
bore to aid reassembly.
2. Remove capscrews and lift spool section cover
(1, Figure 8-9) from housing.
3. Remove poppet (1, Figure 8-7) from spool
cover. Remove and discard O-ring (3).
NOTE: The poppet (1) contains a small steel ball. Do
not misplace.
4. Remove and discard O-rings (4 & 5, Figure 88).
5. Remove restrictor poppet (1). Remove and discard O-ring (2) and backup ring (3), if used.
Note the position of the restrictor when removed
to insure correct reassembly.
6. Remove spool assembly (20, Figure 8-9). Note
the color of the lower spring (blue) to insure
proper location during reassembly. Also note
the V groove on top end of spool.
L8-6
4. O-Ring
5. O-Ring
3. O-Ring
L08032
L08032
9. Restrictor Poppet
10. O-Ring
11. Spring
12. Restrictor Poppet (Red)
13. Spool Housing
14. Spool Assembly
15. Spool End
16. Spring (Blue)
17. O-Ring
18. Poppet
19. Spool Cover
20. Spool Assembly
21. Restrictor Poppet (Green)
22. Restrictor Poppet (White)
L8-7
Assembly
POPPET
COLOR
ORIFICE
DIAMETER
DRILL SIZE
Red
#28
Green
#42
White
#52
L8-8
L08032
Assembly
1. Lubricate spools (7, Figure 8-12) with clean
hydraulic oil and re-install in their original bores.
Install springs (8).
2. Lubricate O-rings (5 & 6) with clean hydraulic
oil. Install O-rings in bottom of spool housing.
Install bottom cover (9) and secure in place with
capscrews. Tighten capscrews to 60 ft. lbs. (81
N.m) torque.
3. Lubricate O-rings (5 & 6) and install in top of
spool housing. Install top cover (4) and secure
in place with capscrews. Tighten capscrews to
60 ft. lbs. (81 N.m) torque.
4. If removed, install plugs (2) with new O-rings
(3).
L08032
L8-9
L8-10
4. Spool Cover
5. O-Ring
6. O-Ring
7. Spool
8. Spring
9. Spool Cover
L08032
Installation
Removal
1. Place the hoist control lever in the body down
position. Make certain the body is in the full
down position and resting on the frame.
Release the hoist control lever to return the
hoist valve spool to the FLOAT position.
2. Disconnect hydraulic lines (3, Figure 8-13) at
the hoist pilot valve (1) located in the hydraulic
components cabinet at the rear of the cab.
Remove capscrews (5).
3. Loosen and unthread jam nut (8). Unthread
sleeve (9) until cotter pin (6) and pin (10) are
exposed.
4. Remove cotter pin and pin.
5. Remove the hoist pilot valve mounting hardware (2) and remove valve from cabinet. Refer
to hoist pilot valve disassembly for repair
instructions.
L08032
4. Flange
5. Capscrew
6. Cotter Pin
7. Control Cable
8. Jam Nut
9. Sleeve
10. Pin
L8-11
Disassembly
1. Thoroughly clean the exterior of the valve.
Match mark components to assure proper reassembly.
L8-12
L08032
L08032
L8-13
HOIST CYLINDERS
5. Carefully lower cylinder until it lays against the
inside dual tire. The hoist cylinder weighs
approximately 2500 lbs. (1135 kgs). Attach a
suitable lifting device that can handle the load
safely to the upper cylinder mounting eye.
Removal
L8-14
4. Locknut
5. Capscrew
L08032
Installation
L08032
4. Retainer Ring
5. Bearing
6. Spacer
L8-15
L8-16
L08032
Disassembly
1. If removal of the hoist cylinder eye bearings is
necessary, remove retainer ring (4, Figure 8-19)
and press out bearing (5).
2. Mount the hoist cylinder in a fixture which will
allow it to be rotated 180.
3. Position cylinder with the cover (10, Figure 820) mounting eye at the top. Remove capscrews (11) and lockwashers retaining the
cover to the housing (4).
4. Install two 0.88 in. dia. x 9 in. long, threaded
capscrews into the two threaded holes in the
cover (10). Screw the capscrews in evenly until
the cover can be removed. Lift cover straight up
until quill assembly (22) is clear. Remove O-ring
(12) and backup ring (23).
5. Remove capscrews (7) and plate (5) attaching
the rod bearing retainer (6) to the rod (1).
Remove the seal (8).
6. Fabricate a retainer bar using a 1/4" x 1" x 18"
(6 x 25 x 460 mm) steel flat. Drill holes in the
bar to align with a pair of tapped holes spaced
180 apart in the housing. Attach bar to housing
using capscrews (11).
NOTE: A retainer bar is required to prevent the first
and second stage cylinders from dropping out when
the housing is inverted.
7. Rotate the cylinder assembly 180, to position
the lower mounting eye at the top. Hook a lifting
device to the eye on the rod (1) and lift the rod
and third stage cylinder assembly out of the cylinder housing. Remove cushioin (25).
L08032
L8-17
2. Quill Assembly
L8-18
L08032
L08032
3. Plug
4. Check Ball
L8-19
L8-20
L08032
Assembly of Cylinder
1. Install seals (15, Figure 8-20) and bearing (14)
on second stage cylinder. Install bearings (19)
and buffer seal (18), rod seal (20) and rod wiper
(21) on first stage cylinder. Lubricate with clean
hydraulic oil (Type C-4).
12. Lubricate capscrews (1, Figure 8-24) with a lithium base grease. Install capscrews and plate
(2) and tighten to 575 ft. lbs. (780 N.m) torque.
3. Piston
L08032
L8-21
L8-22
L08032
1. Hoist Valve
2. Tubes to LH Hoist Cylinder
3. Power Down Quick Disconnect; Connect to
power up circuit of disabled truck
4. Power Up Quick Disconnect; Connect to power
down circuit of disabled truck
5. Overcenter Manifold
DUMPING PROCEDURE
Raising the Body
3. On the disabled truck, move the hoist control
lever to power up and then release it to place
the hoist pilot valve in the HOLD position (leave
in this position during entire procedure).
4. Start the engine on the good truck, place the
hoist control in the power down position and
increase engine rpm to high idle to dump the
disabled truck. If the body of the disabled truck
fails to raise, increase the good truck power
down relief pressure as follows:
a. Shut down engine and allow the hydraulic
system to bleed down.
L08032
L8-23
NOTES:
L8-24
L08032
SECTION L9
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FILTERS
INDEX
L09008
L9-1
NOTES
L9-2
L09008
L09008
8. Set Screw
9. Filter Element
10. Bowl
11. Drain Plug
12. O-Ring
13. Bottom Plug
L9-3
L9-4
L09008
L09008
6. Filter Element
7. Bowl
8. O-Ring
9. Drain Plug
L9-5
INDICATOR SWITCH
Test Procedure
1. With the key switch OFF allow at least 90 seconds for the accumulators to bleed down.
2. Disconnect wiring harness and remove switch
from filter head.
3. Install switch in test block. Connect pressure
tester to pipe nipple. Reconnect wires to switch.
4. Turn key switch on. Pump up pressure to test
block while observing tester gauge and hydraulic oil filter warning light in cab. Light should turn
on at 35 5 psi (240 34.5 kPa). If not, test
bulb and switch as follows:
a. If lamp fails to light, remove wire (circuit #39)
from switch and short to ground. If warning
lamp does not light, replace bulb.
b. If lamp lights when wire #39 is grounded in
previous step, use an ohmeter to verify
switch contacts close at 35 5 psid (240
35 kPa).
5. If switch contacts fail to close, replace switch
assembly.
NOTE: The hydraulic filter warning lamp may be
activated by either the hoist or steering/brake circuit
filter indicator switches.
L9-6
L09008
L09008
L9-7
NOTES
L9-8
L09008
SECTION L10
HYDRAULIC CHECK-OUT PROCEDURE
INDEX
L10015
L10-1
NOTES
L10-2
L010015
L10015
L10-3
Equipment Requirements
The following equipment will be necessary to properly check-out the hydraulic steering circuit
Hydraulic schematic, refer to Section R.
Two 0-5000 psi (0-35,000 kPa) range calibrated
pressure gauges and hoses.
A graduated container marked to measure liquid
volume in cubic inches or milliliters.
L10-4
3. Compensator Adjustment
4. GPA Port
L010015
L10015
L10-5
4. Relief Valve
Adjustment
8. Remove vacuum source. Remove test equipment and reinstall all remaining hoses to their
proper location.
9. Turn key switch to OFF position to allow steering accumulators to bleed down.
L10-6
L010015
Equipment Requirements
The following equipment will be necessary to properly test the steering circuit shock and suction valves:
Hydraulic schematic, refer to Section R.
Three 0-5000 psi (0-35,000 kPa) range calibrated
pressure gauges and hoses.
Before the shock and suction valves in the steering
circuit can be tested, steering system pressure must
be increased to obtain sufficient pressure for testing.
In addition, the steering relief valve pressure must be
raised above the pressure required to actuate the
shock and suction valves.
L10015
L10-7
Equipment Requirements
The following equipment will be necessary to properly check-out the hoist relief and brake cooling circuit pressures:
Hydraulic schematics, refer to Section R.
Three 0-3500 psi (0-25,000 kPa) range calibrated
pressure gauges and hoses for hoist circuit
pressure readings.
Two 0-100 psi (0-1000 kPa) low pressure gauges
and hoses for brake cooling circuit pressure
readings.
Note: Hydraulic oil temperature
approximately 70F (21C) during test.
should
be
3. Brake/Hoist Return
Manifold
4. Overcenter Manifold
L10-8
L010015
Be sure there is adequate (safe) overhead clearance before raising body to full up position.
Adjustment
If hoist relief pressure is incorrect on either gauge,
the corresponding relief valve should be readjusted.
Adjust relief valve in rear hoist valve inlet section if
the rear pump section pressure was incorrect and/or
adjust the relief valve in front hoist valve inlet section
if the front pump section pressure was incorrect.
1. If power up relief pressure is incorrect in either
the front or rear inlet section, adjust pressure as
follows:
a. Lower body until it is resting on frame rails
and shut down engine. Wait at least 90 seconds until accumulators bleed down.
b. Relieve all hydraulic pressure from hoist system.
L10015
6. Sleeve
7. Secondary Low
Pressure Valve
8. O-Rings
9. Inlet Valve body
L10-9
2. Start engine and run at low idle. Allow the accumulators to fill and the steering pump to unload.
3. With the body resting on the frame and engine
at low idle, place hoist lever in the power down
position.
Pressure at the test port TPD on the
overcenter manifold should be 1500 75 psi
(10,340 517 kPa).
* Record on Data Sheet
Adjustment
1. If power down relief pressure is not within specifications, adjust as follows:
a. Remove cap from power down relief valve
(2, Figure 10-6).
1.) To increase power down relief pressure,
turn adjusting screw in (clockwise).
2.) To decrease power down relief pressure,
turn adjusting screw counter-clockwise.
L10-10
2. Relief Valve
L010015
L10015
L10-11
Flushing Procedure
1. Set all controls in the NEUTRAL position. Do
not steer the truck or operate controls until the
next step is completed.
2. Start the engine and run at 1000 RPM for five
minutes. This will circulate oil with all valves in
the neutral position.
3. To increase flow and turbulence in the system,
increase engine speed to full throttle and maintain for four minutes. This will carry contaminates to the hydraulic tank.
4. Shut down engine and turn key switch OFF.
Allow at least 90 seconds for the accumulators
to bleed down.
5. Close the brake accumulator bleed down
valves on the brake manifold (opened in step
2.c. of Preparation)
6. To enable full extension of the hoist cylinders,
disconnect hoist limit solenoid on bottom of
bleeddown manifold.
7. Start engine and run at 1000 RPM while performing the following:
a. Steer truck full left then full right - repeat ten
times.
b. Steer full left (keeping pressure against the
steering wheel) and hold for 10 seconds.
c. Steer full right (keeping pressure against the
steering wheel) and hold for 10 seconds.
NOTE: Hydraulic tank oil temperature should be 110
- 130F (43 - 54C) after accomplishing Step 6. If
not, repeat Step 3 to increase oil temperature to the
proper operating range.
8. Increase engine speed to full throttle and steer
full left and full right.
9. Return all controls to NEUTRAL.
L10-12
L010015
L10015
L10-13
NOTES
L10-14
L010015
L10015
L10-15
Operate hydraulic system to obtain proper operating temperature. Refer to Check-out Procedures.
L10-16
L010015
SECTION M
OPTIONS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
INDEX
M01043
Index
M1-1
NOTES
M1-2
Index
M01043
SECTION M2
FIRE CONTROL SYSTEMS
INDEX
M02005
M2-1
NOTES
M2-2
M02005
Actuators
Check Valves
Operation
To actuate the fire control system, pull the safety ring
on either of the actuators and depress the lever. One
actuator is located in the cab near the operator.
Another actuator is located on the left fender structure near the bumper.
NOTE: Operating either actuator will activate fire
control system.
When either actuator is depressed, a nitrogen cartridge will pressurize the dry chemical tank. Once the
dry chemical tank has pressurized to a sufficient
pressure, a bursting disc in the tank outlet will break,
allowing the fluidized chemical to flow to the nozzles.
The nozzles will direct the agent at the fire and extinguish the flames.
M02005
5. Actuator Receiver
6. Cartridge
7. Bursting Disc Union
8. Dry Chemical Tank
M2-3
Recharging Procedures
After actuating the fire control system, the system
should be recharged. Follow the procedure below for
each dry chemical tank and actuator installed:
M2-4
M02005
Control Module
(Figure 2-4):
Provides the electrical connections necessary
between the power lead and the linear detection
wire to the power lead supplying electrical power,
via the squib, to the actuator. Also provides a visual
check of power availability - pressing the switch button will illuminate the green indicator light if electrical power is available in the system.
M02005
M2-5
Actuator
(Figure 2-6)
Provides automatic and manual means of fire suppression system actuation. By pulling the ring pin
under the knob and then depressing the red knob,
the puncture pin will rupture the diaphragm in the
actuator and apply the system. Automatically, the
squib is fixed to rupture the cartridge disc when the
linear detection wire is exposed to temperatures in
excess of its rated range.
FIGURE 2-8. POWER WIRE
Test Kit
(Figure 2-9):
Provides for checking of electrical continuity and consists of an indicator light assembly and an End-ofLine linear detection wire jumper assembly.
M2-6
Squib
(Figure 2-10)
Is an electrically detonated component containing a
small exact charge of powder. When the actuation
circuit is closed by the linear detection wire melting,
an internal wiring bridge in the squib heats up causing the power charge to detonate, forcing the puncture pin to rupture the cartridge disc to release the
nitrogen gas charge.
M02005
M02005
M2-7
M2-8
M02005
FIGURE 2-18.
FIGURE 2-19.
M02005
M2-9
Daily
The machine operator should manually test system
power by pushing the button and noting illumination
of indicator light. This confirms battery power is available. If light is not illuminated, refer to "Troubleshooting" covered in this section.
Normal Maintenance Based On Actual Operating
Hours
Total system should be checked monthly or sooner,
depending on working conditions or truck maintenance to perform total system check.
NOTE: The squib should be replaced after being in
service for five years. The proper disposal of the old
squib should be done by actuating the squib within
the actuator body. To do this, remove actuator LT-5-R
cartridge (PB0674) from body. Install test jumper
assembly to end of linear detection wire assembly.
This jumper will service as a wiring short and cause
the squib to discharge.
M2-10
M02005
10. Remove the test kit from the system by disconnecting the squib connector from the test module (Figure 2-24).
IN CASE OF FIRE
Procedure to follow during and after a fire. In the
event of a fire, the following steps should be taken:
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Manually activate fire suppression system, if
possible.
3. Move away from the machine taking a hand
portable extinguisher along if you can.
4. Stand-by with a portable fire extinguisher to put
out any possible re-ignition of the fire after the
fire suppression system is expended.
Explanation of the above steps.
1. If you leave the machine running, it may add
fuel to the fire or restart the fire with sparks.
2. May help put fire down more quickly.
3. By leaving the immediate fire area, you protect
yourself from windblown flames, explosions or
other dangers created by the fire.
M02005
M2-11
What to Expect
When a fire suppression system discharges, there is
some noise, accompanied by clouds of dry chemical.
While breathing foreign particles is not pleasant, the
agent is non-toxic.
What to Do After the Fire is Out
The machinery should not be restarted until it has
been serviced and cleaned (water spray or steam
may be used to remove the dry chemical). If the electric detection and actuation system cannot be
recharged immediately, at least recharge the remainder of the fire suppression system so that manually
actuated protection is available.
Recharging the Electric Detection and Actuation
System
The recharge of the electric detection and actuation
system is similar to the original procedure for installing and placing the automatic detection system into
service. Follow these procedures as outlined previously in this manual, omitting the section which deals
with mounting the bracket and power wire.
Replace the entire length(s) of detection wire
involved in the fire area.
Before the system is put back into service, it is important that the inside chamber of the actuator be
cleaned thoroughly. Failure to do so may cause
excessive carbon build-up on the internal O-ring and
piston chamber. This build- up will also stop the
puncture pin from returning to its up-most position.
To clean actuator (See Figure 2-25):
1. Remove squib.
2. Remove actuator from bracket and loosen
upper portion of body.
3. Apply pressure to the bottom of the puncture
pin. This will force out the puncture pin and
spring.
M2-12
M02005
Dead battery
Wire broken
Dead battery
M02005
M2-13
NOTES
M2-14
M02005
SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number
Description
EB1759
Nitrogen
Charging Kit
Use
Suspension &
Accumulator
Nitrogen Charging
1. T Handle Valve
2. Charging Valve Adapter
3. Manifold Outlet Valves (from gauge)
4. Inlet Valve (from regulator)
5. Regulator Valve (Nitrogen Pressure)
6. Manifold
7. Charging Pressure Gauge (Suspensions)
8. Dry Nitrogen Gas
NOTE: Arrangement of parts may vary from
illustration shown, depending on Charging Kit P/N.
Part Number
Description
Use
EJ2626
Roller Assy.
Power Module
Remove & Install
(No longer
available as
complete unit)
EJ2271
Roller Mount
PC0706
Bearing
TH9449
Bearing
Retainer
Ring
TG1680
Roller
Retainer
Ring
C1645
Capscrew
0.75 -10 NC
x 2 1/4 in.
C1542
Lockwasher
0.75 in.
EH8686
M08015
Roller Ring
Special Tools
M8-1
Part Number
Description
PB8326
Use
Miscellaneous &
Cab Mounting
1 7/16 in.
M8-2
Part Number
Description
TZ2734
Part Number
Description
TZ2733
Tubular Handle
Part Number
Description
BF4117
Seal Installation
Tool
ED3347
Seal Installation
Tool
Rear Axle/Hub
Adaptor Floating Ring Seal
Installation
Special Tools
Use
Miscellaneous
Use
Use with
PB8326 &
TZ2734
Use
M08015
Part Number
Description
Use
EH4638
Part Number
Description
Use
EF9302
Wear Indicator
EB1723
Cap, Indicator
EF9301
Pin, Indicator
WA0010
TL3995
EB4813
Housing, Indicator
SV9812
O-ring, Housing
Part Number
Description
EF9160
Harness
M08015
Brake Disc
Wear, Refer to
Section J
Use
Payload Meter
Download, Refer
to Section M,
Payload Meter
Special Tools
M8-3
Part Number
Description
EH7817
Alignment Tool
Part Number
Description
PB4684
Hydraulic Coupling
Part Number
Description
PB9067
Bulkhead Connector
M8-4
Use
Upper Hoist Pin
Use
Miscellaneous
Use
Battery Jumper
Special Tools
M08015
M08015
Special Tools
M8-5
Description
930E-2
"A"
Plate Bolt
Hole Diameter
1.37 in.
(34.8 mm)
"B"
Plate O.D.
22.75 in.
(577.9 mm)
"C"
Bolt Circle
Diameter
20.38 in.
(517.7 mm)
"D"
Plate I.D.
2.00 in.
(50.8 mm)
"E"
Plate Thickness
1.37 in.
(34.8 mm)
"F"
Pusher
Cylinder Height
5.25 in.
(133.4 mm)
"G"
Pusher
Cylinder O.D.
12.62 in.
(320.6 mm)
"H"
Pusher
Cylinder I.D.
9.00 in.
(228.6 mm)
"I"
Cylinder Wall
Thickness
1.81 in.
(46.0 mm)
M8-6
Special Tools
M08015
SECTION M20
PAYLOAD METER III
INDEX
M20008 11/03
M20-1
M20-2
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-3
M20-4
11/03 M20008
OPERATION SECTION
INTRODUCTION
Payload Meter III (PLMIII) measures, displays and
records the weight of material being carried by an offhighway truck. The system generally consists of a
payload meter, a gauge display, deck-mounted lights,
and sensors. The primary sensors are four suspension pressures and an inclinometer. Other inputs
include a body up signal, brake lock signal, and
speed.
Data Summary
5208 haul cycles can be stored in memory. The following information is recorded for each haul cycle:
Payload
Operator ID number (0000-9999)
Distance traveled loaded and empty
The amount of time spent empty run/stop,
loading, loaded run/stop, and dumping
Data Gathering
Windows 95/98/NT software is available to download, store and view payload and fault information.
The PC software will download an entire truck fleet
into one Paradox database file. Users can query the
database by date, time, truck type and truck number
to produce reports, graphs and export the data. The
software can export the data in '.CSV' format that can
be easily imported into most spreadsheet applications. The Windows software is not compatible with
the Payload Meter II system.
It is important that each payload meter be configured
for each truck using the PC software. The information for frame serial number and truck number is
used by the database program to organize the payload data. In addition, the payload meter must be
configured to make calculations for the proper truck
model. Improper configuration can lead to data loss
and inaccurate payload calculations.
M20008 11/03
M20-5
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
System Diagram
Operator Display
The speedometer/display gauge is used as a speedometer and payload display. The top display is used
for speed and can display metric (km/h) or English
(mph) units. Grounding terminal #4 on the back of
the speedometer will switch the meter to display metric units. Leaving terminal #4 unconnected will cause
the gauge to display English units. The speedometer
can be adjusted using a calibration potentiometer in
the back just like existing speedometers.
Inclinometer
The inclinometer is used to increase the accuracy of
load calculations on an incline. The inclinometer
uses three wires. For the sensor, red is the +18vdc
supply voltage, black is ground and the white is the
signal. The incline signal is a voltage between 1 and
4 volts. Zero degrees of incline is represented by
2.6vdc on the signal line. The voltage signal will be
decreased by 0.103vdc for every degree of nose up
incline. A typical part number for the inclinometer
assembly is 7861-92-5330.
M20-6
The payload meter uses the lower display for payload information. The normal display mode shows
the current payload. The display can be changed to
show the load and total tons counter or the Operator
ID. Using the operator switch on the dash panel, the
current suspension pressures and incline can be displayed. The units for display are set using the PC
software. Payloads can be displayed in Short Tons,
Long Tons or Metric Tons. A typical part number for
this gauge is the PC0550.
11/03 M20008
Operator Switch
Payload Meter
Speed Input
PLMIII uses a speed signal to calculate speed, distance, and other performance data. This input is critical to the proper operation of the system. PLMIII
receives this signal from the speedometer/operator
display on the dashboard. The same signal displayed to the operator is used by the system. Distance calculations are made based on the rolling
radius of the tires for a particular truck.
Body-Up Switch
The payload meter has two RS232 serial communications ports and two CAN ports. Connections for
the two serial ports are available inside the payload
meter junction box. The two CAN ports are available
for future electronics systems.
The Body-Up input signal is received from a magnetic switch located on the inside of the truck frame,
forward the pivot pin of the truck body. This is the
same switch typically used for input to the drive system. When the body is down, the switch closes and
completes the circuit to 71-Control Power. 24vdc
indicates the body is down. Open circuit indicates
that the body is up.
Brake Lock Switch
The brake lock is used to lock the rear brakes on the
truck. It is necessary for the accurate calculation of
swingloads during the loading process. Without the
brake lock applied, the payload meter will not calculate swingloads during the loading process. Without
the brake lock, the payload meter will assume that
the truck was loaded using a continuous loader and
flag the haul cycle record. All other functions will be
normal regardless of brake lock usage. The brake
lock input comes from the switch located on the dash
panel. The brake lock switch connects the circuit to
ground.
Open circuit indicates brake lock off.
Ground indicates brake lock on.
M20008 11/03
Communications Ports
Serial port #1 is used to communicate with the dashboard display. It is also used to connect to the laptop
computer. The display gauge will remain blank when
the PC is using the serial port. This port initially operates with serial settings at 9600,8,N,1. These settings change automatically to increase the
communications rate when the PC is using the port.
This serial port uses a 3-wire hardware connection.
Serial port #2 is used to communicate to other onboard electronics like Modular Mining's Dispatch
system or the Scoreboard from Komatsu. This port
uses a 3-wire hardware connection. Connections to
this serial port need to be approved by Komatsu.
Several protocol options are available and detailed
technical information is available depending on
licensing.
M20-7
Keyswitch Input
Load Lights
PLMIII uses load lights to indicate to the shovel operator the approximate weight of the material in the
truck. The load lights are illuminated only when the
brake lock is applied. The lights are controlled by the
payload meter through a series of relays in the junction box. The payload meter controls the relays with
24vdc outputs. A 24vdc signal from the payload
meter powers the relay coil and connects battery
power to the load light. When the relay is not powered by the payload meter, a pre-warm resistor connects the load light to a reduced voltage. This circuit
pre-warms the load light filaments and reduces the
inrush current when the light is fully illuminated. This
lengthens the operating life of the load lights.
The payload meter receives its power from the battery circuit on the truck. Removing battery power
from the payload meter before removing keyswitch
and waiting 15 seconds may result in lost haul cycle
data. The payload meter turns itself off approximately
15 seconds after the keyswitch power is removed.
Some haul cycle data will be lost if battery power is
removed before waiting 15 seconds. The payload
meter system operates at a nominal voltage of 24vdc
at 1 to 2 amps depending on options. The payload
meter is designed to turn itself off if the supply voltage rises above 36vdc. The payload meter is also
protected by a 5 amp circuit breaker located in the
junction box.
Power to the load lights comes from the same battery
circuit. The load lights are powered through a relay.
The keyswitch circuit controls the relay. The load
lights are also protected by a 15 amp circuit breaker
in the junction box.
M20-8
11/03 M20008
TCI Outputs
The GE drive system on the 930E requires information from the payload meter regarding the loaded
condition of the truck. There are three outputs from
the payload meter to GE to indicate the relative load
in the truck. 24 vdc on the 73MSL circuit indicates
that the load is 70% of rated load. 24 vdc on the
73FSL circuit indicates the truck is 100% loaded.
The 73OSL circuit is not currently used.
M20008 11/03
M20-9
PL= Payload
Id= Operator ID
tL= Total Shift Tons
LC= Shift Load Counter
LF= Left Front Suspension Pressure
rF= Right Front Suspension Pressure
Lr= Left Rear Suspension Pressure
rr= Right Rear Suspension Pressure
In= Inclinometer
432
shows
the total tons is 43,200. This display
can be cleared at the beginning of each shift to allow
the operator to record how many tons have been
hauled during the shift. The units are selected using
the PC software.
To view the Total Ton Counter press and release
the SELECT switch until
the gauge.
M20-10
tL= is displayed on
11/03 M20008
LC= is displayed on
being displayed,
minute.
display this information.
rf= is displayed.
Lf= is displayed.
tL=
LC= is displayed.
2. Hold the SET button until the display clears.
Lr= is displayed.
rr= is displayed.
M20008 11/03
In=
is
----930E---.
ER88
play
where 88 is the specific memory
error. In this very rare circumstance, the system
should be turned off for 30 seconds and restarted.
M20-11
M20-12
11/03 M20008
Load Calculation
The final load calculation is different from the last
swingload calculation. The accuracy of the swing
load calculation depends on loading conditions and
the position of the truck during loading. The last
swingload calculation is not the value recorded in
memory as the final load. The final load is determined by a series of calculations made while the
truck is traveling to the dump site.
Carry Back
Carry back is calculated as the difference between
the current truck tare and the clean truck tare. The
clean truck tare is calculated using the PC software.
When the suspensions are serviced or changes are
made that may affect the sprung weight of the truck,
a new clean truck tare should be calculated.
Measurement Accuracy
Payload measurements are typically repeatable
within 1%. Accuracy for a particular scale test
depends on specific combinations of pressure sensors and payload meters as well as the specifics of
each scale test. Comparisons from different scale
tests are often made without considering the differences introduced by the specific installation and
operation of the scales for each test. In addition,
each pressure sensor and payload meter introduces
it's own non-linearity. Each truck becomes an individual combination of sensors and payload meter.
Errors from these sources can introduce up to a 7%
bias in the payload meter calculations for a specific
scale test, for an individual truck.
Because the PLMIII calculates a new empty tare for
each payload, a detailed scale test must weigh the
trucks empty and loaded for each haul cycle. Using
a simple average of 2 or 3 empty truck weights as an
empty tare for the entire scale test will introduce significant error when comparing scale weights to
PLMIII weights.
M20008 11/03
Payload Error
The number one source of error in payload calculation is improperly serviced suspensions. The payload meter calculates payload by measuring
differences in the sprung weight of the truck when it
is empty and when it is loaded. The sprung weight is
the weight of the truck supported by the suspensions.
The only method for determining sprung weight is by
measuring the pressure of the nitrogen gas in the
suspensions. If the suspensions are not properly
maintained, the payload meter cannot determine an
accurate value for payload. The two critical factors
are proper oil height and proper nitrogen charge.
If the suspensions are overcharged, the payload
meter will not be able to determine the empty sprung
weight of the truck. The suspension cylinder must be
able to travel up and down as the truck drives empty.
The pressure in an overcharged suspension can
push the suspension rod to full extension. In this
case, the pressure inside the cylinder does not accurately represent the force necessary to support that
portion of the truck.
If the suspensions are undercharged, the payload
meter will not be able to determine the loaded sprung
weight of the truck. The suspension cylinder must be
able to travel up and down as the truck drives loaded.
If the pressure in an undercharged suspension cannot support the load, the suspension will collapse
and make metal-to-metal contact. In this case, the
pressure inside the cylinder does not accurately represent the force necessary to support that portion of
the truck.
Low oil height can also introduce errors by not correctly supporting a loaded truck. This is why the correct oil height and nitrogen charge are the most
critical factors in the measurement of payload. If the
suspensions are not properly maintained, accurate
payload measurement is not possible. In addition,
suspension maintenance is very important to the life
of the truck.
M20-13
Loading Conditions
Pressure Sensors
Swingloads
Swingload calculations can be affected by conditions
at the loading site. Parking the truck against the
berm or large debris can cause the payload meter to
inaccurately calculate individual swingloads. While
the PLMIII system uses an advanced calculation
algorithms to determine swingloads, loading site conditions can affect the accuracy.
M20-14
11/03 M20008
Unit
Remark
Truck #
alphanumeric
Up to 22 characters can be stored in this field to identify the truck. Typically this field will be just the
truck number.
seconds
Number of seconds from 1/1/70 to the start of the haul cycle, haul cycle starts when the meter transitions from dumping to empty state after the previous haul cycle, download program converts seconds
into date and time for display
Payload
tons
Stored as metric, download program allows for conversion to short or long tons.
Number of Swingloads
number
Operator ID
number
This is a 4 digit number that can be entered by the operator at the start of the shift.
Warning Flags
alpha
Each letter represents a particular warning message about the haul cycle, details are located on page
19.
Carry-back load
tons
The difference between the latest empty tare and the clean truck tare
seconds
Number of seconds in the tare_zone and empty states with the truck moving
seconds
Number of seconds in the tare_zone and empty states with the truck stopped
Loading time
seconds
seconds
Number of seconds in the maneuvering, final_zone and loaded states with the truck moving
seconds
Number of seconds in the maneuvering, final_zone and loaded states with the truck stopped
Dumping time
seconds
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to when the meter transitions from empty to loading
state
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the meter switches from loaded to
dumping state
km/h
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the max speed occurred
km/h
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the max speed occurred
ton-meter
Positive frame torque is measured as the frame twists in the clockwise direction as viewed from the
operators seat.
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak torque, download program converts to
time for display
ton-meter
Negative frame torque is measured as the frame twists in the counter-clockwise direction as viewed
from the operator's seat.
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak torque, download program converts to
time for display
tons
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak instantaneous load calculation
Front-left tire-ton-km/h
t-km/h
Front-right tire-ton-km/h
t-km/h
t-km/h
alpha
The truck serial number from the nameplate on the truck frame
Reserved 1-10
number
These values are internal calculations used in the continued development of the PLMIII system and
should be ignored
M20008 11/03
M20-15
A: Continuous Loading
This message is generated when the truck is loaded
over 50% full without the payload meter sensing
swingloads. This indicates that a continuous loading
operation was used to load the truck. It may also
indicate that the payload meter did not receive the
Brake Lock input while the truck was being loaded.
There may be a problem with the wiring or the Brake
Lock was not used. The payload meter will not measure swingloads unless the Brake Lock is used during the loading process.
B: Loading to Dumping Transition
This message indicates that the body was raised during the haul cycle without the load being dumped.
The Body-Up signal indicated that the truck was
dumping, but the weight of the truck did not fall below
20% of the rated load.
I: Body Up Signal Failed
This message indicates that the load was dumped
without a Body-Up signal being received by the payload meter. The weight of the truck fell below 20%,
but the payload meter did not receive a Body-Up signal from the sensor.
C: No Final Load
The payload meter was not able to accurately calculate a new empty sprung weight for the truck to use
as the tare value for the haul cycle. The tare value
from the last haul cycle was used to calculate payload.
M20-16
11/03 M20008
Alarm Records
The payload meter stores alarm records to give service personnel a working history of the system. All
codes are viewed using the PC connected to the
payload meter. Active codes are also displayed on
the two-digit display on the meter itself. Each code
has a specific cause and should lead to an investigation for correction. Some failures can be overcome
by the payload meter. Haul cycle data will indicate if
an alarm condition was present during the cycle.
Failures with the suspension or inclinometer sensors
cannot be overcome.
Name
Description
Inclinometer high
10
Inclinometer low
13
16
Indicates possible memory problem at power start up. Cycle power and recheck.
17
Indicates possible memory problem at power start up. Cycle power and recheck.
24
Payload Meter failed to correctly start at power up. Cycle power and recheck.
26
Select switch on for more than 2 minutes, may indicate short to ground
27
Set switch on for more than 2 minutes, may indicate short to ground
M20008 11/03
M20-17
System Configuration
PC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
Installing the PLMIII Software
PC Overview
The CD ROM containing the Payload Data Management (PDM) Software will automatically begin installation when it is inserted into the drive on the PC. If
this does not happen, the software can be installed
by running the Setup.exe program on the CD ROM.
M20-18
The minimum PC requirements for running the software is a Pentium 133Mhz with 64 MB of ram and at
least 300 MB of free hard drive space available. For
improved performance, the recommended PC would
be a Celeron, AMD K6-2 or better processor with 128
MB of ram running at 400 Mhz. The PDM Software
uses a powerful database to manipulate the large
amounts of data gathered from the PLMIII system.
Using a more powerful computer and added memory
to run the software can result in a significant improvement in performance. The software is written to use
a minimum 800x600 screen resolution.
11/03 M20008
DOWNLOADING DATA
PLMIII records many types of data. The PLMIII PC
software is designed to download the data from a
whole truck fleet. Instead of creating one data file for
each truck, the PC software combines all the data
from many trucks into one database on the hard
drive of the computer. The software then allows
users to query the database to create custom reports
and graphs. Data for individual trucks or groups of
trucks can be easily analyzed. This same data can
be exported for use in other software applications like
word processors and spreadsheet applications.
As the database grows, performance of the PC software for analysis will slow down. It may be helpful to
periodically export data. For example, query the
database to show the oldest quarter, month, or half
year and print out a summary report. Then export
the data to a compressed format and save the file in
a secure location. Once the data is exported, delete
the entire query results from the database. If necessary, the data can easily be imported back into the
main database for analysis at a future date. Removing this older data will improve performance.
The PC software downloads the data from the payload meter into a single Paradox database. The data
from all the trucks is added to the same database.
Downloading the payload meter can take several
minutes. The data is added to the database on the
laptop used to download.
To move the data to another computer, a query must
be run to isolate the particular data for export. Do not
press the operator switch on the dashboard while
downloading
M20008 11/03
M20-19
Short Tons: Payload is displayed in short tons, distances and speeds will be displayed in Miles
Starting Communications
The PDM software allows users to download and
configure the system.
Metric Tons: Payload is displayed in metric tons, distances and speeds are displayed in Kilometers
Long Tons: Payload is displayed in long tons, distances and speeds are displayed in Miles
Time Units
Minutes and Seconds Example:
Five minutes and thirty-two seconds = 5:32
Decimal Minutes Example:
Five minutes and thirty-two seconds = 5.53
Connection Menu
M20-20
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-21
M20-22
This field in the haul cycle record can hold the name
of the mine or operation where the truck is in service.
Komatsu also assigns a customer number to each
customer. This number is used on all warranty
claims. This Komatsu customer number can also be
put into this field. The field will hold 20 alphanumeric characters.
11/03 M20008
Inclinometer Calibration
M20008 11/03
M20-23
DATA ANALYSIS
PAYLOAD SUMMARY FORM
Creating a Query
The program defaults to show all trucks, all types, all
dates and all times for the initial query. The display
can be narrowed by selecting which trucks or types
to view and for what dates and times.
The query items are added in the "AND" condition. If
the user selects a truck # and date range, the query
will sort the data for that truck number AND the date
range.
M20-24
11/03 M20008
Jan 5, 2000
Jan 6, 2000
Jan 7, 2000
Jan 8, 2000
Jan 9, 2000
0:00
6:00
12:00
M20008 11/03
18:00
24:00
Query : Date: 1/5/00 to 1/8/00
Daily Shift Time: 6:00 to 18:00
M20-25
Creating Reports
Date
Time
Jan 5, 2000
Jan 6, 2000
Jan 7, 2000
Jan 8, 2000
Jan 9, 2000
0:00
6:00
12:00
24:00
Query : Date: 1/5/00 to 1/8/00
Daily Shift Time: 18:00 to 6:00
M20-26
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-27
Exporting Data
Creating Graphs
The PLMIII software can generate graphs that
quickly summarize payload data. These graphs can
be customized for printing. Just like the reports, the
graphs are generated from the query displayed on
the Payload Summary screen. From the "Sorting
on Time Range" example, the graph that is printed
would only contain data from truck 374 during the
month of July 2000, from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM.
It is important to carefully select the query data and
press the "Query Database & Display" button before
creating a graph.
1. From the Payload Summary Screen select the
Graph button at the bottom. The Histogram
Setup screen will display
CSV Export
2. Enter the "Lowest Value". This will be the lowest payload on the graph. Any payloads less
than this value will be summed in the first bar.
3. Enter the "Highest Value". This will be the highest value on the graph. Payloads over this
value will be summed in the last bar.
4. Enter the "Incremental Change". This will
determine the number of bars and the distance
between them. The program limits the number
of bars to 20. This allows graphs to fit on the
screen and print onto 1 page.
5. Press the Create Graph button.
The graph will be displayed based on the query settings from the Payload Summary screen. The graph
can be customized and printed.
M20-28
11/03 M20008
Truck number
Haul cycle start date
Haul cycle start time
Payload
Swingloads
Operator ID
Warning Flags
Carry Back
Total Haul Cycle time
Empty Running Time
Empty stop time
Loading time
Loaded running time
Loaded stopped time
Dumping time
Loading start time
Dumping start time
Loaded haul distance
Empty haul distance
Loaded maximum speed
Time when loaded maximum speed occurred
Empty maximum speed
Time when loaded maximum speed occurred
Maximum + frame torque
Time when the maximum + frame torque
occurred
Maximum - frame torque
Time when the maximum - frame torque
occurred
Maximum sprung weight calculation
Time when the maximum sprung weight
calculation occurred
Left Front Tire-kilometer-hour
Right Front Tire-kilometer-hour
Average Rear Tire-kilometer-hour
Frame serial number
M20008 11/03
Compressed
M20-29
M20-30
11/03 M20008
Viewing Alarms
From the Payload Summary screen, click the
Alarms button to display the alarm screen. The
alarms are sorted by the query settings from the Payload Summary screen. Alarms can be displayed as
Active or Inactive.
M20008 11/03
M20-31
TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION
TROUBLESHOOTING
M20-32
11/03 M20008
Daily Inspections
Periodic Maintenance
It is recommended that the following items be
checked every 500 hours:
Confirm the suspension pressures using external
gauges.
Confirm proper suspension height.
Confirm suspensions do not collapse and make
metal-to-metal contact when the truck is loaded.
Confirm that inclinometer indicates positive (+)
values for truck nose up, and negative (-) values
for truck nose down.
In addition, it may be useful to confirm proper operation of the suspensions by riding the truck during a
complete haul cycle. Record the suspension pressures using the CSV log file tool in the Payload Data
Manager software for the PC. The suspension pressures in this log file can be graphed to inspect for flat
or overcharged suspensions.
M20008 11/03
M20-33
If these errors persist after reprogramming, the primary and secondary processors then the payload meter
must be replaced.
M20-34
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-35
No Display on Speedometer
No Display on Operator Display
If the speedometer works but the operator displays remain blank, confirm payload connections at No Payload
Display When Keyswitch is Turned ON.
M20-36
11/03 M20008
No Communications With PC
In a case where the laptop PC will not properly connect to the PLMIII system:
Confirm power to the payload meter.
Confirm laptop serial port setting using the PC software. From the mail menu select "Change Program
Options". Confirm that the selected serial port is correct and that it is available.
Confirm that a Personal Digital Assistants (PDA) synchronization software is not using the serial port. Often,
PDA software like Palm Pilots HotSync software will take control of the serial port and not let other applications
use the serial connection. Close the synchronization software and retry the Payload Data Manager software.
Confirm Operator Switch use. If this switch works properly, it confirms that the communications wiring between
the payload meter and the junction box is functional.
Before the beginning of troubleshooting, turn keyswitch OFF. Wait 1 minute and turn keyswitch ON.
M20008 11/03
M20-37
M20-38
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-39
Calibration Problems
Confirm that the truck is empty and clean.
Confirm that the payload meter is in the proper haul state. The payload meter must be in the empty, or tare
zone states to begin calibration. This can be checked by using the real-time monitor mode of the Payload Data
Manager software.
The payload meter can be reset to acknowledge the beginning of a new haul cycle by raising the body when
the truck is empty. This may be necessary after servicing the suspensions.
M20-40
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-41
M20-42
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-43
M20-44
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-45
The payload meter senses when the load is dumped without receiving a body-up signal. When the load quickly
drops below 50% without the body up signal, Alarm 13 is set. The alarm will be cleared when a normal dump cycle
is detected. A normal dump cycle will be detected when the body up signal is received, the load drops quickly and
the body down signal is received.
M20-46
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
M20-47
M20-48
11/03 M20008
Connector Map
This diagram shows the general location of connectors, terminal boards and miscellaneous connections.
M20008 11/03
M20-49
Connectors
M20-50
11/03 M20008
General Description
The process consists of attaching dummy loads in
place of the suspension pressure sensors and
checking the pressures indicated by the payload
meter. In addition, connecting to the payload meter
using a laptop PC in order to confirm the latest software version and the rest of the inputs and outputs of
the system.
Tools Required
Payload Data Manager software
EF9160 - Download Harness
EJ3057 - Harness Str, PLMIII test (4 needed).
Checkout Procedure
1. Attach one EJ3057 Harness Structure to the
left-front suspension connection box. The red
alligator clip attaches to the 39F circuit at TB42A. The white alligator clip attaches to the 39FD
circuit at TB42-B. The EJ3057 acts as a
dummy load to simulate a suspension pressure
sensor for the payload system.
2. Attach one EJ3057 Harness Structure to the
right-front suspension connection box. The red
alligator clip attaches to the 39F circuit at TB41A. The white alligator clip attaches to the 39FC
circuit at TB41-B.
3. Attach one EJ3057 Harness Structure to the
left-rear suspension connection in the Rear suspension connection box. The red alligator clip
attaches to the 39F circuit at TB61-A. The
white alligator clip attaches to the 39FB circuit
at TB61-C.
4. Attach one EJ3057 Harness Structure to the
right-rear suspension connection in the Rear
suspension connection box. The red alligator
clip attaches to the 39F circuit at TB61-A. The
white alligator clip attaches to the 39FA circuit at
TB61-B.
5. In the PLMIII junction box, check the input voltage on circuit 39G between TB45-B and TB45X. This voltage should be 24vdc from the batteries.
6. Turn the keyswitch ON. The speedometer/display gauge on the dashboard will scroll the
truck type across the lower display. The payload meter defaults to 930E.
PL= Payload
Id= Operator ID
tL= Total Shift Tons
LC= Shift Load Counter
LF= Left Front Suspension Pressure
rF= Right Front Suspension Pressure
Lr= Left Rear Suspension Pressure
rr= Right Rear Suspension Pressure
In= Inclinometer
M20008 11/03
M20-51
rr=
In=
dashboard.
will be displayed. Release
the button and the inclinometer value will be
displayed. This value is in degrees. The incline
will depend on how the truck is set during
assembly. Values between 3 are acceptable. It is not necessary to zero this reading by
adjusting the attitude of the inclinometer in the
buddy seat.
mation.
9. Press and hold the SELECT button on the
Id=
tL=
PL=
dashboard.
will be displayed. Release
the button and the current payload will be displayed.
LC=
dashboard.
will be displayed.
Release the button and the number of loads will
be displayed. This value should be 0.
12. Press and hold the SELECT button on the
Lf=
dashboard.
will be displayed. Release
the button and the left-front pressure will be displayed. This value should be in metric units.
The nominal value should be 23.4 kg/cm2
(332psi). Values between 17.6 and 29.2 kg/
cm2 (250 psi and 416 psi ) are acceptable.
18. Connect a laptop to the PLMIII system. Typically an EF9160 download cable is used. The
payload meter connector is behind the buddy
seat on the back wall on the side of the PLMIII
mounting bracket. The laptop must have the
Payload Data Manager software installed.
19. Run the PC software.
20. From the main menu, select "Connect to Payload Meter".
rf=
Lr=
M20-52
11/03 M20008
M20008 11/03
NOTE: This field in the haul cycle record can hold the
name of the Komatsu distributor that helped install
the system. Komatsu also assigns a distributor
number to each distributor. This number is used on
all warranty claims. This Komatsu distributor number
can also be put into this field. This number is one of
the key fields used within the haul cycle database.
The field will hold 20 alpha-numeric characters. If
the distributor is not known, enter "UNKOWN".
On the Truck Configuration screen, enter the distributor name or number in the appropriate field.
Press the "Save Changes" button to program the
change into the payload meter.
27. Setting the Komatsu Customer.
M20-53
NOTE: This field in the haul cycle record can hold the
name of the mine or operation where the truck is in
service. Komatsu also assigns a customer number to
each customer. This number is used on all warranty
claims. This Komatsu customer number can also be
put into this field. This number is one of the key
fields used within the haul cycle database. The field
will hold 20 alpha-numeric characters. If the customer is not known, enter "UNKOWN"
On the Truck Configuration screen, enter the customer name or number in the appropriate field.
Press the "Save Changes" button to program the
chnge into the payload meter.
28. Press "Save Changes" and close the Truck
Configuration screen and the Connection Menu.
29. From the main menu select "Connect to Payload Meter".
30. From the Connection Menu select "Configure
Payload Meter". Confirm that all previous
changes have been saved and close the Truck
Configuration form.
31. From the Connection Menu select "Real Time
Data".
M20-54
11/03 M20008
Flashburn Programming
General Instructions:
Flashburn
1. Power
OFF
2. Select
Port
3. Select
File
4. Power
ON
< Back
Next >
Cancel
M20008 11/03
M20-55
Flashburn
1. Power
OFF
Flashburn
1. Power
OFF
2. Select
Port
2. Select
Port
3. Select
File
COM 1
4. Power
ON
3. Select
File
COM 1
Filename:
071000A.KMS
Status
Steps
Connection:
Complete
Preparation:
Complete
Programming:
Complete
Verification:
4. Power
ON
Complete
61 %
< Back
< Back
Next >
Cancel
Cancel
1. Power
OFF
2. Select
Port
*.KMS
Browse
3. Select
File
4. Power
ON
< Back
Next >
Cancel
M20-56
11/03 M20008
Confirmation Checklist
Use the Real Time Data Screen in order to verify the checklist items in the table below.
Checklist Item
Value
Initials
Date
Truck
Signature
M20008 11/03
M20-57
M20-58
11/03 M20008
SECTION M31
RESERVE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM
INDEX
M31002 12/03
M31-1
NOTES
M31-2
12/03 M31002
M31002 12/03
M31-3
Operation
Engine oil is circulated between engine oil pan (1,
Figure 31-2) and reserve tank (2) by two electrically
driven pumps (pump 1 and pump 2) within a single
pumping unit (4). The pumping unit is mounted on
the side of the reserve tank. The pump unit is
equipped with an LED monitor light on one side.
Pump 1 draws oil from the engine oil pan (1) at a
preset control point determined by the height of the
suction tube (6). Oil above this point is withdrawn
and transferred to the reserve tank. This lowers the
level in the engine oil pan until air is drawn.
M31-4
12/03 M31002
3. Start Switch
4. FULL Light
5. VALVE OPEN
Light
M31002 12/03
M31-5
SERVICE
Changing Oil
M31-6
12/03 M31002
TROUBLESHOOTING
It is important to understand the LED signal for the
pumping unit. It is used primarily to verify that the
system is maintaining the oil level at the level of the
open end of the withdrawal tube in the engine oil pan.
The signal is also a valuable tool in troubleshooting
the system.
When the signal is steady (not flashing), pump 1 is
running and oil is being withdrawn from the engine
and being transferred to the reserve tank.
When the signal is flashing, pump 1 is drawing air
from the suction tube which triggers operation of the
pump 2 to operate and transfer oil back to the engine
from the tank (the flashing is actually the pulses of
pump 2). When the oil is at the correct level in the
engine, air and oil are alternatively entering the suction tube, with pump 1 commanding operation of
pump 2 with each portion of air that comes through
the line.
This is a complete test for proper operation of the
pumping unit. This operation can be accomplished
without running the engine by jumping the oil pressure switch that activates the system.
1. If the signal light is steady, pump 1 should be
pumping oil. Verify by loosening the hose at
pump 1 outlet to verify that oil is coming
through (pump 1 is marked by a groove on its
outlet).
2. Loosen the hose at the inlet of pump 1 to admit
air. Pump 2 should then run and the signal
should be flashing. Verify proper pumping of
pump 2 by loosening the hose at its outlet to
see that oil is coming through.
M31002 12/03
M31-7
M31-8
12/03 M31002
SECTION N
CAB COMPONENTS
INDEX
N01020
Index
N1-1
NOTES
N1-2
Index
N01020
SECTION N2
TRUCK CAB
INDEX
TRUCK CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-3
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-4
Removal - Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-4
Installation - Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-6
CAB DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-6
Door Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-7
Door Jamb Bolt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-7
Door Handle Plunger Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-8
Door Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-9
Door Window Regulator Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-13
Door Handle or Latch Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-13
Door and Door Hinge Seal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-14
Door Opening Seal Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-14
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-14
GLASS REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-15
Adhesive Bonded Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-15
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-15
Windshield And Rear Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-16
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-16
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-17
N02015 06/03
Truck Cab
N2-1
NOTES
N2-2
Truck Cab
06/03 N02015
TRUCK CAB
Description
The truck cab is a fully insulated design incorporating
an integral ROPS structure for maximum operator
comfort and safety. All gauges, switches, and controls have been designed to simplify operation and
are placed within easy reach of the operator. Servicing of cab and associated electrical systems is simplified by use of heavy-duty connectors on the
various wiring harnesses. Hydraulic components are
located outside of the interior and are accessed
through covers (2, Figure 2-1) on the front of the cab.
N02015 06/03
Truck Cab
N2-3
Preparation
1. Reduce the engine speed to idle. Place the
selector switch in NEUTRAL and apply the
parking brake. Be certain the parking brake
applied indicator lamp in the overhead panel is
illuminated.
2. Place the drive system in the rest mode by turning the Rest switch on the instrument panel ON.
Be certain the rest warning lamp is illuminated.
Removal - Cab
After the truck is parked in position for the repairs,
the truck must be shut down properly to ensure the
safety of those working in the areas of the deck, electrical cabinet and retarding grids. The following procedures will ensure the electrical system is properly
discharged before repairs are started.
N2-4
Truck Cab
06/03 N02015
8. Attach a lifting device to the lifting eyes provided on top of the cab.
Federal regulations prohibit venting air conditioning system refrigerants into the atmosphere.
An approved Recovery/Recycle Station must be
used to remove the refrigerant from the air conditioning system.
N02015 06/03
Truck Cab
N2-5
CAB DOOR
The cab door assemblies are similar except for the
hinge side. Each is hinged on the rear edge with a
heavy duty hinge. For repairs on the door latches or
window controls it is usually better, but not necessary, to remove the door from the cab and lower it to
the floor for service.
Removal
1. If overhead space is available, raise body to
allow access to door with overhead hoist.
Secure body in raised position with safety
cables.
Installation - Cab
1. Lift cab assembly and align mounting pad holes
with tapped pads. Insert at least one capscrew
and hardened washer at each of the four pads
prior to lowering cab onto the truck.
3. Route wire harnesses to the electrical connectors on the rear corner of the cab (4, Figure 22). Align cable connector plug key with receptacle key and push plug onto receptacle. Carefully
thread retainer onto receptacle and tighten
securely. Install clamps if removed during cab
removal.
6. Place door on blocks or on a work bench to protect the window glass and allow access to internal components for repair.
Installation
6. Remove caps and reinstall air conditioning system hoses from compressor and receiver/drier.
7. Refer to Section N, Operator Comfort, for
detailed instructions regarding evacuation and
recharging with refrigerant.
8. Close brake accumulator bleed down valves.
N2-6
Truck Cab
06/03 N02015
Door Adjustment
Truck Cab
N2-7
3. Frame
4. Seal
N02015 06/03
4. Door
5. Lower Latch
N2-8
Truck Cab
06/03 N02015
FIGURE 2-6.
4. Wiring Harness
5. Panel Screws
6. Window Regulator
Mounting Screw
6. Remove the mounting screws (3) from the outside door handle. With the door handle
removed, adjust the plunger counter clock wise
to increase the height of the door handle
release button. Lock the plunger capscrew with
locking nut. Apply lock tight to prevent screw
from working loose.
N02015 06/03
Truck Cab
N2-9
FIGURE 2-8.
8. Support glass in door frame as shown (1, Figure 2-9). Remove screws (2) that hold the
adapter for the window regulator track.
FIGURE 2-7.
FIGURE 2-9.
1. Support Block
N2-10
Truck Cab
2. Screws
06/03 N02015
FIGURE 2-10.
1. Screws
FIGURE 2-12.
1. Window Frame
2. Window Bracket
1. Screws
N02015 06/03
Truck Cab
N2-11
FIGURE 2-13.
1. L Shaped Brackets
FIGURE 2-14.
1. Capscrw & Nut
2. Mounting Screws Latch
N2-12
Truck Cab
06/03 N02015
FIGURE 2-15.
N02015 06/03
Truck Cab
N2-13
FIGURE 2-16.
1. Door Opening Seal
N2-14
Truck Cab
FIGURE 2-17.
1. Door Opening Seal
06/03 N02015
GLASS REPLACEMENT
Replacement Procedure
Recommended Tools/Supplies
Cold knife, pneumatic knife, or a piano wire
cutting device, long knife. Cutout tools are
available at an auto glass supply store.
Sika Corporation
30800 Stephenson Hwy.
Madison Heights, MI 48071
Toll Free Number: 1-800-688-7452
Fax number: 248-616-7452
http://www.sika.com or
http://www.sikasolutions.com
N02015 06/03
6. Using a clean lint free cloth, apply Sika Aktivator to the black ceramic Frit surrounding the
new window. Use a clean cloth and wipe off
Sika Aktivator. Allow ten minutes to dry.
7. For the side windows, be sure to utilize a total
of six or seven (SM2897) glass installation
bumpers to the cab, equally spaced around the
previously marked glass perimeter, approximately 0.75 in (19 mm) inboard from where the
edge of the glass will be when installed.
NOTE: Be careful not to place adhesive too far
inboard, as it will make any future replacement more
difficult.
Truck Cab
N2-15
9. Immediately install glass to the vehicle. Carefully locate the glass in place with the black
masking side towards the adhesive. Carefully
press firmly, but not abruptly, into place assuring that the glass is properly seated. DO NOT
POUND THE GLASS INTO PLACE.
Removal
Be certain to follow all the adhesive manufacturer's instructions for use, including full allowances for proper curing time. The curing time
may be as long as 48 hours (24 hours for some
adhesives, then double it) before a truck can be
driven.
11. Remove tape or prop from glass after the cure
time has expired.
N2-16
Truck Cab
3. Weatherstrip Material
4. Sheet Metal
06/03 N02015
Installation
1. If the weatherstrip material previously removed
is broken, weathered, or damaged in any way,
use new rubber weatherstrip material.
NOTE: Using a non-oily rubber lubricant on the
weatherstrip material and cab opening will make the
following installation easier:
3. After the glass is in place, go around the weatherstrip and push in on the locking lip (2, Figure
2-18 or 2-19) to secure the glass in the weatherstrip.
4. If windshield was being replaced, lower windshield wiper arms/blades back to the glass.
N02015 06/03
Truck Cab
3. Weatherstrip Material
4. Sheet Metal
N2-17
NOTES
N2-18
Truck Cab
06/03 N02015
SECTION N3
CAB COMPONENTS
INDEX
N03020
Cab Components
N3-1
NOTES
N3-2
Cab Components
N03020
CAB COMPONENTS
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Installation
The windshield wipers are operated by a 24 volt electric motor. The wipers can be adjusted for a variable
intermittent delay or a constant low or high speed by
the switch mounted on the instrument panel.
Wiper Motor Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the five screws, inside of the cab, that
secure the visor assembly/access panel. Lower
the access panel.
2. Disconnect the wiper motor harness connector.
3. Remove nut (4, Figure 3-1), and disconnect the
linkage from the motor. Hold the linkage stationary while loosening the nut.
4. Remove three capscrews (3) and the washers
attaching motor (1) to plate (2). Remove the
motor assembly.
N03020
3. Capscrew
4. Nut
Cab Components
4. Cap
5. Washer
6. Nut
N3-3
Installation
1. Place wiper arm (1, Figure 3-2) into the position
noted during removal. Install the washer and
nut (2). Tighten the nut to 142-177 in. lbs. (1620 Nm). Close the cover.
2. Connect the washer hose to the wiper arm.
3. Pillow Block
2. Linkage Retainer
N3-4
Cab Components
N03020
WINDSHIELD WASHER
Operation
The windshield washer, mounted on the right side of
the hydraulic components cabinet behind the cab,
has a 3.8 liter (1 gal) plastic reservoir (1, Figure 3-5)
with a 24 volt electric pump (2).
The washer is controlled by the windshield wiper
switch mounted on the instrument panel and is activated by pressing the knob. When the switch is activated, washing solution is pumped through the outlet
hose (3) and fed to a jet located in each of the windshield wiper arms.
Service
If windshield washer maintenance is required, check
the strainer opening for obstructions and inspect the
hoses for damage. Check the voltage to the pump
from the control switch. If the pump is inoperable,
replace it with a new pump assembly.
Note: The pump is only available as an assembly
and cannot be repaired.
N03020
Cab Components
3. Outlet Hose
4. Filler Cap
N3-5
OPERATOR COMFORT
OPERATOR SEAT
The operator's seat provides a fully adjustable cushioned ride for driver comfort and easy operation.
Adjustment
The following adjustments are available to the operator while sitting in the seat.
Headrest (1, Figure 32-5): Adjust up, down, fore,
or aft by moving headrest to desired position.
Armrests (3): Rotate adjusting knob until armrest
is at desired angle.
Backrest: Rotate knob (9) to adjust the backrest
angle.
Seat Belt Harness: Operator must always have
four-point seat belt harness (2) buckled in place
and properly adjusted during machine operation.
Air Lumbar Support: Use lumbar hand pump (8)
to adjust the air support. A release button on the
back of the hand pump releases the air from the
lumbar support.
Weight Adjustment: Adjust the weight
adjustment dial to match the approximate weight
of the operator. The dial ranges from 110 - 265
lbs. (50 - 120 kg).
Fore/Aft Adjustment: Lift lever (8) and hold.
Slide the seat to a comfortable position and
release the lever to lock the adjustment.
Seat Height: Lift lever (7) and then push the
lever down to raise the seat one level. Remove
body weight from the seat to allow it to adjust. To
lower the seat one level, push lever (7) down,
and then pull the lever up. Release lever to lock
the adjustment.
Seat Tilt: Pull lever (7) up to tilt the seat
rearward. Push the lever down to tilt the seat
forward. Release the lever to lock the
adjustment.
N3-6
Cab Components
6. Fore/Aft Lever
7. Seat Height/Tilt
Adjustment Lever
8. Lumbar Pump
9. Backrest Angle
Adjustment Knob
N03020
SECTION N4
OPERATOR COMFORT
INDEX
OPERATOR COMFORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-3
HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-3
Heater/Air Conditioner Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-3
COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-4
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-4
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-4
Heater Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-4
Fan Motor And Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-5
Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-5
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-5
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-5
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-7
Environmental Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-7
OPERATOR CAB AIR CONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-8
PRINCIPLES OF REFRIGERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-8
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-8
Refrigeration - The Act Of Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-9
The Refrigeration Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-9
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-10
Compressor (Refrigerant Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-10
Service Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-10
Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-10
Receiver-Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-10
Expansion Block Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-11
Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-11
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-12
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-12
Compressor Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-12
Trinary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-13
SYSTEM SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-14
SYSTEM OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-15
Handling and Reusing PAG Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-15
Oil Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-15
Replacing Oil After Servicing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-15
Setting Up a New Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-15
REFRIGERANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-16
Recycled Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-16
Reclaimed Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-16
Refrigerant Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-16
R-134a Refrigerant Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-16
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-1
N4-2
Operator Comfort
N04024
OPERATOR COMFORT
HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER
Fan control knob (4, Figure 4-1) controls the cab air
fan motor. The fan motor is a 3-speed motor: low
(setting 1), medium (setting 2), and high (setting 3).
Speeds are selected by rotating the control knob
clockwise to the desired position. OFF is full counterclockwise position (setting 0).
Operation
Heat for the cab is provided by passing coolant from
the engine cooling system through a heater coil.
Blowers move air across the heating coil which
warms the air for heating or defrosting.
An engine driven refrigerant compressor passes
refrigerant through an evaporator coil mounted in the
same enclosure. The same blowers used for heating
move air across the evaporator to provide cooled air
through the outlet vents.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-3
COMPONENTS
Figures 4-2 and 4-4 illustrate both the heater system
and air conditioning system parts contained in the
cab mounted enclosure. Refer to Air Conditioning
System in this section for additional information
regarding air conditioning system components,
maintenance and repair.
Circuit Breakers
Before attempting to troubleshoot the electrical circuit in the heater enclosure, turn key switch ON and
verify circuit breaker CB31 (located on power distribution module behind operator's seat) and the internal heater circuit breaker have not opened by
verifying 24 VDC is present on the junction block
(38, Figure 4-4).
Relays
Five relays (9, Figure 4-2) control the air dampers,
A/C compressor and the heater valve. All five relays
require 12VDC through the coil which is supplied by
a 24VDC to 12VDC converter (2).
One relay (Relay 1) switches 24 volt current to actuate the A/C compressor clutch. The temperature
control switch, heater valve and the actuator motors
all operate on 12 VDC current.
Heater Core
Heater core (46, Figure 4-4) receives engine coolant through heater valve (14) when heat is selected.
If temperature control potentiometer (37) is placed
in between the red and blue area, or turned counterclockwise to the blue area, coolant flow should be
blocked.
If the selector switch (34) and heater valve appear
to be working properly, yet no heat is apparent in
heater core (46), the core may be restricted.
Remove and clean or replace the core.
N4-4
Operator Comfort
N04024
Filter
Service
Filter (19) and cab filter (2, Figure 4-3) in the front
access panel of the cab need periodic cleaning to
prevent restrictions in air circulation. Restricted filters
will decrease the performance of the heater and air
conditioner. The recommended interval for cleaning
and inspection is 250 hours, but in extremely dusty
conditions, the filters may need daily service and
inspection, especially the outer panel filter on the cab
shell. The filter elements should be cleaned with
water and dried in a dust free environment before
reinstallation. Replace the filter element every 2000
hours or sooner if inspection indicates a clogged or
damaged filter.
Actuators
Two rotary actuator motors (8, Figure 4-4) are
installed inside the heater housing and are used to
actuate the flappers for the following:
Defroster outlet
A failure to switch one of the above modes of operation may be caused by a faulty actuator.
Test
Visually inspect the flappers (11, 43) and linkage for
the function being diagnosed. Make certain the flapper is not binding or obstructed, preventing movement from one mode to the other.
Verify voltage (12 VDC) is present at the actuator
when the toggle switch is closed or absent when the
toggle switch is opened.
2. Cab Filter
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-5
N4-6
13. Foam
14. Heater Valve
15. Grommet
16. Casing
17. Gasket
18. Filter Holder
19. Air Filter
20. Knob
21. Filter Holder
22. Foam Insulation
23. Nut
24. Flatwasher
25. Cover
26. Louver
27. Louver Adapter
28. Foam
29. Plate, Coil
30. Evaporator Core
31. O-Ring
32. Expansion Valve
33. Knob
34. Toggle Switch (3 pos.)
35. Overlay
36. Plate, Control
37. Potentiometer
38. Block, Junction
Operator Comfort
39. Thermostat
40. Hose
41. Switch, Blower
42. Screw
43. Discharge Flapper
44. Toggle Switch (2 pos.)
45. Bracket, Flapper
46. Heater Core
47. Relay (12V)
48. Circuit Breaker
49. Resistor (12 Volt)
50. Resistor (24 Volt)
51. Retainer, Blower
N04024
N04024
7. Evaporator
8. Expansion Valve
9. Suction Line
10. Test Gauges & Manifold
11. Compressor
12. Refrigerant Container
Operator Comfort
N4-7
(HFC) refrigerant, commonly identified as HFC-134a or R-134a, is being used in most current mobile air conditioning systems. Additionally, the practice of releasing either refrigerant to the atmosphere during the charging/
recharging procedure is prohibited.
These restrictions require the use of equipment and procedures which are significantly different from those traditionally used in air conditioning service techniques. The use of new equipment and techniques allows for complete
recovery of refrigerants, which will not only help to protect the environment, but through the recycling of the refrigerant will preserve the physical supply, and help to reduce the cost of the refrigerant.
PRINCIPLES OF REFRIGERATION
Mining and construction vehicles have unique characteristics of vibration, shock-loading, operator
changes, and climate conditions that present different design and installation problems for air conditioning systems. Off-highway equipment, in general, is
unique enough that normal automotive or highway
truck engineering is not sufficient to provide the reliability to endure the various work cycles encountered.
N4-8
Operator Comfort
N04024
In an air conditioning system, the refrigerant is circulated under pressure through the five major components in a closed circuit. At these points in the
system, the refrigerant undergoes predetermined
pressure and temperature changes.
The compressor (refrigerant pump) takes in low pressure heat laden refrigerant gas through the suction
valve (low side), and as its name indicates, pressurizes the heat laden refrigerant and forces it through
the discharge valve (high side) on to the condenser.
Ambient air, passing through the condenser removes
heat from the circulating refrigerant resulting in the
conversion of the refrigerant from gas to liquid.
The liquid refrigerant moves on to the receiver drier
where impurities are filtered out, and moisture
removed. This component also serves as the temporary storage unit for some liquid refrigerant.
The liquid refrigerant, still under high pressure, then
flows to the expansion valve. This valve meters the
amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator. As the
refrigerant passes through the valve, it becomes a
low temperature, low pressure liquid and saturated
vapor. This causes the refrigerant to become cold.
The remaining low pressure liquid immediately starts
to boil and vaporize as it approaches the evaporator,
adding to the cooling. The hot, humid air of the cab is
pulled through the evaporator by the evaporator
blower. Since the refrigerant is colder than the air, it
absorbs the heat from the air producing cool air
which is pushed back into the cab. The moisture in
the air condenses upon movement into the evaporator and drops into the drain pan from which it drains
out of the cab.
The cycle is completed when the heated low pressure gas is again drawn into the compressor through
the suction side.
This simplified explanation of the principles of refrigeration does not call attention to the fine points of
refrigeration technology. Some of these will be covered in the following discussions of the components,
controls, and techniques involved in preparing the
unit for efficient operation.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-9
Service Valves
Quick-connect hose end fittings with integral service
valves attach to system service ports for servicing
the unit. A manifold gauge set is connected into the
system at the service valve ports and all procedures,
such as discharging, evacuating and charging the
system, are performed through the service valves.
Condenser
The condenser receives the high pressure, high-temperature refrigerant vapor from the compressor and
condenses it to high pressure, hot liquid.
It is designed to allow heat movement from the hot
refrigerant vapor to the cooler outside air. The cooling of the refrigerant changes the vapor to liquid.
Heat exchange is accomplished using cooler air flowing through the condenser. Condenser cooling is
achieved by air flowing from the radiator fan along
with ram air provided by vehicle movement. The radiator fan moves more than 50% of condenser air flow
unless travel speed is at least 25 mph.
N4-10
Ram air condensers depend upon the vehicle movement to force a large volume of air past the fins and
tubes of the condenser. The condenser is usually
located in front of the radiator or on the roof of the
truck.
Condensing of the refrigerant is the change of state
of the refrigerant from a vapor to a liquid. The action
is affected by the pressure of the refrigerant in the
coil and air flow through the condenser. Condensing
pressure in an AC system is the controlled pressure
of the refrigerant which affects the temperature at
which it condenses to liquid, giving off large quantities of heat in the process. The condensing point is
sufficiently high to create a wide temperature differential between the hot refrigerant vapor and the air
passing over the condenser fins and tubes. This difference permits rapid heat transfer from the refrigerant to ambient air.
Receiver-Drier
The receiver-drier is an important part of the air conditioning system. The drier receives the liquid refrigerant from the condenser and removes any moisture
and foreign matter present which may have entered
the system. The receiver section of the tank is
designed to store extra refrigerant until it is needed
by the evaporator. The storage of this refrigerant is
temporary and is dependent on the demand of the
expansion valve.
A desiccant is a solid substance capable of removing
moisture from gas, liquid or solid. It is held in place
within the receiver between two screens, which also
act as strainers.
The receiver-drier is also equipped with a sight glass
and a moisture indicator. The sight glass can give a
good indication of the charge of the system. If the
sight glass is not clear, the system is low on refrigerant.
The moisture indicator is a device to notify service
personnel that the drier is full of moisture and must
be replaced. The indicator is blue when the component is free from moisture. When the indicator turns
beige or tan, the drier must be replaced.
Operator Comfort
N04024
Evaporator
N04024
Heat exchange, as explained under condenser operation, depends upon a temperature differential of the
air and the refrigerant. The greater the temperature
differential, the greater will be the amount of heat
exchanged between the air and the refrigerant. A
high heat load condition, as is generally encountered
when the air conditioning system is turned on, will
allow rapid heat transfer between the air and the
cooler refrigerant.
The change of state of the refrigerant in and going
through the evaporator coil is as important as that of
the air flow over the coil.
All or most of the liquid that did not change to vapor
in the expansion valve or connecting tubes boils
(expands) and vaporizes immediately in the evaporator, becoming very cold. As the process of heat loss
from the air to the evaporator coil surface is taking
place, any moisture (humidity) in the air condenses
on the cool outside surface of the evaporator coil and
is drained off as water.
At atmospheric pressure, refrigerant boils at a point
lower than water freezes. Therefore, the temperature
in the evaporator must be controlled so that the water
collecting on the coil surface does not freeze on and
between the fins and restrict air flow. The evaporator
temperature is controlled through pressure inside the
evaporator, and temperature and pressure at the outlet of the evaporator.
Operator Comfort
N4-11
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
Compressor Clutch
Thermostat
An electromagnetic clutch is used on the compressor
to provide a means of constant temperature control
of the cab. The clutch is controlled by a thermostat in
the evaporator which is set initially by the driver to a
predetermined point. Evaporator temperature is then
maintained by the cycling action of the clutch.
The thermostat is simply a thermal device which controls an electrical switch. When warm, the switch is
closed; when cold, it is open. Most thermostats have
a positive OFF position as a means to turn the clutch
off regardless of temperature.
The bellows type thermostat has a capillary tube connected to it which is filled with refrigerant. The capillary tube is attached to the bellows inside of the
thermostat. Expansion of the gases inside the capillary tube exerts pressure on the bellows, which in
turn closes the contacts at a predetermined temperature.
N4-12
Operator Comfort
N04024
Trinary Switch
This switch is mounted on the receiver-drier and has
three functions, as implied by the name:
1. Disengage the compressor clutch when system
pressure is too high.
2. Disengage the compressor clutch when system
pressure is too low.
3. Engage and disengage the radiator fan drive
clutch during normal variation of system pressure.
The Trinary switch performs three distinct functions to monitor and control refrigerant pressure in
the system. This switch is installed on the receiverdrier. The switch functions are:
Terminals 1 & 2 are connected internally through two,
normally closed pressure switches in series, the low
pressure switch and the high pressure switch.
CLOSES
Low
Pressure
High
Pressure
300-350 psi
210-250 psi
Fan Clutch
The pressures listed above are typical of pressures at the receiver-drier. Due to normal system
flow losses and the distance between the service
port and the receiver-drier, it is expected that
actual system pressure displayed on the gauge
will normally be approximately 20 psi higher. This
factor should be observed when checking for
proper operation of the switch.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-13
SYSTEM SERVICING
N4-14
Operator Comfort
N04024
SYSTEM OIL
R-134a air conditioning systems require the use of
Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) lubricating oil. This is the
only oil recommended for use in this system. At
present time, General Motors part number
(12345923) is the oil that is furnished in the system
on Komatsu trucks. This clear oil can be found at AC
Delco dealers. In some areas, it can be found from
other suppliers as U-Con 488. The only other alternative is General Motors part number (12356151)
which is now becoming more popular and is
expected to become the furnished oil in Komatsu AC
systems. This oil is light blue-green in color and may
be mixed with the other recommended oil.
REPLACING OIL
Component
Oil to add
Condenser
2-3 ounces
Evaporator
1 ounce
Receiver-Drier
2 ounces
Compressor
Block Valve
(Expansion)
Hoses
Oil Quantity
It is critical to keep the correct amount of lubricant in
the air conditioning system at all times. Failure to do
so could result in damage to the compressor.
Damage to the compressor can be a result from not
only a lack of oil, but from too much oil, also. A lack
of oil will cause excess friction and wear on moving
parts. Excessive oil can result in slugging the compressor. This condition occurs when the compressor
attempts to compress liquid oil as opposed to vaporized refrigerant. Since liquid cannot be compressed,
damage to internal parts results.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-15
REFRIGERANT
Recycled Refrigerant
Recycled refrigerant has been extracted from a
mobile air conditioning system using a recovery unit.
The refrigerant is cleaned by the recovery unit as it
passes through filters located on the unit that meet
specifications stipulated by Society of Automotive
Engineers, SAE J2099. The refrigerant that has
passed through the filtering process has only been
cleaned of contaminants that are associated with
mobile systems. Therefore, recycled refrigerant from
mobile systems is only acceptable for reuse in mobile
systems.
Reclaimed Refrigerant
Reclaimed refrigerant has been filtered through a
more thorough filtering process and has been processed to the same standards of purity as virgin
refrigerant. Because of this, reclaimed refrigerant is
acceptable for use in all systems, not just mobile.
The reclaiming equipment used for this process is
expensive, and therefore, not common among normal maintenance shops. Equipment such as this is
more commonly found in air conditioning specialty
shops.
Always use new, recycled, or reclaimed refrigerant when charging a system. Failure to adhere to
this recommendation may result in premature
wear or damage to air conditioning system components and poor cooling performance.
Refrigerant Quantity
If not enough refrigerant is charged into the system,
cooling ability will be diminished. If too much refrigerant is charged into the system, the system will operate at higher pressures, and in some cases, may
damage system components. Exceeding the specified refrigerant charge will not provide better cooling.
2. 60 lb. Cylinder
N4-16
Operator Comfort
N04024
To accomplish this, the recovery/recycle station separates the oil from the refrigerant and filters the
refrigerant multiple times to reduce moisture, acidity,
and particulate matter found in a used refrigerant.
Leak Detector
The electronic detector (Figure 4-8) is very accurate
and safe. It is a small hand-held device with a flexible
probe used to seek refrigerant leaks. A buzzer, alarm
or light will announce the presence of even the smallest leak.
Some leak detectors are only applicable to one type
of refrigerant. Ensure the leak detector being used
applies to the refrigerant in the system.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-17
3. Service Hose
Connection
Vacuum Pump
Service Valves
Because an air conditioning system is a sealed system, two service valves are provided on the compressor to enable diagnostic tests, system charging
or evacuation. Connecting the applicable hoses from
the manifold gauge set to the compressor service
valves enables each of these to be readily performed.
The vacuum pump (Figure 4-10) is used to completely evacuate all of the refrigerant, air, and moisture from the system by deliberately lowering the
pressure within the system to the point where water
turns to a vapor (boils) and together with all air and
refrigerant is withdrawn (pumped) from the system.
N4-18
Operator Comfort
N04024
The low side gauge, registers both vacuum and pressure. The vacuum side of the scale is calibrated from
0 to 30 inches of mercury (in. Hg). The pressure side
of the scale is calibrated to 150 psi.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-19
Shut off engine. DO NOT attempt to connect service equipment when the engine is running.
1. Be sure all valves on the manifold are closed all
the way (turn them clockwise).
2. Check the hose connections on the manifold for
tightness.
3. Locate the low and high side system service fittings and remove their protective caps.
4. Connect the two service hoses from the manifold to the correct service valves on the compressor as shown in Figure 4-12. (High side to
compressor discharge valve and low side to
compressor suction side.) Do not open service
valves at this time.
N4-20
Operator Comfort
N04024
The initial purging is best accomplished when connected to recovery or recycle equipment. With the
center hose connected to the recovery station, service hoses connected to the high and low sides of
the system, we can begin the purging. The manifold
valves and service valves should be closed. Activating the vacuum pump will now pull any air or moisture out of the center hose. This will require only a
few minutes of time. The hose is the only area that
is being placed in a vacuum and this will not require
a lengthy process. Closing the valve will then insure
the hose is purged. It is now safe to open the other
manifold valves.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-21
N4-22
Operator Comfort
N04024
Tracer Dyes
Tracer dyes are available that can be added to the
system as refrigerant is added. The system is then
operated to thoroughly circulate the dye. As refrigerant escapes, it leaves a trace of the dye at the point
of leakage, which is then detected using an ultraviolet light (black light), revealing a bright fluorescent
glow.
Soap and Water
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-23
SYSTEM REPAIR
System Cleaning
When performing repairs on air conditioning components, a thorough inspection should be performed.
Inspect the parts that have been removed. If they
contain any loose or foreign material, the rest of the
system should be checked for the source of the
material.
Lines
Always use two wrenches when disconnecting or
connecting AC fittings attached to metal lines. You
are working with copper and aluminum tubing which
can kink or break easily. When grommets or clamps
are used to prevent line vibration, be certain these
are in place and secured.
Fitting Size
Foot Pounds
Newton Meters
10 - 15 ft.lbs.
14 - 20 Nm
24 - 29 ft.lbs.
33 - 39 Nm
10
26 - 31 ft.lbs.
36 - 42 Nm
12
30 - 35 ft.lbs.
41 - 47 Nm
Installation torque for the single M10 or 3/8 in. capscrews securing the inlet and outlet fittings onto the
compressor ports is 11 - 25 ft.lbs. (15 - 34 Nm).
Expansion Valve
When removing the expansion valve from the system, remove the insulation, clean the area and disconnect the line from the receiver-drier. Detach the
capillary (bulb) and external equalizer tube (if
present) from their mounting locations. Remove the
expansion valve from the evaporator inlet. Expansion
valve service is limited to cleaning or replacing the filter screen. If this is not the problem, replace the
valve. Secure the capillary and equalizer, if used, to
clean surfaces and replace or attach any insulating
material.
N4-24
Operator Comfort
N04024
Receiver-Drier
Clutch
Thermostat
A thermostat can be stuck open or closed due to contact point wear or fusion. The thermostat temperature
sensing element (capillary tube) may be broken or
kinked closed and therefore unable to sense evaporator temperature.
When thermostat contact points are stuck open or
the sensing element can not sense temperature in
the evaporator, the clutch will not engage (no AC
system operation). Causes are a loss of charge in
the capillary tube or a kink, burned thermostat contact or just no contact. When troubleshooting, bypass
the thermostat by hot wiring the clutch coil with a
fused lead. If the clutch engages, replace the thermostat.
Thermostat contact points may be fused (burned)
closed and the clutch will not disengage. Causes are
a faulty switch that could be due to fatigue. The thermostat must be replaced. When the clutch will not
disengage you may also note that condensate has
frozen on the evaporator fins and blocked air flow.
There will also be below normal pressure on the low
side of the system. Side effects can be compressor
damage caused by oil accumulation (refrigeration oil
tends to accumulate at the coldest spot inside the
system) and lower than normal suction pressure that
can starve the compressor of oil.
Compressor
The compressor can fail due to shaft seal leaks (no
refrigerant in the system), defective valve plates,
bearings, or other internal parts or problems associated with high or low pressure, heat, or lack of lubrication. Be sure the compressor is securely mounted
and the clutch pulley is properly aligned with the
drive pulley.
Use a mechanic's stethoscope to listen for noises
inside the compressor.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-25
FIGURE 4-14.
Servicing the Compressor Clutch
* RECOMMENDED TOOLS FOR COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
J-9399
**J-9403
Spanner Wrench
**J-25030
J-9401
J-8433
Pulley Puller
J-9395
Puller Pilot
***J-24092
Puller Legs
J-8092
Universal Handle
J-9481
J-9480-01
J-9480-02
1. Belt Pulley
2. Clutch Hub/Drive
Plate
3. Shaft
4. Locknut
FIGURE 4-15.
Use the proper tools to remove and replace
clutch components. Using the recommended
tooling helps prevent damage to compressor
components during maintenance.
Do not drive or pound on the clutch plate, hub
assembly, or shaft. Internal damage to the compressor may result.
N4-26
Operator Comfort
3. Clutch Hub
N04024
FIGURE 4-18.
1. Clutch Hub
FIGURE 4-16.
1. Clutch Assembly
2. Pulley
FIGURE 4-17.
1. Square Key
N04024
2. Keyway in Shaft
Operator Comfort
N4-27
Pulley Removal
If the resistance of the coil is not within the specifications, the clutch will not operate properly. Remove
the retaining ring and replace the coil.
Pulley Installation
FIGURE 4-21.
1. Bearing Installer
2. Universal Handle
1. Pulley Puller
2. Pulley Assembly
FIGURE 4-20.
3. Puller Pilot
N4-28
Operator Comfort
N04024
2. Spacer
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-29
N4-30
Operator Comfort
N04024
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-31
N4-32
Operator Comfort
N04024
TROUBLESHOOTING
Pre-Diagnosis Checks
If the system indicates Insufficient cooling, or no
cooling, the following points should be checked
before proceeding with the system diagnosis procedures.
NOTE: If the truck being serviced is a model 930E,
be certain the rest switch in the cab is ON. Place the
GF cutout switch in the CUTOUT position.
Preparing For Diagnosis
Successfully servicing an air conditioning system,
beyond the basic procedures outlined in the previous
section, requires additional knowledge of system
testing and diagnosis.
A good working knowledge of the manifold gauge set
is required to correctly test and diagnose an air conditioning system. An accurate testing sequence is
usually the quickest way to diagnose an internal
problem. When correctly done, diagnosis becomes
an accurate procedure rather than guesswork.
Preliminary Steps
The following steps outline the correct procedures
necessary to prepare the truck and the system for
testing and diagnosis:
1. Correctly connect the manifold gauge set to the
system. Refer to the connection and purging
procedures outlined in this section.
2. Run the engine with the air conditioning system
on for five to ten minutes to stabilize the system.
3. With the engine and the system at normal operating temperature, conduct a Performance Test
as outlined in this section.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-33
7. If these conditions are met, the system is considered normal. Shut down engine. Remove
gauges and install the caps on the service
valves.
N4-34
Operator Comfort
N04024
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-35
Possible Causes
- Extremely low or no refrigerant in the system.
Possible leak in the system.
N4-36
Operator Comfort
N04024
- Leaks in system.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-37
Possible Causes
Kink in a line, collapsed hose liners, plugged
receiver-drier or condenser, etc.
N4-38
Operator Comfort
N04024
Possible Causes
- Thermostat malfunctioning possibly due to
incorrect installation.
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-39
Possible Causes
N4-40
Operator Comfort
N04024
Date:____________Hour Meter:________________
Maintenance Interval
COMPONENT
(months)
3
12
Done
Maintenance Interval
COMPONENT
1. Compressor
Check noise level
Check clutch pulley
Check oil level
Run system 5 minutes
Check belt tension
(80-100) lbs; V-belt
3
4. Expansion Valve
2. Condenser
Clean dirt, bugs, leaves, etc.
from coils (w/compressed air)
Verify engine fan clutch is
engaging (if installed)
Check inlet/outlet for
obstructions or damage
3. Receiver-Drier
12
Done
5. Evaporator
Clean dirt, bugs, leaves, etc.
from fins (w/ compressed air)
(months)
6. Other Components
Check discharge lines
(hot to touch)
Check suction lines
(cold to touch)
Inspect fittings/clamps/hoses
Check thermostatic switch for
proper operation
Outlets in cab: 40F to 50 F
Inspect all wiring connections
Operate all manual controls
through full functions
N04024
Operator Comfort
N4-41
NOTES:
N4-42
Operator Comfort
N04024
SECTION N5
OPERATOR CAB CONTROLS
INDEX
OPERATOR CAB CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-3
STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-3
Steering Column Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-3
STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-5
Horn Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-5
Telescope Lock Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-5
Tilt Wheel Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-5
Turn Signal/Headlight Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-5
DYNAMIC RETARDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-5
Retarder Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-6
Dynamic Retarder/Service Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-6
Accelerator (Throttle) Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-6
Starting on a Grade With a Loaded Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-6
GRADE/SPEED RETARD CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-7
HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER COMPARTMENT AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-8
Heater/Air Conditioner Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-8
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-9
OVERHEAD PANEL AND DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-9
CENTER CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-10
F-N-R Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-10
Hoist Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-11
Raising The Dump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-11
Lowering The Dump Body: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-11
Ash Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-11
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-11
L.H. Window Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-11
R.H. Window Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-11
Engine Shutdown Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-11
Override/Fault Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-12
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-12
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Adjust Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-12
PSC Download Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-13
Engine Diagnostics Download Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-13
Engine Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-13
TCI Download Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-13
N05055
N5-1
N5-2
N05055
Removal
1. Shut off engine by turning the key switch OFF.
Allow at least 90 seconds for the steering accumulators to bleed down. Turn the steering
wheel to be certain no pressure remains.
2. Open the battery disconnect switch.
3. Remove access cover (15, Figure 5-1) from the
front of the cab. Do not remove hydraulic lines
from steering control unit unless necessary.
4. Loosen capscrews (10) on steering control unit
(7) and move it out of the way.
5. Disconnect steering column wire harness(s).
6. Remove screws retaining trim cover (14) where
steering column enters the instrument panel
and remove cover.
7. Remove capscrews (12) and brackets (8 & 9).
8. Remove four capscrews (4). Access to these
screws is from the front of the cab through the
access opening.
9. Lift the steering column from instrument panel.
N05055
N5-3
8. Check for proper steering wheel rotation without binding. Be certain wheel returns to neutral
after rotating 1/4 turn left and right.
N5-4
N05055
DYNAMIC RETARDING
N05055
N5-5
N5-6
N05055
N05055
N5-7
N5-8
N05055
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument panel (7, Figure 5-2) includes a wide variety of switches, gauges, and indicators. Refer to Instrument
Panel and Indicator Lights, in this chapter for a detailed description of function and location of these components.
Radio Speakers
Windshield Wipers
Windshield wipers (15, Figure 5-2) are powered by
an electric motor. Refer to Instrument Panel and Indicator Lights, in this chapter for a location and
description of the windshield wiper and washer controls.
N05055
N5-9
CENTER CONSOLE
The center console (1, Figure 5-5) contains:
(1) Center Console
(2) F-N-R Selector Switch
(3) Hoist Control Lever
(4) Ash Tray
(5) Cigar/Cigarette Lighter
(6) L.H. Window Control Switch
(7) R.H. Window Control Switch
(8) Engine Shutdown Switch
(9) Override/Fault Reset Switch
(10) Blank - Not Used on this truck
(11) RSC Switch
(12) Retarder Speed Control Dial
(13) Propulsion System Controller (PSC)
Diagnostic Port
(14) Engine Diagnostic Port (CENSE)
(15) Truck Control Interface (TCI)
(16) Passenger Seat
(mounted on top of the right hand
portion of the Console structure)
(17) Engine Diagnostic Port (QUANTAM)
(18) Modular Mining Port (Optional)
(19) Data Store Button
The truck must be stopped before the selector handle is moved to a drive position.
N5-10
N05055
Ash Tray
Hoist control (3, Figure 5-5) is a four position handoperated lever located between the operator seat
and the center console (see illustration below).
Lighter
Lighter (5, Figure 5-5) may be used for lighting
cigars/cigarettes. Always use caution with smoking
materials!
This socket may also be used for a 12 VDC power
supply.
N05055
N5-11
Override/Fault reset
switch (9, Figure 55) is spring-loaded
to the OFF position.
When pushed in
and
held,
this
switch may be used for several functions.
In some other truck models, this position is used for an engine idle switch.
OUT
ON
With the RSC switch on and dial adjusted, the system will function as follows: As truck speed increases
to the "set" speed and throttle pedal released,
dynamic retarding will apply. As truck speed tries to
increase, the amount of retarding effort will automatically adjust to keep the selected speed. When truck
speed decreases, the retarding effort is reduced to
maintain the selected speed. If truck speed continues
to decrease to approximately 3 mph (4.8 kph) below
"set" speed, dynamic retarding will turn off automatically. If truck speed must be reduced further, the
operator can turn the adjust dial to a new setting or
depress the foot operated retard pedal.
If the operator depresses the foot operated retard
pedal and the retard effort called for is greater than
that from the automatic system, the foot pedal retard
will override RSC.
N5-12
N05055
PAYLOAD METER
Payload meter (1, Figure 5-6) and download connector (2) are used to provide management with operational data such as tonnage hauled and cycle times.
The payload meter is located on the back wall inside
of the cab.
Refer to Section M, Payload Meter, for a more complete description of the payload meter and its functions.
Passenger Seat
Passenger seat (16, Figure 5-5) is mounted on top of
the right hand portion of the center console structure.
The area beneath the passenger seat provides a
cabinet for various 24 VDC electrical components.
FIGURE 5-6. PAYLOAD METER
Modular Mining System (Optional)
2. Download Connector
N05055
N5-13
NOTES
N5-14
N05055
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(Figure 5-7)
The operator must understand the function and operation of each instrument and control. Control functions are identified with "International" symbols that
the operator should learn to recognize immediately.
This knowledge is essential for proper and safe operation.
Items that are marked optional do not apply to
every truck.
N05055
N5-15
WIRE NUMBERS
1. 712/21PB/11S
2. 11S/11TD/11R
3. 712/47S/47L/710
4. 11L/48A/48B
5. 11L/48F
6. 49/710
7. N/A
8. 712/28E
9. 11L/11RB
10. 712/69M/SPR56/SPR57/
SPR58
N5-16
11. 71/79M/SPR55/79H/72F/
SPR54
12. 712BL/52B/39H/710/SPR59
13. 71/52C/21PB/21
14. 41TS/74X/74Z/710
15. 45R/710
16. 41H/710
17. 45L/710
18. 41TS/77/77A/710
19. 712D/710/49
20. 712D/31PS/710/49
21. 712D/31TS/710/49
22. 712D/38G/710/49
23. 15V/72MT/49/710
24. 11L/36
25. 15V/34BT/710/49
26. 710/72RQ
27. 11D/41L/41TS
28. High 66S/Low 66L/710/66P
Park/712W / Washer 66
29. 49/41TS
N05055
Key Switch
Key switch (1, Figure 5-7) is a three position (OFF,
RUN, START) switch.
Starting
When the switch is rotated one position clockwise, it
is in the RUN position and all electrical circuits
(except START are activated.
1. With the selector switch in NEUTRAL, rotate
the keyswitch fully clockwise to the START
position, and hold this position until the engine
starts. The START position is spring-loaded to
return to RUN when the key is released.
2. After the engine has started, place the rest
switch in the OFF position (de-activate the
"rest" mode of operation). Refer to discussion of
rest switch (26, Figure 5-7).
N05055
N5-17
Operation
1. Stop the truck, and reduce engine rpm to low
idle. Place the selector switch in NEUTRAL and
apply the parking brake switch. Place the rest
switch in ON position (put drive system in "rest"
mode of operation). Refer to the discussion of
the rest switch later in this chapter.
2. Press the top of the engine shutdown switch to
select the ON (center) position. Press the top of
the switch again to activate the timer delay
(momentary position). Release the switch and
allow it to return to the ON position.
When the engine shutdown timer has been
activated, the timer delay indicator light (C4,
Figure 5-8) in the overhead status panel will
illuminate to indicate that the shutdown timing
sequence has started. The engine will continue
to idle for approximately 5 minutes to allow for
proper engine cool-down before stopping.
3. Turn the keyswitch counterclockwise to the
OFF position to cause the engine to shutdown
when the timing sequence is complete. When
the engine stops, this will activate the hydraulic
bleeddown timer and turn off the 24 VDC electric circuits controlled by the keyswitch.
NOTE: To cancel the 5 minute idle timer sequence,
press the timer delay shutdown switch to the OFF
(lower) position. If the keyswitch is in the OFF
position, the engine will stop. If the keyswitch is in the
ON position, the engine will continue to run.
4. With keyswitch OFF, and engine stopped, wait
at least 90 seconds. Ensure the steering circuit
is completely bled down by turning the steering
wheel back and forth several times. No front
wheel movement will occur when hydraulic
pressure is relieved.
N5-18
N05055
Do not use this switch to stop truck, unless footoperated treadle valve is inoperative. Use of this
switch applies rear service brakes at full, unmodulated pressure!
Do not use brake lock for parking. With engine
stopped, hydraulic pressure will bleed down,
allowing brakes to release!
Parking Brake Control
The parking brake (13, Figure 5-7) is
spring applied and hydraulically released.
It is designed to hold a stationary truck
when the engine is shutdown and keyswitch is turned OFF. The truck must be completely
stopped before applying the parking brake, or damage may occur to parking brake.To apply the parking
brake, press the rocker switch toward the ON symbol. To release the parking brake, press the rocker
switch toward the OFF symbol. When the keyswitch
is ON and parking brake switch is applied, the parking brake indicator light (A3, overhead panel, Figure
5-8) will be illuminated.
NOTE: Do not use the parking brake at shovel or
dump. With keyswitch ON and engine running,
sudden shock caused by loading or dumping could
cause the system's motion sensor to release the park
brake.
N05055
N5-19
Tachometer
Voltmeter
This light (15, Figure 5-7) illuminates to indicate the right turn
signals are operating when the
turn signal lever on the steering
column is moved upward. Moving the lever to its center position
will turn indicator off.
185-207F (85-97C)
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge (22, Figure 5-7)
indicates how much diesel fuel is
in the fuel tank.
The fuel tank capacity is 1200
gallons (4542 liters).
Speedometer
The speedometer (18, Figure 5-7) indicates the truck
speed in miles per hour (mph), or with optional
speedometer, it may indicate truck speed in kilometers per hour (kph). The display also shows payload
meter information. For more information, see section
M, Payload Meter
N5-20
N05055
Hourmeter
N05055
Rest Switch
N5-21
Light Switch
N5-22
N05055
Indicator
Description
Indicator Color
Wire Index
Row /
Column
Indicator
Description
Indicator Color
Wire Index
A1*
Not Used
12FD/34TL
A5
No Power
Red-12M/75-6PI
B5
Propulsion System
Warning
Amber-12F/79WI
C5
Propulsion System
Temperature
Amber -12F/34TW
D5
Red-12F/34TGI
E5
Stop Engine
Red-12M/528A
A6
NO PROPEL
Red-12M/75NPI
B6
C6*
Amber-12MD/72NR
D6*
Reduced Propulsion
System
Amber-12MD/72LP
E6*
Retard @ Continuous
Level
Amber-12MD/76LR
B1*
Red-12FD/33A
C1
Red-12F/33K
D1
Not Used
Red-12F/79V
E1
Red-12F/33L
A2*
Red-12FD4/34LL
B2*
Low Automatic
Lubrication Pressure
Amber-12FD8/
68LLP
C2*
Amber-12FD/31CB
D2*
Amber-12MD/39
E2*
Low Fuel
Amber-12MD/38
A3*
Amber-12MD/52A
B3*
Amber-12MD/44L
C3*
Body Up
Amber-12MD6/63L
D3*
Dynamic Retarding
Amber-12MD/44DL
E3
Stop Engine
Red-12M/509MA
A4*
Not Used
Amber-12MD/SPR2
B4*
Amber-12MD/47L
C4*
Amber-12MD/23L1
D4*
Amber-12MD/31R
E4*
Check Engine
Amber-12MD7/419
N05055
-Switches7
11L/45L/45R
33H/528/710/712
N5-23
Not Used
B1
RED
C1
Low Accumulator
Precharge Pressure
RED
D1
Not Used
E1
ACCUMULATOR
PRECHARGE
The low accumulator precharge warning light, if illuminated, indicates low nitrogen precharge for the
steering accumulator(s). To check for proper accumulator nitrogen precharge, engine must be stopped
and hydraulic system completely bled down; then
turn keyswitch to RUN position. Warning light will
NOT illuminate if system is properly charged. The
warning light will flash if the nitrogen precharge
within the accumulator(s) is below 1100 45 psi
(7585 310 kPa).
If low accumulator
precharge warning
light flashes, notify
maintenance personnel. Do not attempt further operation until the
accumulators have been recharged with nitrogen
to 1400 psi (9653 kPa). Sufficient energy for
emergency steering may not be available, if system is not properly charged.
RED
N5-24
N05055
A2
RED
A3
Parking Brake
AMBER
B2
AMBER
B3
Service Brake
AMBER
C2
Circuit Breaker
Tripped
AMBER
C3
Body Up
AMBER
D2
AMBER
D3
Dynamic Retarding
AMBER
E2
Low Fuel
AMBER
E3
Stop Engine
RED
N05055
N5-25
A4
Not Used
C4
Engine Shutdown
Timer - 5 Minute Idle
D4
E4
Check Engine
AMBER
AMBER
N5-26
N05055
A5
No Power
RED
B5
Propulsion System
Warning
AMBER
C5
Propulsion System
Temperature
AMBER
D5
RED
E5
Stop Engine
RED
A5. NO POWER
This red "no propel/no retard" indicator light indicates
a fault has occurred which has eliminated the retarding and propulsion capability. A warning buzzer will
also sound.
If this condition occurs, the operator should
safely stop the truck, move selector switch to
NEUTRAL, apply the park brake, shutdown
engine, and notify maintenance personnel immediately.
B5. PROPULSION SYSTEM WARNING
When this amber indicator is illuminated, the light
indicates a "no propel" or "no retard" event may be
about to occur. It is intended to provide advance
notice of these events when possible. It does not
require the operator to stop the truck, but may suggest that truck operation be appropriately modified, in
case a red alarm does occur.
N05055
N5-27
B6
The amber "reduced propulsion" light is used to indicate that the full AC drive system performance in propulsion is not available. At this time, the only event
that should activate this light is the use of "limp home
mode". This mode of operation requires a technician
to enable.
C6
A6
D6
E6
No Propel
Reduced Propulsion
RED
AMBER
A6. NO PROPEL
The red "no propel" light indicates a fault has
occurred which has eliminated the propulsion capability.
If this condition occurs, the operator should
safely stop the truck, move selector switch to
NEUTRAL, apply the park brake, shutdown
engine, and notify maintenance personnel immediately.
N5-28
N05055
N05055
N5-29
NOTES
N5-30
N05055
SECTION P
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
INDEX
P01024
Index
P1-1
NOTES
P1-2
Index
P01024
SECTION P2
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
INDEX
P02036 11/02
P2-1
NOTES
P2-2
11/02 P02036
U.S.
Gallons
280
74
Cooling System:
Komatsu SSDA16V160 Engine
594
157
Hydraulic System:
Refer to Hydraulic Tank Service
1325
350
76
20
4542
1200
P02036 11/02
Crankcase:
(including 4 oil filters)
Komatsu SSDA16V160 Engine
Due to differences in gear ratio and component evolution/design, wheel motor service intervals may be
unit number and/or mine specific. Because of the
wide variety of factors involved, it is necessary to
consult your area Komatsu representative for all
wheel motor service intervals and instructions. General intervals for oil service and sampling are listed in
the interval charts.
P2-3
COOLING SYSTEM
ANTI-FREEZE RECOMMENDATIONS
(Ethylene Glycol Permanent Type Anti-Freeze)
Percentage of
Anti-Freeze
Protection
To:
10
+ 23 F
- 5 C
20
+ 16 F
- 9 C
25
+ 11 F
- 11 C
30
+ 4 F
- 16 C
35
- 3 F
- 19 C
40
- 12 F
- 24 C
45
- 23 F
- 30 C
50
- 34 F
- 36 C
55
- 48 F
- 44 C
60
- 62 F
- 52 C
P2-4
FIGURE 2-1.
1. Remote Control Box
2. System Switch
3. Start Switch
4. FULL Light
5. VALVE OPEN
Light
11/02 P02036
LUBRICATION CHART
P02036 11/02
P2-5
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
P2-6
11/02 P02036
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
FIGURE 2-2.
FIGURE 2-3.
FIGURE 2-4.
1. Filter Cover
P02036 11/02
2. Cab Filter
P2-7
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
P2-8
11/02 P02036
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
P02036 11/02
P2-9
*These checks are required only after the initial hours of operation (such as: the commissioning of a new truck,
or after a new or rebuilt component installation), check:
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
*1. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FILTERS - Replace filter elements only, after the initial 100 and 250 hours of
operation; then at each 500 hours of operation thereafter.
P2-10
11/02 P02036
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
1. ENGINE - Refer to Cummins Operation & Maintenance manual for complete specifications regarding
engine lube oil specifications.
NOTE: If the engine is equipped with the *Centinel
oil system and/or the Eliminator filter system,
engine oil and filter change intervals are extended
beyond 250 hours. Refer to Cummins Operation &
Maintenance manual for specific oil and filter change
intervals.
* The Centinel system is a duty-cycle-dependent
lubrication management system whereby oil is
blended with the fuel and burned and an extension of
oil change intervals can occur.
a. Change engine oil. Lube Key A.
b. Replace lube oil filters.
NOTE: When installing spin-on filter elements, follow
the instructions as specified by the filter manufacturer.
The tightening instructions are normally printed on the
outside of the filter. Do not use a wrench or strap to
tighten filter elements.
c. If the truck is equipped with a reserve engine
oil tank, change the reserve tank oil filter.
d. Check belt tension and condition of each
accessory belt. Refer to Cummins Operation
& Maintenance manual for specific adjustment instructions.
e. Check the torque on the mounting capscrews
on cooling fan (1, Figure 2-5). Tighten eight
capscrews (2) to 175 ft.lbs. (237 Nm).
2. COOLING SYSTEM a. COOLANT MIXTURE - Check for proper
coolant mixture. Add coolant as required.
b. COOLANT FILTERS - Change coolant filters.
c. COOLING SYSTEM HOSES - Check cooling
system hoses for damage and signs of deterioration.
Refer to the Cummins maintenance manual for coolant filter replacement instructions and proper coolant
mixture instructions.
(CONTINUED NEXT PAGE)
P02036 11/02
P2-11
COMMENTS
3.
FUEL FILTERS - Change the fuel filters (fuel separators). Refer to Cummins Operation & Maintenance
manual for specific filter replacement instructions.
4.
5.
6.
HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVESHAFT & U-JOINTS Add one or two applications of grease to each grease
fitting. Check that each bearing of the cross & bearing
assembly is receiving grease. Lube Key D.
7.
CHECKED INITIALS
FIGURE 2-5.
P2-12
FIGURE 2-6.
11/02 P02036
COMMENTS
8.
9.
CHECKED INITIALS
*This check is required only after the first 250 hours of operation (such as: the commissioning of a new truck,
or after a new or rebuilt component installation), check:
FIGURE 2-7.
1. Magnetic Plug
2. Cover
FIGURE 2-8.
P02036 11/02
P2-13
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
P2-14
11/02 P02036
COMMENTS
1.
2.
3.
FUEL TANK - Remove the breather and clean in solvent. Dry with pressurized air and reinstall.
4.
5.
6.
CHECKED INITIALS
P02036 11/02
2. Auxiliary Blower
P2-15
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
COMMENTS
CHECKED INITIALS
P2-16
11/02 P02036
SECTION P3
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM
INDEX
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-3
GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-3
SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-5
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-6
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-6
Pressure Failure Detection Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-7
INJECTOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-8
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-9
LUBRICANT REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-9
System Priming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-9
LUBRICANT PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-9
Pump Housing Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-9
Pump Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-9
Pressure Control Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-9
INJECTORS (SL-1 Series H)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-10
Injector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-10
Injector Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-10
SYSTEM CHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-10
Lubrication Cycle Timer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P3-11
Lubrication Cycle Timer Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P3-11
FILTER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P3-11
PUMP REBUILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-12
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-12
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-12
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-14
P03018 04/00
P3-1
P3-2
04/00
P03018
P03018 04/00
7. Pressure Gauge
8. Pump Assembly
9. Flow Control Valve
10. Pressure Switch
11. Relay Box
12. Grease Reservoir
13. Vent Hose
Always
read
and
follow
the
fluid
manufacturer's recommendations regarding
fluid compatibility, and the use of protective
clothing and equipment.
This equipment generates very high grease pressure. Extreme caution should be used when
operating this equipment as material leaks from
loose or ruptured components can inject fluid
through the skin and into the body causing serious bodily injury including possible need for
amputation. Adequate protection is recommended to prevent splashing of material onto the
skin or into the eyes.
If any fluid appears to penetrate the skin, get
emergency medical care immediately! Do not
treat as a simple cut. Tell attending physician
exactly what fluid was injected.
P3-3
P3-4
04/00
P03018
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Filter (21, Figure 3-2)
A filter assembly mounted on the grease reservoir filters the grease prior to refilling the reservoir from the
shop supply. A bypass indicator alerts service personnel when the filter requires replacement.
This pressure switch de-energizes the pump solenoid relay when the grease line pressure reaches the
switch pressure setting, turning off the motor and
pump.
The flow control valve mounted on the manifold, controls the amount of oil flow to the hydraulic motor.
The flow control valve has been factory adjusted
and the setting should not be disturbed.
Each injector delivers a controlled amount of pressurized lubricant to a designated lube point. Refer to
Figure 3-2 for locations.
P03018 04/00
P3-5
SYSTEM OPERATION
Normal Operation
1. During truck operation, the lubrication cycle
timer (1, Figure 3-4) will energize the system at a
preset time interval.
2. The timer provides 24 VDC through the normally
closed relay, RB7K5 (4) used to energize the
pump solenoid valve (5), allowing hydraulic oil
provided by the truck steering pump circuit to
flow to the pump motor and initiate a pumping
cycle.
3. The hydraulic oil pressure from the steering circuit is reduced to 325 to 350 psi (2 240 to 2 413
kPa) by the pressure reducing valve (4, Figure 33) before entering the motor. In addition, the
amount of oil supplied to the pump is limited by
the flow control valve (6). Pump pressure can be
read using the gauge (5) mounted on the manifold.
4. With oil flowing into the hydraulic motor, the
grease pump will operate, pumping grease from
the reservoir to the injectors (13), through a
check valve (10) and to the vent valve (11).
P3-6
04/00
P03018
P03018 04/00
P3-7
INJECTOR OPERATION
STAGE 1.
The injector piston (2) is in its normal or
rest position. The discharge chamber (3) is
filled with lubricant from the previous cycle.
Under the pressure of incoming lubricant (6),
the slide valve (5) is about to open the passage (4) leading to the measuring chamber
(1) above the injector piston (2).
STAGE 2.
When the slide valve (5) uncovers the passage (4), lubricant (6) is admitted to the measuring chamber (1) above the injector piston
(2) which forces lubricant from the discharge
chamber (3) through the outlet port (7) to the
bearing.
STAGE 3.
As the injector piston (2) completes its
stroke, it pushes the slide valve (5) past the
passage (4), cutting off further admission of
lubricant (6) to the passage (4) and measuring chamber (1). The injector piston (2) and
slide valve (5) remain in this position until
lubricant pressure in the supply line (6) is
vented.
STAGE 4.
After venting, the injector spring expands,
causing the slide valve (5) to move, so that
the passage (4) and discharge chamber (3)
are connected by a valve port (8). Further
expansion of the spring causes the piston to
move upward, forcing the lubricant in the
measuring chamber (1) through the passage
(4) and valve port (8) to refill the discharge
chamber (3).
The injector is now ready for the next cycle.
P3-8
04/00
P03018
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
LUBRICANT REQUIREMENTS
Grease requirements will depend on ambient temperatures encountered during truck operation:
NLGI
No.2
System Priming
The system must be full of grease and free of air
pockets to function properly. After maintenance, if the
primary or secondary lubrication lines were replaced,
it will be necessary to prime the system to eject all
entrapped air.
1. Fill lube reservoir with lubricant, if necessary.
2. To purge air from the main supply line, remove
the main supply line at the canister and connect
an external grease supply to the line.
3. Remove plugs from each injector group in
sequence (right front, left front, and rear axle).
4. Using the external grease source, pump grease
until grease appears at the group of injectors
and re-install the pipe plug. Repeat for remaining injector groups.
5. Remove the caps from each injector and connect an external grease supply to the zerk on
the injector and pump until grease appears at
the far end of the individual grease hose or the
joint being greased.
LUBRICANT PUMP
Pump Housing Oil Level
The pump housing must be filled to the proper level
with SAE 10W-30 motor oil. Oil level should be
checked at 1000 hour intervals. To add oil, remove
pipe plug (3, Figure 3-5) and fill housing to bottom of
plug hole.
P03018 04/00
P3-9
Operating Pressure:
Minimum - 1850 psi (12 755 kPa)
Maximum - 3500 psi (24 133 kPa)
Recommended - 2500 psi (17 238 kPa)
Maximum Vent Pressure - (Recharge)
600 psi (4 137 kPa)
Injector Adjustment
The injectors may be adjusted to supply from 0.008
in3 to 0.08 in3 (0.13 cc to 1.31 cc) of lubricant per
injection cycle. The injector piston travel distance
determines the amount of lubricant supplied. This
travel is in turn controlled by an adjusting screw in
the top of the injector housing.
Turn the adjusting screw (1, Figure 4-9) counterclockwise to increase lubricant amount delivered and
clockwise to decrease the lubricant amount.
When the injector is not pressurized, maximum injector delivery volume is attained by turning the adjusting screw (1) fully counterclockwise until the
indicating pin (8) just touches the adjusting screw. At
the maximum delivery point, about 0.38 inch (9.7
mm) adjusting screw threads should be showing.
Decrease the delivered lubricant amount by turning
the adjusting screw clockwise to limit injector piston
travel. If only half the lubricant is needed, turn the
adjusting screw to the point where about 0.19 inch
(4.8 mm) threads are showing. The injector will be
set at minimum delivery point with about 0.009 inch
(0.22 mm) thread showing.
SYSTEM CHECKOUT
To check system operation (not including timer), proceed as follows:
1. Turn keyswitch ON and start the engine.
2. Actuate the lube system test switch at the reservoir/pump assembly on the front bumper.
3. The motor and pump should operate until the
system attains 2500 psi (17 237 kPa).
NOTE: The piston assembly (8) has a visible indicator pin at the top of the assembly to verify the injector
operation.
P3-10
04/00
P03018
To check the solid state timer operation without waiting for the normal timer setting, proceed as follows:
FILTER ASSEMBLY
The filter assembly element (5, Figure 3-8) should be
replaced if the bypass indicator (2) shows excessive
element restriction.
P03018 04/00
P3-11
PUMP REBUILD
Disassembly
1. Remove the four socket head screws (33, Figure 3-9) and separate the manifold (37) from
the hydraulic motor (42).
Crankrod (5)
P3-12
04/00
P03018
1. Screw
2. Outer Weight
3. Inner Weight
4. Retaining Ring
5. Crankrod
6. Retaining Ring
7. Eccentric Crank
8. Ball Bearing
9. Outlet Pin
10. O-Ring
11. Plunger Tube
12. Screw
13. Wrist Pin Bushing
14. Wrist Pin Anchor
15. Backup Washer
P03018 04/00
P3-13
Assembly
Note: Use Loctite 242 (or equivalent) thread locker
on all torqued, threaded connections. Use extreme
care to prevent thread locker from flowing into
adjacent areas such as clearance fits and ball check.
Allow a minimum of 30 minutes cure time before
operating pump.
1. Support ball bearing (8, Figure 3-9) inner race
and press eccentric (7) into bore. Install small
retaining rings (6).
2. Assemble crankrod assembly parts; large
retaining rings (4), inner weights (3), outer
weights (2) and install flat head screws (1).
Tighten to 100 - 110 in. lbs. (11.3 - 12.4 N.m)
torque.
3. Using a new O-ring (10), install plunger tube
(11) on outlet pin (9). Tighten to 100 - 110 in.
lbs. (11.3 - 12.4 N.m) torque.
4. Assemble the wrist pin anchor (14), backup
washer (15), cup seal (16) and plunger link rod
(17) onto plunger tube (11). Tighten to 100 - 110
in. lbs. (11.3 - 12.4 N.m) torque.
5. Assemble spring (18), ball (19), and plunger
(20) on plunger link rod (17). Tighten plunger to
100 - 110 in. lbs. (11.3 - 12.4 N.m) torque.
6. Install reciprocating tube (21) onto wrist pin
anchor (14). Tighten to 20 - 25 ft. lbs. (27.1 33.9 N.m) torque.
7. Install cup seal (22), O-ring (23), cylinder (24),
ball cage (25), ball (26), O-ring (27) and check
seat (28) into reciprocating tube (21). Tighten
check seat housing to 20 - 25 ft. lbs. (27.1 33.9 N.m) torque.
P3-14
04/00
P03018
Timer malfunction.
Replace relay.
NOTE: On initial startup of the lube system, the timing capacitor will not contain a charge, therefore the first timing
cycle will be about double in length compared to the normal interval. Subsequent timer cycles should be as
specified.
P03018 04/00
P3-15
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Replace relay.
Timer BAT (+) connection not on circuit continuously connected to BAT (+) terminal during operation of vehicle.
Replace timer.
Replace timer.
P3-16
04/00
P03018
POSSIBLE CAUSES
TROUBLE: Timer Turns On At Intervals Two (2) To Ten (10) Times More Often Than Set Time Interval
Electrical noise is being introduced into the power
supply to the timer overcoming suppressor capacitor causing uncontrolled turn-on of its output relay.
P03018 04/00
P3-17
P3-18
04/00
P03018
SECTION Q
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
C
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-3
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2-3
Maintenance and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2-3
Charging Procedure
Brake Accumulators (Hydraulic Cabinet) . . . . . J3-27
Brake Accumulators (Frame Cabinet). . . . . . . . J3-31
Steering Accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-24
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-3
Q01046
Checkout Procedures
Brake Apply Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J4-3
Brake Cooling Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L10-8
Data Sheet (Hydraulic System). . . . . . . . . . . . L10-15
Electrical Propulsion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-3
Hoist Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L10-8
Steering Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L10-3
Circuit Breaker Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-17
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-10
Control Cabinet, Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-50
Cooling System (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3-3
Cooling System (Disc Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L2-8
Cylinders
Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L8-14
Steering
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G3-13
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-8
Alphabetical Index
Q1-1
Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2-5
Heater/Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coil, Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Motor and Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N4-3
N4-5
N4-4
N4-5
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2-4
HYDRAIR II Suspensions
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2-3
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-3
F
Fan, Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-5
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C5-4
Hoist Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L9-5
5 Minute Idle Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
Flow Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-4
Flushing, Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L10-12
G
Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2-4
Ladders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2-4
Load Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-32
Lubrication and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-3
Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-5
Lubrication System, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-3
Q1-2
Alphabetical Index
Q01046
Manifold,
Bleeddown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-3
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3-3
Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G2-8
P
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J7-3
Pedal
Accelerator, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-54
Retarder, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-54
Service Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-5
Plates, Warning and Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-1
Portable Test Unit (PTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-6
Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C2-3
Solenoid
Bleeddown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L4-5
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M8-1
Specifications
HYDRAIR II Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-10
HYDRAIR II Nitrogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-10
Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-3
Lubrication Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-5
Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3
Steering
Accumulator Charging Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . L6-24
Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-3
Hydraulic Check-Out Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . L10-3
Control Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L5-3
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-25
Q01046
Alphabetical Index
Q1-3
V
Switch
Accumulator Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L4-7
Body-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-15
Differential Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-20
Hoist Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-16
Low Steering Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L4-5
T
Tank
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B4-3
Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-16
Valves
Bleeddown Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L4-5
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-3
Dual Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-17
Flow Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L4-8
Hoist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-3
Hoist Pilot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L8-11
Hoist Relief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L10-8
Pressure Compensator, Adjustment . . . . . . . . .L10-4
Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L5-3
Unloader Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L10-4
W
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-1
Weights (Truck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-4
Wheel Bearing Adjustment
Front Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G3-9
Front Wheel Bearing Seal Adjustment. . . . . . . G3-11
Wheel Hub and Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G3-3
Wheel Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G5-6
Wheels and Tires
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G2-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G2-5
Window, Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-9
Windshield Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3-5
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3-3
U
Unloader Valve, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L10-4
Q1-4
Alphabetical Index
Q01046
SECTION R
SYSTEM SCHEMATICS
INDEX
R01061
Index
R1-1
NOTES
R1-2
Index
R01061